Home › MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual

MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual

File info: application/pdf · 286 pages · 41.74MB

SH-081262ENG-AB

MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual - Mitsubishi ...

(Read these precautions before using this product.) Before using MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controllers, please read the manuals for the product and ...

Full PDF Document

If the inline viewer fails, it will open the original document in compatibility mode automatically. You can also open the file directly.

Extracted Text

MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Read these precautions before using this product.) Before using MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controllers, please read the manuals for the product and the relevant manuals introduced in those manuals carefully, and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. If products are used in a different way from that specified by manufacturers, the protection function of the products may not work properly. In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " WARNING" and " CAUTION".
WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to serious consequences. Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety. Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference.

[Design Precautions] WARNING
Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. (1) Emergency stop circuits, protection circuits, and protective interlock circuits for conflicting operations (such as forward/reverse rotations or upper/lower limit positioning) must be configured external to the programmable controller. (2) When the programmable controller detects an abnormal condition, it stops the operation and all outputs are: � Turned off if the overcurrent or overvoltage protection of the power supply module is activated. � Held or turned off according to the parameter setting if the self-diagnostic function of the CPU module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error. (3) All outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part, such as an I/O control part, where the CPU module cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety mechanism or a fail-safe circuit external to the programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit example, refer to Page 253 General Safety Requirements in this manual. (4) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a relay and transistor in an output circuit. Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.
In an output circuit, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply. If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
Configure a circuit so that the external power supply is turned off first and then the programmable controller. If the programmable controller is turned off first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to manuals for the network used. For the manuals, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.
When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as program modification, parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running programmable controller, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents. When a Safety CPU is used, data cannot be modified while the Safety CPU is in SAFETY MODE.
2

[Design Precautions] WARNING
Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device, immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.
Do not write any data to the "system area" and "write-protect area" of the buffer memory in the module. Also, do not use any "use prohibited" signals as an output signal from the CPU module to each module. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system. For the "system area", "write-protect area", and the "use prohibited" signals, refer to the user's manual for the module used. For areas used for safety communications, they are protected from being written by users, and thus safety communications failure caused by data writing does not occur.
If a communication cable is disconnected, the network may be unstable, resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations. Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail. Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident. When safety communications are used, an interlock by the safety station interlock function protects the system from an incorrect output or malfunction.
[Precautions for using digital-analog converter modules and high speed digital-analog converter modules]
Analog outputs may remain on due to a failure of the module. Configure an external interlock circuit for output signals that could cause a serious accident.
[Precautions for using channel isolated analog-digital converter modules (with signal conditioning function)]
When using the module in the system where a 2-wire transmitter is not connected, use the module where the current input range is set. If the actual system configuration is not consistent with the range setting, it may cause an electric shock.
3

[Design Precautions] WARNING
[Precautions for using high-speed counter modules and flexible high-speed I/O control modules]
Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a transistor for external output. Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.
[Precautions for using flexible high-speed I/O control modules]
When changing data and operating status of the running module from an external device such as a personal computer connected, configure an interlock circuit external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system always operates safely. In addition, before performing online operations, determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and the module in case of a communication failure due to poor contact of cables.
[Precautions for using positioning modules, Simple Motion modules, and Motion modules]
Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. (1) Machine OPR (Original Point Return) is controlled by two kinds of data: an OPR direction and an OPR speed. Deceleration starts when the near-point dog signal turns on. If an incorrect OPR direction is set, motion control may continue without deceleration. To prevent machine damage caused by this, configure an interlock circuit external to the programmable controller. (2) When the positioning module detects an error, the motion slows down and stops or the motion suddenly stops, depending on the stop group setting in parameter. Set the parameters to meet the specifications of the positioning control system used. In addition, set the OPR parameters and positioning data within the specified setting range. (3) Outputs may remain on or off, or become undefined due to a failure of a component such as an insulation element and transistor in an output circuit, where the positioning module cannot detect any error. In a system where the incorrect outputs could cause a serious accident, configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals.
An absolute position restoration by the positioning module may turn off the servo-on signal (servo off) for approximately 60ms + scan time, and the motor may run unexpectedly. If this causes a problem, provide an electromagnetic brake to lock the motor during absolute position restoration.
4

[Design Precautions]
WARNING
[Precautions for using Motion CPUs, Simple Motion modules, and Motion modules]
Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
If safety standards (ex., robot safety rules, etc.,) apply to the system using the module, servo amplifier and servo motor, make sure that the safety standards are satisfied.
Construct a safety circuit externally of the module or servo amplifier if the abnormal operation of the module or servo amplifier differs from the safety directive operation in the system.
Do not remove the SSCNET cable while turning on the control circuit power supply of modules and servo amplifier. Do not see directly the light generated from SSCNET connector of the module or servo amplifier and the end of SSCNET cable. When the light gets into eyes, you may feel something wrong with eyes. (The light source of SSCNET complies with class1 defined in JISC6802 or IEC60825-1.)
[Precautions for using CC-Link IE Controller Network (when optical fiber cables are used)]
The optical transmitter and receiver of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module use laser diodes (class 1 in accordance with IEC 60825-1). Do not look directly at a laser beam. Doing so may harm your eyes.
[Precautions for using CC-Link system master/local modules]
To set a refresh device in the module parameters, select the device Y for the remote output (RY) refresh device. If a device other than Y, such as M and L, is selected, the CPU module holds the device status even after its status is changed to STOP. For how to stop data link, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application).
[Precautions for using C Controller modules]
In the settings of refresh parameters, link output (LY) refresh devices and remote output (RY) refresh devices do not allow the specification of Y. Thus, the CPU module holds the device status even after its status is changed to STOP.
[Precautions for using I/O modules with diagnostic functions (SIL2 mode)]
When the I/O module with diagnostic functions detects a fault in the external power supply or programmable controller, it turns off outputs. Configure an external circuit to ensure that the power source of a hazard is shut off by turning off the outputs. Failure to do so may result in an accident.
When a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short-circuit flows, the output module with diagnostic functions detects an error and turns off all outputs. Note that if the overcurrent state continues for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
Configure protection circuits, such as a fuse and breaker, external to the output module with diagnostic functions.
When a communication failure occurs with CC-Link IE Field Network, the I/O module with diagnostic functions turns off outputs. However, the program does not automatically turn off outputs. Create a program that turns off outputs when a CC-Link IE Field Network error is detected. If CC-Link IE Field Network is restored with outputs on, connected machines may suddenly operate, resulting in an accident.
Create an interlock circuit which uses reset buttons so that the system does not restart automatically after executing safety functions and turning off outputs.
5

[Design Precautions]
WARNING
[Precautions for using channel isolated analog-digital converter modules (SIL2 mode)]
When the R60AD8-G detects a fault in the external power supply or programmable controller, a digital operation value becomes an OFF value (equivalent to 0V/0mA) in all channels. Configure an external circuit to ensure that the power source of a hazard is shut off when a digital operation value of the R60AD8-G is an OFF value (equivalent to 0V/0mA). Failure to do so may result in an accident.
When a communication failure occurs with CC-Link IE Field Network, a digital operation value of the R60AD8-G becomes an OFF value (equivalent to 0V/0mA). Check the communication status information and configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will operate safely. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
[Precautions for using channel isolated digital-analog converter modules (SIL2 mode)]
When the R60DA8-G detects a fault in the external power supply or programmable controller, an analog output value becomes an OFF value (0V/0mA) in all channels. Configure an external circuit to ensure that the power source of a hazard is shut off when an analog output value of the R60DA8-G is an OFF value (0V/0mA). Failure to do so may result in an accident.
When a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short-circuit flows, the R60DA8-G detects an error and an analog output value becomes an OFF value (0V/0mA) in all channels. Note that if the overcurrent state continues for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
When a communication failure occurs with CC-Link IE Field Network, an analog output value of the R60DA8-G becomes an OFF value (0V/0mA) in all channels. Check the communication status information and configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will operate safely. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
Create an interlock circuit which uses reset buttons so that the system does not restart automatically after safety functions are executed and an analog output value becomes an OFF value (0V/0mA).
[Precautions for using redundant function modules]
The optical transmitter and receiver of the redundant function module use laser diodes (class 1 in accordance with IEC 60825-1/JIS C6802). Do not look directly at a laser beam. Doing so may harm your eyes.
[Precautions for using products in a Class , Division 2 environment]
Products with the Cl., DIV.2 mark on the rating plate are suitable for use in Class , Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations, or nonhazardous locations only. This mark indicates that the product is certified for use in the Class , Division 2 environment where flammable gases, vapors, or liquids exist under abnormal conditions. When using the products in the Class , Division 2 environment, observe the following to reduce the risk of explosion. � This device is open-type and is to be installed in an enclosure suitable for the environment and require a tool or key to open. � Warning - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of any component may impair suitability for Class , Division 2. � Warning - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect equipment while the circuit is live or unless the area is known to be free of ignitable concentrations. � Do not open the cover of the CPU module and remove the battery unless the area is known to be nonhazardous. � All MELSEC iQ-R modules (except base modules) are to be connected to a base module only.
6

[Design Precautions]
WARNING
[Precautions for using Process CPUs]
If the redundant system fails, control of the entire system may not be maintained depending on the failure mode. The control may not be maintained in the following case either: An error in an extension base unit or in a module on an extension base unit is detected and causes a stop error of the control system, system switching occurs, and a similar error is detected and causes a stop error of the standby system (new control system). To ensure that the entire system operates safely even in these cases, configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller.
[Precautions for using SIL2 Process CPUs]
When the programmable controller compliant with SIL2 (IEC 61508) detects a fault in the external power supply or itself, it turns off all outputs in the safety system. Configure an external circuit to ensure that the power source of a hazard is shut off by turning off the outputs. Failure to do so may result in an accident.
Configure short current protection circuits for safety relays and protection circuits, such as a fuse and breaker, external to the programmable controller.
When a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short-circuit flows, modules operating in SIL2 mode detect an error and turn off all outputs. Note that if the overcurrent state continues for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
When changing data and operating status, and modifying program of the running programmable controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to the SIL2 Process CPU, configure an interlock circuit in the program or external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system always operates safely. In addition, before performing online operations, determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and SIL2 Process CPU in case of a communication failure due to poor contact of cables.
Do not use any "use prohibited" signals of modules as an I/O signal since they are used by the system. Do not write any data to the "use prohibited" areas in the buffer memory of modules. For the "use prohibited" signals, refer to the user's manual for each module. Do not turn on or off these signals on a program since normal operations cannot be guaranteed. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.
When a module operating in SIL2 mode detects an error in a safety communication path, it turns off outputs. However, the program does not automatically turn off outputs. Create a program that turns off outputs when an error is detected in a safety communication path. If safety communications are restored with outputs on, connected devices may suddenly operate, resulting in an accident.
Create an interlock circuit which uses reset buttons so that the system does not restart automatically after executing safety functions and turning off outputs.
In the case of a communication failure in the network, the status of the error station will be as follows: (1) Inputs from remote stations are not refreshed. (2) All outputs from remote stations are turned off. Check the communication status information and configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will operate safely. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module operating in SIL2 mode. Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.
7

[Design Precautions]
WARNING
[Precautions for using Safety CPUs]
When the safety programmable controller detects a fault in the external power supply or itself, it turns off all outputs in the safety system. Configure an external circuit to ensure that the power source of a hazard is shut off by turning off the outputs. Failure to do so may result in an accident.
Configure short current protection circuits for safety relays and protection circuits, such as a fuse and breaker, external to the safety programmable controller.
When a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short-circuit flows, the CC-Link IE Field Network remote I/O module (with safety functions) detects an error and turns off all outputs. Note that if the overcurrent state continues for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
When changing data and operating status, and modifying program of the running safety programmable controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to the Safety CPU, configure an interlock circuit in the program or external to the safety programmable controller to ensure that the entire system always operates safely. In addition, before performing online operations, determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and Safety CPU in case of a communication failure due to poor contact of cables.
Do not use any "use prohibited" signals as a remote I/O signal since they are used by the system. Do not write any data to the "use prohibited" areas in the remote register. For the "use prohibited" signals, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application). Do not turn on or off these signals on a program since normal operations cannot be guaranteed. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.
When the CC-Link IE Field Network remote I/O module (with safety functions) detects a CC-Link IE Field Network error, it turns off outputs. However, the program does not automatically turn off outputs. Create a program that turns off outputs when a CC-Link IE Field Network error is detected. If CC-Link IE Field Network is restored with outputs on, connected machines may suddenly operate, resulting in an accident.
Ensure that the system does not restart automatically after executing safety functions and turning off outputs. Create a circuit that does not allow the system to restart until an intentional start has been manually issued by an operator.
In the case of a communication failure in the network, the CPU module recognizes the communication destination station as an error station. The error station will be as follows: (1) All safety inputs from the error station to the CPU module are not refreshed. (2) All safety outputs from the error station to external devices are turned off because the CPU module does not communicate with the error station. Check the communication status information and configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will operate safely. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of the CC-Link IE Field Network remote I/O module (with safety functions). Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.
8

[Design Precautions] WARNING
[Precautions for using remote head modules]
Configure safety circuits external to the remote head module to ensure that the entire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the remote head module. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. (1) Emergency stop circuits, protection circuits, and protective interlock circuits for conflicting operations (such as forward/reverse rotations or upper/lower limit positioning) must be configured external to the remote head module. (2) When the remote head module detects an abnormal condition, outputs are: � Held or turned off according to the parameter setting of each module mounted on the main base unit or extension base unit if the self-diagnostic function of the remote head module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error. (3) All outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part, such as an I/O control part, where the remote head module cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety mechanism or a fail-safe circuit external to the remote head module. For a fail-safe circuit example, refer to Page 253 General Safety Requirements in this manual.
Configure a circuit so that the remote head module is turned on first and then the external power supply. If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
When connecting an external device with a remote head module to modify data of a running remote head module, configure an interlock circuit in the program of the master station to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running remote head module, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.
Especially, when a remote head module is remotely controlled by an external device, immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the remote head module due to a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program of the master station, and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and remote head module in case of a communication failure.
Do not write any data to the buffer memory in the remote head module. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.
Do not write any data from the remote head module to the "system area" and "write-protect area" of the buffer memory in each module. Also, do not use any "use prohibited" signals as an output signal from the remote head module to each module. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system. For the "system area", "write-protect area", and the "use prohibited" signals, refer to the user's manual for the module used.
9

[Design Precautions]
WARNING
[Precautions for using AnyWireASLINK master modules]
An AnyWireASLINK system has no control function for ensuring safety.
[Precautions for using DeviceNet master/slave modules]
If a communication failure occurs on a DeviceNet network, faulty nodes will behave as (1) and (2) below. Configure an interlock circuit in the program using the communication status information of slave nodes and provide a safety mechanism external to the slave node to ensure that the entire system will operate safely. (1) The master node (RJ71DN91) holds input data which had been received from slave nodes before the communication failure occurred. (2) Whether output signals of a slave node are turned off or held is determined by the specifications of slave nodes or the parameter settings of the master node. When the RJ71DN91 is used as a slave node, it holds input data that had been received from the master node before the communication failure occurred.
[Precautions for using PROFIBUS-DP modules]
If a communication failure occurs with a PROFIBUS-DP network, the operating status of each station is as follows: (1) The DP-Master holds the input data when the communication failure occurs. (2) If the DP-Master goes down, the output status of each DP-Slave depends on the parameter setting of the DP-Master. (3) If a DP-Slave goes down, the output status of other DP-Slaves depends on the parameter setting of the DP-Master. Check the diagnostic information and configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will operate safely. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
The assignments of I/O signals and buffer memory areas differ depending on whether the RJ71PB91V is used as the DP-Master or a DP-Slave. Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the program does not run with the incorrect station type.
If a stop error occurs in the CPU module, the operating status of the DP-Master is as follows. In a redundant system, however, the operation is the same as when "CPU Error Output Mode Setting" is set to "Hold" regardless of its setting value. (1) When "CPU Error Output Mode Setting" is set to "Clear" � I/O data exchanges with DP-Slaves are interrupted. � Output data in the buffer memory of the DP-Master are cleared and not sent. � Input data which have been received from DP-Slaves when a stop error occurs in the CPU module are held in the buffer memory of the DP-Master. (2) When "CPU Error Output Mode Setting" is set to "Hold" � I/O data exchanges with DP-Slaves are continued. � Output data which have been stored in the buffer memory of the DP-Master when a stop error occurs in the CPU module are held and sent to DP-Slaves. � Data in the buffer memory of the DP-Master are updated with input data received from DPSlaves.
10

[Design Precautions] WARNING
If a stop error occurs in the CPU module, the operating status of DP-Slaves is as follows: (1) When "CPU Error Output Mode Setting" is set to "Clear" � Input data to be sent from DP-Slaves to the DP-Master are cleared. � Output data which have been received from the DP-Master when a stop error occurs in the CPU module are held in the buffer memory of DP-Slaves. (2) When "CPU Error Output Mode Setting" is set to "Hold" � Input data to be sent from DP-Slaves to the DP-Master when a stop error occurs in the CPU module are held. � Output data which have been received from the DP-Master when a stop error occurs in the CPU module are held in the buffer memory of DP-Slaves.
[Precautions for using laser displacement sensor control modules]
Provide safety measures such as a dual safety mechanism when the module is used for applications that have the possibility of causing physical injury or serious damage.
[Precautions for using EtherNet/IP network interface modules]
For the operating status of each EtherNet/IP device after a communication failure, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R EtherNet/IP Network Interface Module User's Manual (Application). Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.
Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail in multiple EtherNet/IP devices. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
11

[Design Precautions]
CAUTION
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables. Doing so may result in malfunction due to electromagnetic interference. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between those cables.
During control of an inductive load such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve, a large current (approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on. Therefore, use a module that has a sufficient current rating.
After the CPU module is powered on or is reset, the time taken to enter the RUN status varies depending on the system configuration, parameter settings, and/or program size. Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely, regardless of the time.
Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the settings are being written. Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM and SD memory card undefined. The values need to be set in the buffer memory and written to the flash ROM and SD memory card again. Doing so also may cause malfunction or failure of the module.
When changing the operating status of the CPU module from external devices (such as the remote RUN/STOP functions), select "Do Not Open by Program" for "Opening Method" of "Module Parameter". If "Open by Program" is selected, an execution of the remote STOP function causes the communication line to close. Consequently, the CPU module cannot reopen the line, and external devices cannot execute the remote RUN function.
[Precautions for using digital-analog converter modules and high speed digital-analog converter modules]
Power on or off the external power supply while the programmable controller is on. Failure to do so may result in incorrect output or malfunction.
At on/off of the power or external power supply, or at the output range switching, a voltage may occur or a current may flow between output terminals for a moment. In this case, start the control after analog outputs become stable.
[Precautions for using high-speed counter modules and flexible high-speed I/O control modules]
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables. Doing so may result in malfunction due to noise. Keep a distance of 150mm or more between those cables.
[Precautions for using SIL2 Process CPUs]
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables. Doing so may result in malfunction due to noise. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between those cables.
When selecting external devices to be connected to modules that operate in SIL2 mode, consider the maximum inrush current described in the user's manual for each module. Exceeding the maximum inrush current may cause malfunction or failure of the module.
[Precautions for using Safety CPUs]
When selecting external devices to be connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network remote I/O module (with safety functions), consider the maximum inrush current described in the CC-Link IE Field Network Remote I/O Module (With Safety Functions) User's Manual. Exceeding the maximum inrush current may cause malfunction or failure of the module.
12

[Design Precautions] CAUTION
[Precautions for using remote head modules]
After the remote head module is powered on or is reset, the time taken to enter the RUN status varies depending on the system configuration and/or parameter settings. Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely, regardless of the time.
Do not power off or reset the remote head module while the parameters are being written. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module.
[Precautions for using laser displacement sensor control modules]
Do not use the laser displacement sensor outside of its specifications (such as ratings or environments). Doing so may result in overheating or smoke.
Do not disassemble or modify the modules. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire. Do not touch any terminal while power is on. Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction.
[Security Precautions] WARNING
To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the programmable controller and the system against unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via the network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.
[Installation Precautions] WARNING
Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the module. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.
[Precautions for using C Controller modules]
When mounting a C Controller module, make sure to attach the connector cover included in a base unit to the module connector of the second slot to prevent entrance of foreign material such as dust.
13

[Installation Precautions] CAUTION
Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets Page 119 General Specifications in this manual. Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.
To mount a module, place the concave part(s) located at the bottom onto the guide(s) of the base unit, and push in the module until the hook(s) located at the top snaps into place. Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction, failure, or drop of the module.
To mount a module with no module fixing hook, place the concave part(s) located at the bottom onto the guide(s) of the base unit, push in the module, and fix it with screw(s). Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction, failure, or drop of the module.
When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module with a screw.
Tighten the screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction. For the specified torque range, refer to Page 166 Precautions and Page 178 Handling precautions in this manual.
When using an extension cable, connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely. Check the connection for looseness. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
When using an SD memory card, fully insert it into the SD memory card slot. Check that it is inserted completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
Securely insert an extended SRAM cassette or a battery-less option cassette into the cassette connector of the CPU module. After insertion, close the cassette cover and check that the cassette is inserted completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.
Beware that the module could be very hot while power is on and immediately after power-off. Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module, SD memory
card, extended SRAM cassette, battery-less option cassette, or connector. Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.
[Precautions for using Safety CPUs]
Use the CC-Link IE Field Network remote I/O module (with safety functions) and CC-Link IE Field Network remote I/O module in an environment that meets the general specifications in the corresponding manuals (CC-Link IE Field Network Remote I/O Module (With Safety Functions) User's Manual and CC-Link IE Field Network Remote I/O Module User's Manual). Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.
Securely fix the CC-Link IE Field Network remote I/O module (with safety functions) and CC-Link IE Field Network remote I/O module with a DIN rail or module fixing screws. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
14

[Wiring Precautions] WARNING
Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before installation and wiring. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.
After installation and wiring, attach a blank cover module (RG60) to each empty slot and an included extension connector protective cover to the unused extension cable connector before powering on the system for operation. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
[Precautions for using flexible high-speed I/O control modules]
When connecting a differential output terminal to a differential receiver of a drive unit, connect the high-speed output common terminal to the differential receiver common terminal of the drive unit. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction because of the potential difference that occurs between the high-speed output common terminal and the differential receiver common terminal.
15

[Wiring Precautions] CAUTION
Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any spade solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting in failure.
Check the rated voltage and signal layout before wiring to the module, and connect the cables correctly. Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause fire or failure.
Connectors for external devices must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer, or must be correctly soldered. Incomplete connections may cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
Securely connect the connector to the module. Poor contact may cause malfunction. Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables. Doing so may result in malfunction due to noise. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between those cables. Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cables may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in malfunction or damage to modules or cables. In addition, the weight of the cables may put stress on modules in an environment of strong vibrations and shocks. Do not clamp the extension cables with the jacket stripped. Doing so may change the characteristics of the cables, resulting in malfunction. Check the interface type and correctly connect the cable. Incorrect wiring (connecting the cable to an incorrect interface) may cause failure of the module and external device. Tighten the terminal screws or connector screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit, fire, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, fire, or malfunction. When disconnecting the cable from the module, do not pull the cable by the cable part. For the cable with connector, hold the connector part of the cable. For the cable connected to the terminal block, loosen the terminal screw. Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable. Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module. Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction. A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips, from entering the module during wiring. Do not remove the film during wiring. Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation.
16

[Wiring Precautions]
CAUTION
Programmable controllers must be installed in control panels. Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block. Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock. For wiring, refer to Page 157 Wiring in this manual.
For Ethernet cables to be used in the system, select the ones that meet the specifications in the user's manual for the module used. If not, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.
[Precautions for using channel isolated analog-digital converter modules, channel isolated digital-analog converter modules, channel isolated RTD input modules, temperature control modules, and channel isolated analog-digital converter modules (with signal conditioning function)]
Individually ground the shielded cables of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
[Precautions for using channel isolated thermocouple input modules]
Individually ground the shielded cables of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
Do not place the module near a device that generates magnetic noise.
[Precautions for using high-speed counter modules and flexible high-speed I/O control modules]
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables. Doing so may result in malfunction due to noise. Keep a distance of 150mm or more between those cables.
Ground the shielded cables on the encoder side (relay box) with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less. Failure to do so may cause malfunction.
[Precautions for using channel isolated pulse input modules]
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables. Doing so may result in malfunction due to noise. Keep a distance of 150mm or more between those cables.
Ground the shielded cables with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less. Failure to do so may cause malfunction.
[Precautions for using CC-Link IE Controller Network (when optical fiber cables are used)]
For optical fiber cables to be used in the system, select the ones that meet the specifications in the MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup). If not, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.
[Precautions for using CC-Link system master/local modules]
Use Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables in a CC-Link system. If not, the performance of the CC-Link system is not guaranteed. For the station-to-station cable length and the maximum overall cable length, follow the specifications in the MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Startup). If not, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.
[Precautions for using redundant function modules]
For tracking cables to be used in the system, select the ones that meet the specifications in the MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Startup). If not, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.
17

[Wiring Precautions] CAUTION
[Precautions for using AnyWireASLINK master modules]
Do not apply the 24VDC power before wiring the entire AnyWireASLINK system. If the power is applied before wiring, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.
Connect a 24VDC external power supply to the device(s) in an AnyWireASLINK system.
[Precautions for using laser displacement sensor control modules]
Do not apply the 24VDC power before connecting a sensor head. If the power is applied before wiring, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.
[Precautions for using MELSECNET/H network modules]
For optical fiber cables to be used in the system, select the ones that meet the specifications in the MELSEC iQ-R MELSECNET/H Network Module User's Manual (Startup). If not, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions] WARNING
Do not touch any terminal while power is on. Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction. Correctly connect the battery connector. Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or
throw the battery into the fire. Also, do not expose it to liquid or strong shock. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, ignite, or leak, resulting in injury and fire. Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws, connector screws, or module fixing screws. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
18

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
CAUTION
When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as program modification, parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running programmable controller, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.
Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device, immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.
Do not disassemble or modify the modules. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire. Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handy-phone
System) more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller. Failure to do so may cause malfunction. Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the module. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction. After the first use of the product, do not perform each of the following operations more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2/JIS B 3502 compliant). Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction.
� Mounting/removing the module to/from the base unit � Inserting/removing the extended SRAM cassette or battery-less option cassette to/from the
CPU module � Mounting/removing the terminal block to/from the module � Connecting/disconnecting the extension cable to/from the base unit After the first use of the product, do not insert/remove the SD memory card to/from the CPU module more than 500 times. Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction. Do not touch the metal terminals on the back side of the SD memory card. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module. Do not touch the integrated circuits on the circuit board of an extended SRAM cassette or a batteryless option cassette. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module. Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module. Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it, dispose of it without using. Startup and maintenance of a control panel must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock. Lock the control panel so that only qualified maintenance personnel can operate it. Before handling the module, touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body. Wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap is recommended. Failure to discharge the static electricity may cause the module to fail or malfunction. Use a clean and dry cloth to wipe off dirt on the module.
19

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
CAUTION
[Precautions for using SIL2 Process CPUs]
When performing online operations to the running SIL2 Process CPU such as program modification, device test, and operating status change (for example, from RUN to STOP) of the running programmable controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected, read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation. The operations must be performed by qualified operators following the operating procedure that is predetermined at the design stage. Modifying a program while the SIL2 Process CPU is running (the online change) may cause corruption of the program depending on operating conditions. Fully understand the precautions described in the GX Works3 Operating Manual before operation.
[Precautions for using flexible high-speed I/O control modules]
When performing online operations of the running module from an external device such as a personal computer connected, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding.
Before changing any setting of the module, read the relevant manuals carefully, ensure the safety, and change the operating status of the CPU module to STOP. Especially when operating the module in the network system, ensure the safety thoroughly because controlled machines are likely to be moved inadvertently. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.
[Precautions for using positioning modules, Motion CPUs, Simple Motion modules, and Motion modules]
Before testing the operation, set a low speed value for the speed limit parameter so that the operation can be stopped immediately upon occurrence of a hazardous condition.
Confirm and adjust the program and each parameter before operation. Unpredictable movements may occur depending on the machine.
[Precautions for using Motion CPUs, Simple Motion modules, and Motion modules]
When using the absolute position system function, on starting up, and when the module or absolute position motor has been replaced, always perform a home position return.
Before starting the operation, confirm the brake function. Do not perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) during inspection. After maintenance and inspections are completed, confirm that the position detection of the absolute
position detection function is correct. Lock the control panel and prevent access to those who are not certified to handle or install electric
equipment.
[Precautions for using remote head modules]
When connecting an external device with a remote head module to modify data of a running programmable controller, configure an interlock circuit in the program of the master station to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running remote head module, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.
20

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions] CAUTION
Especially, when a remote head module is remotely controlled by an external device, immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the remote head module due to a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program of the master station, and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and remote head module in case of a communication failure.
[Operating Precautions] CAUTION
When changing data and operating status, and modifying program of the running programmable controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module, read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation. Incorrect change or modification may cause system malfunction, damage to the machines, or accidents.
Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the setting values in the buffer memory are being written to the flash ROM in the module. Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM and SD memory card undefined. The values need to be set in the buffer memory and written to the flash ROM and SD memory card again. Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.
[Precautions for using positioning modules, Motion CPUs, Simple Motion modules, and Motion modules]
Note that when the reference axis speed is specified for interpolation operation, the speed of the partner axis (2nd, 3rd, or 4th axis) may exceed the speed limit value.
Do not go near the machine during test operations or during operations such as teaching. Doing so may lead to injuries.
21

[Computer Connection Precautions]
CAUTION
When connecting a personal computer to a module having a USB interface, observe the following precautions as well as the instructions described in the manual for the personal computer used. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail. (1) When the personal computer is AC-powered When the personal computer has a 3-pin AC plug or an AC plug with a grounding wire, connect the plug to a grounding receptacle or ground the grounding wire. Ground the personal computer and the module with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less. When the personal computer has a 2-pin AC plug without a grounding wire, connect the computer to the module by following the procedure below. For power supplied to the personal computer and the module, using the same power source is recommended. 1. Unplug the personal computer from the AC receptacle. 2. Check that the personal computer is unplugged. Then, connect the personal computer to the module with a USB cable. 3. Plug the personal computer into the AC receptacle. (2) When the personal computer is battery-powered The personal computer can be connected to the module without taking specific measures. For details, refer to the following. Cautions When Using Mitsubishi Programmable Controllers or GOTs Connected to a Personal Computer With the RS-232/USB Interface (FA-A-0298) When the USB cable used is the GT09-C30USB-5P manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric, specific measures are not required to connect the AC-powered personal computer to the module. However, note that the signal ground (SG) is common for the module and its USB interface. Therefore, if an SG potential difference occurs between the module and the connected devices, it causes failures of the module and the connected devices.
[Disposal Precautions]
CAUTION
When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. For
details on battery regulations in EU member states, refer to Page 262 Disposal precautions in this manual.
[Transportation Precautions]
CAUTION
When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations. For details on the regulated models, refer to Page 261 Transport guidelines in this manual.
The halogens (such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine), which are contained in a fumigant used for disinfection and pest control of wood packaging materials, may cause failure of the product. Prevent the entry of fumigant residues into the product or consider other methods (such as heat treatment) instead of fumigation. The disinfection and pest control measures must be applied to unprocessed raw wood.
22

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) MELSEC programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions; i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident; and ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.
(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USER'S, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT. ("Prohibited Application") Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in; � Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT. � Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User. � Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, Mitsubishi Electric may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi Electric and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi Electric representative in your region.
(3) Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving programmable controller trouble and system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
23

� For SIL2 Process CPUs (1) Although Mitsubishi Electric has obtained the certification for Product's compliance to the international safety standards
IEC61508, IEC61511 from TUV Rheinland, this fact does not guarantee that Product will be free from any malfunction or failure. The user of this Product shall comply with any and all applicable safety standard, regulation or law and take appropriate safety measures for the system in which the Product is installed or used and shall take the second or third safety measures other than the Product. Mitsubishi Electric is not liable for damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard, regulation or law. (2) Mitsubishi Electric prohibits the use of Products with or in any application involving, and Mitsubishi Electric shall not be liable for a default, a liability for defect warranty, a quality assurance, negligence or other tort and a product liability in these applications. (a) power plants, (b) trains, railway systems, airplanes, airline operations, other transportation systems, (c) hospitals, medical care, dialysis and life support facilities or equipment, (d) amusement equipments, (e) incineration and fuel devices, (f) handling of nuclear or hazardous materials or chemicals, (g) mining and drilling, (h) and other applications where the level of risk to human life, health or property are elevated. (3) Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving programmable controller trouble and system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. � For Safety CPUs (1) Although Mitsubishi Electric has obtained the certification for Product's compliance to the international safety standards IEC61508, ISO13849-1 from TUV Rheinland, this fact does not guarantee that Product will be free from any malfunction or failure. The user of this Product shall comply with any and all applicable safety standard, regulation or law and take appropriate safety measures for the system in which the Product is installed or used and shall take the second or third safety measures other than the Product. Mitsubishi Electric is not liable for damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard, regulation or law. (2) Mitsubishi Electric prohibits the use of Products with or in any application involving, and Mitsubishi Electric shall not be liable for a default, a liability for defect warranty, a quality assurance, negligence or other tort and a product liability in these applications. (a) power plants, (b) trains, railway systems, airplanes, airline operations, other transportation systems, (c) hospitals, medical care, dialysis and life support facilities or equipment, (d) amusement equipments, (e) incineration and fuel devices, (f) handling of nuclear or hazardous materials or chemicals, (g) mining and drilling, (h) and other applications where the level of risk to human life, health or property are elevated. (3) Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving programmable controller trouble and system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
24

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controllers. This manual describes the system configuration, specifications, installation, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controllers. Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controller to handle the product correctly. When applying the program and circuit examples provided in this manual to an actual system, ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems. Please make sure that the end users read this manual.
C Controller module
When using the C Controller module and reading this manual and relevant manuals, read "programmable controller CPU" as "C Controller module". Refer to the following instead of the GX Works3 Operating Manual, MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Startup), and MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application). CW Configurator Operating Manual MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Startup) MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Application)
Motion CPU
When using the Motion CPU and reading this manual and relevant manuals, read "programmable controller CPU" as "Motion CPU". Refer to the following instead of the MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Startup) and MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application). MELSEC iQ-R Motion Controller User's Manual MELSEC iQ-R Motion Controller Programming Manual (Common)
NCCPU
When using the NCCPU and reading this manual and relevant manuals, read "programmable controller CPU" as "NCCPU". Refer to the following instead of the MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Startup) and MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application). C80 Series Connection and Setup Manual C80 Series Instruction Manual C80 Series Maintenance Manual
25

Robot CPU
When using the robot CPU and reading this manual and relevant manuals, read "programmable controller CPU" as "robot CPU". Refer to the following instead of the MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Startup) and MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application). SAFETY MANUAL Standard Specifications Manual for the controller used CR800 Series Controller INSTRUCTION MANUAL Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance CR800 Series Controller INSTRUCTION MANUAL Detailed explanations of functions and operations CR800 Series Controller INSTRUCTION MANUAL Troubleshooting CR800 series controller ADDITIONAL AXIS FUNCTION INSTRUCTION MANUAL CR800 series controller Tracking Function Instruction Manual CR800-D series controller GOT Direct Connection Extended Function Instruction Manual CR800-R series controller iQ Platform Supporting Extended Function Instruction Manual CR750/CR751 series controller, CR800 series controller Ethernet Function Instruction Manual
26

MELSEC iQ-R series manuals
The manuals are categorized into the following. Read the Module Configuration Manual before configuring the system because the common information on all modules are included.

Common information (Read this manual before configuring the system.)

MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual (SH-081262ENG)

Information on each module

MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Startup) (SH-081263ENG)

MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) (SH-081264ENG)

MELSEC iQ-R Series User's Manual

Information on the software

Operating Manual

Information on programming

MELSEC iQ-R Series Programming Manual

Function Block Reference

Information on the functions

Reference Manual

No. Manual

Description

(1)

Module Configuration Manual Module Configuration Manual describes common information on the hardware configuration of all modules, overview

of each system configuration, and specifications of the power supply module, base unit, SD memory card, and

battery.

(2)

User's Manual

User's Manual for modules such as the CPU modules and intelligent function modules consists of Startup and Application. Startup describes specifications, function lists, procedures before operation, and operation examples of each module. Application describes details on I/O signals/buffer memory addresses/functions, parameter settings, error codes, special relay areas, and special register areas of each module. For some other modules, their User's Manuals consist of a single volume instead of Startup and Application.

(3)

Operating Manual

Operating Manual describes operation methods of the tool.

(4)

Programming Manual

The Programming Manual consists of manuals such as Program Design which describes the program languages, CPU Module Instructions, Standard Functions/Function Blocks and Module Dedicated Instructions which describe the instructions and functions, and Process Control Function Blocks/Instructions which describes the function blocks for process control.

(5)

Function Block Reference

Function Block Reference describes module FBs of each model.

(6)

Reference Manual

Reference Manual describes common functions of modules (such as the online module change and the inter-module synchronization function) or specifications of communication protocols, and how to use them.

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1.1 Overall Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Single CPU system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Multiple CPU system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Redundant system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 System using the Safety CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 System using the SIL2 Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 MELSEC iQ-R series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 MELSEC-Q series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1.3 System Configuration Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Modules having restrictions on the number of mountable modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Base unit combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Combinations of a base unit and a power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Combinations of CPU modules in a multiple CPU system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.4 Applicable Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Precautions when using the extended temperature range base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Consideration for internal current consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Precautions for multiple CPU system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Precautions for redundant system with redundant extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Precautions for C Controller system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Precautions when using the recorder module, camera recorder module, MES interface module (RD81MES96N), or C intelligent function module (RD55UP12-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

CHAPTER 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES

2.1 Slot Numbers on a Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 2.3 CPU Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 2.4 Control CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

CHAPTER 3 PART NAMES

113

3.1 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 3.2 Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Redundant extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 RQ extension base unit (for MELSEC-Q series modules). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 3.3 SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 4 SPECIFICATIONS

119

4.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 4.2 Performance Specifications of Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 4.3 Performance Specifications of Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 RQ extension base unit (for MELSEC-Q series modules). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 4.4 Performance Specifications of SD Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 4.5 Performance Specifications of Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

135

5.1 Installation Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 5.2 Installation Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 5.3 Installing Base Unit to Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Installation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Mounting the base unit on the DIN rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 5.5 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

When a redundant system with redundant extension base unit is configured. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 When MELSEC-Q series modules are used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 5.6 Connection/Disconnection of Extension Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 MELSEC-Q series extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Handling precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 5.7 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Wiring to the power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Wiring to a screw terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Wiring to a spring clamp terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Wiring to a spring clamp terminal block (lever type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Wiring a connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Mounting/removing a module on/from a main base unit or extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Mounting/removing a module on/from a RQ extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Installing/removing a terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Handling precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

179

6.1 Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 6.2 Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Battery replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Replacement procedure of redundant power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

APPENDICES

184

Appendix 1 Checking Production Information and Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Checking methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Update using an engineering tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Update using an SD memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Appendix 3 Pair Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Checking methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Appendix 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 When the POWER LED of the power supply module turns off, or the ERR contact turns off (opens) . . . . . . . 218 When the specific extension base unit cannot be recognized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 When the specific Q series extension base unit cannot be recognized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 When an error occurs in a redundant extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Appendix 5 Differences Between MELSEC iQ-R Series and MELSEC-Q Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Window change between GX Works2 and GX Works3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Setting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Refresh processing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Measures to comply with the Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Appendix 8 Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Measures to comply with the Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 System design circuit examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Fail-safe measures for programmable controller failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Appendix 10Calculating Heating Value of Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Calculation formula for the average power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Calculation examples for the average power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Appendix 11 Precautions for Battery Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Regulated models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Transport guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Appendix 12Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-In Batteries in EU Member States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Disposal precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Exportation precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Appendix 13Type Approval Certificates for Ship Classifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Appendix 14External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

INDEX

273

REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

TERMS

Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.

TERMS

Description

Control CPU

A CPU module that controls connected I/O modules and intelligent function modules. In a multiple CPU system, a control CPU is set to each connected module.

Control system

A system that controls a redundant system and performs network communications in a redundant system

Dedicated instruction

An instruction that simplifies programming for using functions of intelligent function modules

Engineering tool

A tool used for setting up programmable controllers, programming, debugging, and maintenance

Intelligent function module

A module that has functions other than input and output, such as an A/D converter module and D/A converter module

Multiple CPU system

A system where 2 to 4 CPU modules control I/O modules or intelligent function modules assigned to

New control system

A system that has switched to control system from standby system after system switching

Process CPU (process mode)

A Process CPU operating in process mode. Process control function blocks and the online module change function can be used.

Process CPU (redundant mode)

A Process CPU operating in redundant mode. A redundant system is configured with this CPU module. Process control function blocks and the online module change function can be used even in this mode.

Redundant function module

A module that configures a redundant system and is used with a Process CPU (redundant mode) or a SIL2 Process CPU. The redundant function module model name is R6RFM.

Redundant power supply system

A system that has two power supply modules on a base unit. Even if one power supply module has failed, operation can be continued with the other power supply module.

Redundant system

A system consisting of two systems that have the same configuration (CPU module, power supply
module, network module, and other modules). Even after an error occurs in one of the two system, the other system takes over the control of the entire system. ( Page 40 Redundant system)

Redundant system with redundant extension base unit A redundant system that is configured using extension base unit(s)

Relay station

A station that includes two or more network modules. Data are passed through this station to stations on other networks.

Safety CPU

A module that performs both standard control and safety control and is used with a safety function module. The Safety CPU models include the R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, and R120SFCPU.

Safety function module

A module that performs safety control and must be used with a Safety CPU. This module can only be used with the Safety CPU. The safety function module model name is R6SFM.

SIL2 function module

A module that performs safety control and must be used with a SIL2 Process CPU. This module can only be used with the SIL2 Process CPU. The SIL2 function module model name is R6PSFM.

SIL2 mode

An operation mode of the I/O module and the intelligent function module to perform safety input and
output at the SIL2 level. For details on the SIL2 mode, refer to the following. Manuals for the I/O module or the intelligent function module used

SIL2 Process CPU

A module that performs both standard control and safety control and is used with a SIL2 function module. This module is also used with a redundant function module and configures a redundant system. The SIL2 Process CPU models include the R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, and R120PSFCPU.

Single CPU system

A system where a single CPU module controls I/O modules and intelligent function modules

Standby system

A backup system in a redundant system

System A

A system specified as a system A to distinguish between two systems connected with a tracking cable. When the two systems are simultaneously started up, the system A operates as a control system. The system A is not changed to the system B even after system switching.

System B

A system specified as a system B to distinguish between two systems connected with a tracking cable. When the two systems are simultaneously started up, the system B operates as a standby system. The system B is not changed to the system A even after system switching.

System switching

A function which switches the systems between the control system and the standby system to continue operation of the redundant system when a failure or an error occurs in the control system

Tracking cable

An optical fiber cable used to connect two redundant function modules in a redundant system

The following terms are used to explain systems using the SIL2 Process CPU and the Safety CPU.

Term

Description

Pair version

Version information to determine the pairs of the SIL2 Process CPU and SIL2 function module and the pairs of the Safety CPU and Safety function module

Safety communications

Communication service that performs send/receive processing in the safety layer of the safety communication protocol

Safety control

Machine control by safety programs and safety data communications. When an error occurs, the machine in operation is securely stopped.

Safety device

A device that can be used in safety programs

Safety program

A program that performs safety control

Standard communications

Communications other than safety communications, such as cyclic transmission and transient transmission of CC-Link IE Field Network

Standard control

Machine control by standard programs and standard data communications. Programmable controllers other than the safety programmable controller perform only standard control. (This term is used to distinguish from safety control.)

Standard device

A device (X, Y, M, D, or others) in a CPU module. (Safety devices are excluded.) This device can be used only in standard programs. (This term is used to distinguish from a safety device.)

Standard program

A program that performs sequence control (Safety programs are excluded.) (This term is used to distinguish from a safety program.)

GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.

Generic term and abbreviation

Description

Base unit

A main base unit, an extension base unit, an RQ extension base unit

C Controller module

A MELSEC iQ-R series C Controller module

CC-Link IE

Includes the following: � CC-Link IE TSN ( MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application)) � CC-Link IE Controller Network ( MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Controller Network User's
Manual (Application)) � CC-Link IE Field Network ( MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual
(Application))

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

An RJ71GP21-SX CC-Link IE Controller Network module, an RJ71GP21S-SX CC-Link IE Controller Network module, and the following modules when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used: � RJ71EN71 � RnENCPU

CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local module

An RJ71GF11-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module and the following modules when the CC-Link IE Field Network function is used: � RJ71EN71 � RnENCPU

CC-Link IE TSN master/local module

RJ71GN11-T2

Control module

A MELSEC iQ-R laser displacement sensor control module

Ethernet interface module with built-in CC-Link IE Extended temperature range base unit

RJ71EN71 A base unit that is compatible with an operating ambient temperature of 0 to 60

Extension base unit

A MELSEC iQ-R series extension base unit

Extension cable

A MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable

I/O module

An input module, an output module, an I/O combined module, and an interrupt module

Main base unit

A MELSEC iQ-R series main base unit

Motion CPU

A MELSEC iQ-R series Motion controller

Motion module

RD78G4, RD78G8, RD78G16, RD78G32, RD78G64, RD78GHV, RD78GHW

NCCPU

R16NCCPU

Network module

Includes the following: � Ethernet interface module � CC-Link IE TSN master/local module � CC-Link IE Controller Network module � CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module � MELSECNET/H network module � MELSECNET/10 network module � RnENCPU (network part)

Power supply module

A MELSEC iQ-R series power supply module

Process CPU

R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU

Programmable controller CPU
Q5B Q6B

R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R04ENCPU, R08CPU, R08ENCPU, R16CPU, R16ENCPU, R32CPU, R32ENCPU, R120CPU, R120ENCPU A MELSEC-Q series extension base unit (type requiring no power supply module) A MELSEC-Q series extension base unit (type requiring a power supply module)

Redundant extension base unit

An extension base unit which is essential for configuring a redundant system with redundant extension base unit

Redundant power supply base unit

A base unit used for a redundant configuration of power supplies. This unit is used together with redundant power supply modules, to build a redundant power supply system.

Redundant power supply module

A power supply module used for a redundant configuration of power supplies. This module is used together with a redundant power supply base unit, to build a redundant power supply system.

Remote head module

An RJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module

RnCPU

R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU

RnENCPU RnENCPU (CPU part)

R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU A module on the left-hand side of the RnENCPU ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Generic term and abbreviation RnENCPU (network part)

Description A module on the right-hand side of the RnENCPU ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Robot CPU

R16RTCPU

RQ extension base unit

A MELSEC iQ-R series RQ extension base unit

Slave station

A station other than a master station: a local station, a remote I/O station, a remote device station, and an intelligent device station

The following generic terms and abbreviations are used to explain systems using the SIL2 Process CPU and the Safety CPU.

Generic term and abbreviation

Description

Safety programmable controller

A MELSEC iQ-R series module that performs safety control: a Safety CPU, a safety function module, a CC-Link IE Field Network remote I/O module (with safety functions)

Standard CPU

A MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module that performs standard control (This term is used to distinguish such CPU modules from the CPU modules that perform safety control.)

Standard programmable controller

A MELSEC iQ-R series module that performs standard control (This term is used to distinguish such programmable controllers from the safety programmable controllers.)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1
This chapter describes the MELSEC iQ-R series system configuration.
1.1 Overall Configuration
The MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controller system is configured by mounting modules on a base unit. A power supply module is mounted on the power supply slot located on the left end of a main base unit, and a CPU module is mounted on the CPU slot located on the right side of the power supply slot. Modules other than the power supply module are mounted on the slots located on the right side of the CPU slot.
(1) Main base unit (2) Extension cable (3) Extension base unit (1)
(2)
(3)
(3) Maximum of seven extension base units
(3)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

MELSEC-Q series modules and base units can be used by connecting the RQ extension base unit in the MELSEC iQ-R series system. ( Page 148 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit) MELSEC-Q series power supply modules, I/O modules, and intelligent function modules can be mounted on the RQ extension base unit. ( Page 117 RQ extension base unit (for MELSEC-Q series modules))
Using the RQ extension base unit enables the use of the existing MELSEC-Q series system as shown below.

MELSEC-Q series system

MELSEC-Q series main base unit

OUT
5V SG POWER FG

CPU

I/O0

I/O1

I/O2

I/O3

I/O4

MELSEC iQ-R series system MELSEC iQ-R series main base unit

MELSEC-Q series extension base unit

RQ extension base unit

MELSEC-Q series extension base unit

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Connecting systems over various networks such as Ethernet and CC-Link IE enables seamless data communications across various levels, from the production control of all automation down to a device such as a sensor.
1
Ethernet

CC-Link IE TSN

TSN HUB

CC-Link IE Controller Network

CC-Link IE Field Network

SSCNET�(/H)

CC-Link
� Without being aware of layers and boundaries of the networks, access to the production control system, programmable controllers, and other devices is possible in a seamless and identical manner. Device monitoring and data collection are easy to perform from anywhere.
� CC-Link IE is the network with a large capacity and a high speed of 1 Gbps. The 1 Gbps broad bandwidth which is divided into two parts, one for control communications and the other for information communications, ensures the time reliability of control communications and achieves a real-time data collection, which is not allowed via TCP/IP.
� CC-Link is a globally standardized open field network. Flexible support for a multi-vendor environment allows a rich variety of more than 1000 partner products to be connected to the MELSEC iQ-R series.
� SSCNET/(H) is a synchronous motion network that supports optical network and offers high speed and high reliability.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Ex. Other series network can be connected by setting relay stations with multiple modules of difference network.
Ethernet
CC-Link IE Controller Network
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network
CC-Link
For the network modules that can be used in the MELSEC iQ-R series system, refer to the following. Page 67 Lists of Configuration Devices

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Single CPU system

This system controls I/O modules and intelligent function modules with a single CPU module mounted on a main base unit.

CPU module

Multiple CPU system
This system requires multiple CPU modules, and each CPU module controls I/O modules and intelligent function modules. ( Page 112 Control CPU) Configure a multiple CPU system in the following cases: � To execute the high-accuracy motion control by using a Motion CPU in a system � To execute the high-accuracy NC control by using the NCCPU in a system � To execute the high-accuracy machining and assembly by using the robot CPU in a system � To shorten the scan time of the entire system by distributing the control of I/O modules and intelligent function modules with
multiple CPU modules The CPU module can only be mounted on the main base unit, and the maximum number of mountable CPU modules is four. ( Page 86 Combinations of CPU modules in a multiple CPU system, Page 110 CPU Numbers) For details on the multiple CPU system function, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
CPU module
123411234

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant system
This system consists of two systems and each of them has a CPU module, a power supply module, and a network module or other modules. Even if an error occurs in one system, the other system continues control. I/O modules and intelligent function modules used in a redundant system are mounted to the intelligent device station (remote head module) on CC-Link IE Field Network or an extension base unit in a redundant system with redundant extension base unit. A redundant configuration of power supply modules is available with redundant power supply base units and redundant power supply modules. (Redundant power supply system)
Ethernet

The redundant system is categorized into the following types. Page 41 Redundant configuration of basic systems Page 44 Redundant configuration of power supply modules Page 45 Redundant system for Ethernet Page 45 Redundant system for CC-Link IE Controller Network Page 46 Redundant system for CC-Link IE Field Network Page 48 When CC-Link is used in a redundant system Page 49 Redundant system for MELSECNET/H network module Page 49 Redundant system for PROFIBUS-DP network Page 50 Redundant system for serial communication

Redundant system with redundant extension base unit

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant configuration of basic systems

A redundant configuration of basic systems that have CPU modules, power supply modules, and network modules on main

base units is available when redundant function modules are used and Process CPUs are operated in the redundant mode.

To build a redundant system, build the same system with modules on two main base units, and connect the redundant

function modules of each system by using tracking cables. Connect the redundant function modules with two tracking cables

to configure a redundant system of tracking cables.

Use modules of the same model, and mount them on the same slots on each main base unit. The redundant function module

can be mounted on any slot of the main base unit. (It does not need to be mounted on the right side of the CPU module.)

In the redundant system, the CPU module in one of two systems performs programs and controls. The other system is in the

standby state and does not perform control. The system that performs control is called a control system and the other system

in the standby state is called a standby station.

Data link is performed between redundant function modules connected with tracking cables. If an error occurs in the control

system, the system is switched to the standby system and the standby system continues the operation.

(1) (2)

(1) Process CPU (redundant mode) (2) Redundant function module

(3) Tracking cable

(3)
(3)
For details, refer to "WHEN USING THE PROCESS CPU (REDUNDANT MODE)" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant system with redundant extension base unit

A redundant system to which extension base units are connected (redundant system with redundant extension base unit) is

available.

To configure a redundant system with redundant extension base unit, connect a redundant extension base unit to the extension level 1. ( Page 94 Precautions for redundant system with redundant extension base unit)

Comparing with the redundant configuration that uses the CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module, the CPU module

can communicates data with input and output modules faster with this configuration.

(1) (2)

(1) Process CPU (redundant mode) (2) Redundant function module (3) Tracking cable (4) Extension cable (5) Redundant extension base unit (6) Extension base unit

(3)

(4)

(3)

(5)

(4) (6)

The redundant system with redundant extension base unit can be configured in combination with the redundant system configuration that uses the CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module. ( Page 40 Redundant system)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant configuration of extension cables

With the redundant configuration of extension cables, control of the redundant system can be maintained by switching the

systems even if an extension cable in data communications fails.

To achieve extension cable redundancy, use only the redundant extension base units in the extension level 2 and later levels.

(1) (2)

(1) Process CPU (redundant mode) (2) Redundant function module

(3) Tracking cable

(4) Extension cable

(5) Redundant extension base unit

(3)

(4)

(3)

(5)
(4) (4)
(5)

Extension cables are preferably redundant at all extension levels because If an error occurs in an extension cable not being redundant, a stop error occurs in the CPU module of both systems and the control of the entire system cannot be maintained.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant configuration of power supply modules

A redundant configuration of redundant power supply modules is available when two redundant power supply modules are

mounted on a redundant power supply base unit. (Redundant power supply system)

Even if one power supply module has failed or an error occurs with its power supply system, system operation can be

continued with the other power supply module.

The power supply system error can be cleared or the defective power supply module can be replaced during system operation. As preventive maintenance, a power supply module can be replaced during system operation. ( Page 183

Replacement procedure of redundant power supply modules)

(1)

(1) Redundant power supply module (2) Redundant power supply main base unit (3) Redundant power supply extension base unit

(2)

(1)

(3)

A redundant power supply system can be configured with CPU modules other than Process CPUs (redundant
mode). For the modules compatible with redundant power supply base units and redundant power supply modules, check "Lists of configuration devices". ( Page 67 Lists of Configuration Devices)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant system for Ethernet

By mounting an Ethernet interface module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system, the new

control system can continue communications if an error occurs in the control system.

(1) Ethernet interface module

(2) Process CPU (redundant mode)

(3) Redundant function module

(4) Tracking cable

(2) (3) (1)

(4)
(4)
With the redundant group setting, a redundant configuration of Ethernet networks is available. When the redundant configuration of Ethernet networks is made, communications in the control system can be continued without system switching if an error occurs in one network. The redundant group setting has the following two types of settings: redundant module group setting and port group setting. For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)

Redundant system for CC-Link IE Controller Network

By mounting a CC-Link IE Controller Network module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system, the

new control system can continue data link if an error occurs in the control system.

(1)

(1) CC-Link IE Controller Network module (2) Process CPU (redundant mode) (3) Redundant function module (4) Tracking cable

(2) (3)

(1)

(4)

For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Controller Network User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant system for CC-Link IE Field Network

With a redundant configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules or remote head modules, the new control

system can continue data link if an error occurs in the control system.

The following table lists the redundant system configurations for CC-Link IE Field Network.

System configuration

Overview

Redundant specified station
Redundant configuration of entire network

Redundant master station Redundant slave station
Redundant line

A redundant configuration of the master station is available. When the redundant master station is used as the own station, the station can be connected to the following. � Slave station � Redundant slave station
A redundant configuration of the slave station is available. When the redundant slave station is used as the own station, the station can be connected to the following. � Master station or redundant master station � Slave station � Redundant slave station
A redundant configuration of the entire network including the master station, slave station, and transmission path is available. The redundant line is configured in combination with the redundant master station and redundant slave station with the remote head module. When a communication error occurs in the master station or slave station, the control is continued by the system switching of the whole network instead of the faulty station. For the redundant line, the time required for system switching is shorter than the redundant master station or redundant slave station.

There are no restrictions on network topologies for redundant systems. However, the ring topology is recommended to configure a redundant system because the loopback function avoids system switching when a cable disconnection or a faulty station is generated in a system other than the redundant system.

Redundant master station

Mount a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system. If

an error occurs in the master station of the control system, the submaster station of the standby system performs control.

(1) (4)

(1) CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module

(1)

(2) Process CPU (redundant mode)

(3) Redundant function module

(4)

(4) Tracking cable

(5) Remote head module

(2) (3)

(5)
For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant slave station

For the redundant slave station, two types of redundant configurations, redundant local station and redundant remote head

module, are provided.

� Redundant local station

Mount a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system. If

an error occurs in the local station of the control system, the local station of the standby system performs control.
(1) CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (2) Process CPU (redundant mode) (3) Redundant function module (4) Tracking cable

(2) (3)

(4)

(1)

For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application) � Redundant configuration of remote head modules Mount a remote head module to the CPU slot and slot No.0 of the base unit. If an error occurs in the remote head module of the control system, the remote head module of the standby system performs control.
(1) Remote head module

(1)
For details, refer to "Redundant Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant line

A redundant configuration of network lines is available.

Mount a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system in

the master station where a redundant configuration has been configured. By mounting two remote head modules on the base

unit of a slave station, make a redundant configuration of the remote head modules. Connect the master station to the remote

head modules of the control system and do the same for the standby system. With a redundant configuration of network lines,

control is performed on a network of the standby system if an error occurs on the network of the control system.

(1) (4) (4)

(1)

(1) CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module

(2) Process CPU (redundant mode)

(3) Redundant function module

(4) Tracking cable

(5) Remote head module

(2) (3)

(5)
Only the remote head modules used in the redundant system can be used for the slave station. For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application)
When CC-Link is used in a redundant system
CC-Link system master/local modules can be used in a redundant system. With the standby master function, system switching due to a stop error of a CPU module can be supported. For details, refer to "How to Use Standby Master Function in Redundant System" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant system for MELSECNET/H network module

The MELSECNET/H network module supports the PLC to PLC network which is for data communications between the control

station and normal stations. In a redundant system, using a MELSECNET/H network module in both the control system and

the standby system can continue the data link in the new control system if an error occurs in the current control system.

(1)MELSECNET/H network module

(1)

(2)Process CPU (redundant mode)

(3)Redundant function module

(4)Tracking cable

(2) (3)

(1)

(4)

For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R MELSECNET/H Network Module User's Manual (Application)

Redundant system for PROFIBUS-DP network

With a redundant configuration of the RJ71PB91V, the new control system can continue data communications if an error occurs in the control system.

System switching due to an error in the master station of the control system

Mount the RJ71PB91V on each base unit of the control system and standby system.

If an error occurs in the master station of the control system, the master station of the standby system performs control.

(1)RJ71PB91V

(4)

(2)Process CPU (redundant mode)

(3)Redundant function module

(1)

(4)Tracking cable

(5)Terminating resistor

(6)Slave station

(2) (3)

(5)

(6)

(2) (3) (5)

For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R PROFIBUS-DP Module User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant system for serial communication

By mounting a serial communication module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system, the new

control system can continue communications if an error occurs in the control system.

The following table lists the communication protocols that can be used in a redundant system.

Communication

Communication protocol

MODBUS

� Master station (control system and standby system): Communication protocol � Slave station: MODBUS slave (RTU) or MODBUS slave (ASCII)

Communication protocols other than the predefined protocol and MODBUS slave (RTU/ASCII) cannot be used for

communication.

For details, refer to "Using MODBUS in a Redundant System" in the following: MELSEC iQ-R Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application) The following table lists the redundant system configurations for serial communication.

System configuration

Overview

Redundant specified station

Redundant master station (single line)

A redundant configuration of the master station is available.

Redundant master station (redundant line)

Redundant slave station (redundant line)

A redundant configuration of the slave station is available.

Redundant master station (single line)
Connect the master station of the control system and that of the standby system with a tracking cable.

If an error occurs in the master station of the control system, the master station of the standby system performs control and

continues communications with a slave station.

(1)

(2)

(1) Tracking cable (2) Serial communication module (3) Process CPU (redundant mode) (4) Redundant function module (5) Slave station

(3) (4) (5)

(3) (4)

Redundant master station (redundant line)

Connect the master station of the control system and that of the standby system with a tracking cable.

Slave stations must be set for each master station.

If an error occurs in the master station of the control system, the master station of the standby system performs control and

continues communications with slave stations.

(1)

(2)

(1) Tracking cable (2) Serial communication module (3) Process CPU (redundant mode) (4) Redundant function module (5) Slave station

(3) (4) (5)

(5)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant slave station (redundant line)

Connect the slave station of the control system and that of the standby system with a tracking cable.

A line with the master station is required for each slave station.

If an error occurs in the slave station of the control system, the slave station of the standby system performs control and

continues communications with the master station.
(1)

(2) (3)

(1) Master station (2) Process CPU (redundant mode) (3) Redundant function module (4) Serial communication module (5) Tracking cable

(4)

(5)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Settings specific to redundant systems
To configure a redundant system, select an operation mode and a model for the redundant system with the engineering tool. The following describes the modules for which users need to select an operation mode and a model for the redundant system.
CPU module
When using the Process CPU in redundant mode, select "Redundant" for the operation mode.
Window

CC-Link IE Controller Network
When placing a module on the "Module Configuration" window or adding a module on the "Navigation window" in the engineering tool, select "RJ71GP21-SX(R)" or "RJ71GP21S-SX(R)" for the model.
Window

RJ71GP21(S)-SX(R) is the model name on the engineering tool for using the RJ71GP21(S)-SX in a redundant system. (R) of the model name is the abbreviation for Redundant.

The following describes model names to be selected using the following redundant system configuration for CC-Link IE Controller Network as an example.

Configuration example

Description

RJ71GP21-SX

Select "RJ71GP21-SX" or "RJ71GP21S-SX" for the CC-Link IE Controller Network module mounted on the base unit for which a redundant configuration has not been made. Select "RJ71GP21-SX(R)" or "RJ71GP21S-SX(R)" for the CC-Link IE Controller Network module mounted on the base unit where the Process CPU (redundant mode) and the redundant function module have been mounted on and for which a redundant system has been configured.

RJ71GP21-SX(R)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

RJ71GP21-SX(R)

CC-Link IE Field Network

When placing a module on the "Module Configuration" window or adding a module from the "Navigation window", select a

proper model with the engineering tool depending on the application.

Configuration

CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module

Remote head module

Redundant master station

RJ71GF11-T2(MR)

RJ72GF15-T2

Redundant slave station

RJ71GF11-T2(SR)

RJ72GF15-T2(SR)

Redundant line

RJ71GF11-T2(LR)

RJ72GF15-T2(LR)

Select a model name for the remote head module at project creation.

Window

� Project creation

� "Element Selection" window of "Module Configuration" (CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module)

� "Element Selection" window of "Module Configuration" (Remote head module)

RJ71GF11-T2(LR), RJ71GF11-T2(MR), and RJ71GF11-T2(SR) are model names on the engineering tool for using the RJ71GF11-T2 in a redundant system. (Equivalent model names have been prepared for remote head modules.) (LR), (MR), and (SR) of the model names are abbreviations as follows. � LR: Line Redundant � MR: Master Redundant � SR: Slave Redundant

The following describes model names to be selected using the following redundant system configuration for CC-Link IE Field

Network as an example. � For a redundant master station

Configuration example

Description

RJ71GF11-T2(MR)

Select "RJ71GF11-T2(MR)" because a redundant configuration of the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules in the master station has been made. Select "RJ72GF15-T2" because the remote head module in the slave station is not in the redundant system configuration.

RJ72GF15-T2

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

� Redundant slave stations
Configuration example Redundant local station
RJ71GF11-T2(MR)

RJ71GF11-T2(MR)

Description
Select "RJ71GF11-T2(MR)" because a redundant configuration of the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules in the master station has been made. Select "RJ71GF11-T2(SR)" because a redundant configuration of the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules in the slave stations has been made.

RJ71GF11-T2(SR)
Redundant remote head modules RJ71GF11-T2(MR)

RJ71GF11-T2(SR) RJ71GF11-T2(MR)

Select "RJ71GF11-T2(MR)" because a redundant configuration of the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules in the master station has been made. Select "RJ72GF15-T2(SR)" because a redundant configuration of the remote head modules in the slave station is made.

RJ72GF15-T2(SR)

� Redundant line
Configuration example RJ71GF11-T2(LR)

RJ71GF11-T2(LR)

Description
Select "RJ71GF11-T2(LR)" and "RJ72GF15-T2(LR)" for each of the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules of the master station and the remote head module of the slave station because a redundant line configuration for these modules has been made.

RJ72GF15-T2(LR)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

MELSECNET/H network

When placing a module on the "Module Configuration" window or adding a module on the "Navigation window" in the

engineering tool, select "RJ71LP21-25(R)" for the model.

Window

RJ71LP21-25(R) is the model name on the engineering tool for using the RJ71LP21-25 in a redundant system. (R) of the model name is the abbreviation for Redundant.

The following describes model names to be selected using the following redundant system configuration for MELSECNET/H network as an example.

Configuration example

Description

RJ71LP21-25

Select "RJ71LP21-25" for the MELSECNET/H network module mounted on the base unit for which a redundant configuration has not been made. Select "RJ71LP21-25(R)" for the MELSECNET/H network module mounted on the base unit where the Process CPU (redundant mode) and the redundant function module have been mounted on and for which a redundant system has been configured.

RJ71LP21-25(R)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

System using the Safety CPU
Systems using the Safety CPU obtained the highest safety approvals (ISO 13849-1:2015 Category 4 and PLe, IEC 62061:2012 SIL3, IEC 61508:2010 SIL3) that programmable controllers can obtain. Programs for safety control and for standard control can be executed simultaneously by one Safety CPU module. In addition, safety communications and standard communications can be performed on one network.

(1)(2)(3)(4)

Standard control

(5)
Safety control

CC-Link IE TSN

CC-Link IE Field Network

Emergency Light stop switch curtain

Safety relay

Inverter

Robot

CC-Link IE Field Network

Emergency stop switch

Light curtain

Safety relay

Inverter

Robot

Emergency Light stop switch curtain

Safety relay

Inverter

Robot

Safety control

Standard control

Safety control

Standard control

(1)Safety CPU (2)Safety function module (3)CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (4) CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (5) Safety remote I/O module

For the mounting position of the safety function module, refer to the following. Page 57 Mounting position of the safety function module

For details on the differences between the Safety CPU and standard CPU and functions of the Safety CPU, refer to the

following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

The Safety CPU and the safety function module must be of the same pair version. Check the pair version with the rating plate on the side of the module, special register, or buffer memory (Safety CPU: SD206, safety function module: Un\G60). ( Page 184 Rating plate, Page 217 Pair Version)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Mounting position of the safety function module

Use the Safety CPU and the Safety function module as a pair.

Single CPU system
The safety function module is required to be mounted on the main base unit.*1 (It cannot be mounted on extension base

units.)

*1 When using the Safety CPU with firmware version "13" or earlier, mount the safety function module to the right of the Safety CPU.
If multiple safety function modules are mounted, the Safety CPU performs safety control with only the safety function module

that is mounted at the lowest slot number.

Multiple CPU system
The safety function module controlled by the Safety CPU is required to be mounted on the main base unit.*1 (It cannot be
mounted on extension base units.)
*1 When using the Safety CPU with firmware version "13" or earlier, mount the safety function module to the right of the Safety CPU.
If multiple safety function modules are mounted and the Safety CPU controls them, the Safety CPU performs safety control
with only the safety function module that is mounted at the lowest slot number.
For the combinations of CPU modules in a multiple CPU system, refer to the following. Page 86 Combinations of CPU modules in a multiple CPU system

Control CPU for safety function module
In a multiple CPU system, the safety function module mounted on the next slot to the Safety CPU is automatically controlled by the Safety CPU when: � The module configuration diagram or I/O assignment setting for a single CPU system is set to the Safety CPU. � No parameters are set to the Safety CPU. If the module configuration diagram or I/O assignment setting for a multiple CPU system is set to the Safety CPU, the safety function module is controlled by the CPU module set in them.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

System using the SIL2 Process CPU

The SIL2 Process CPU, SIL2 function module, and the modules which have the SIL2 mode obtained the safety approvals (IEC61511: 2015 SIL2 and IEC61508: 2010 SIL2). Use the SIL2 Process CPU with the SIL2 function module as a pair. Programs for safety control and for standard control can be executed simultaneously in one system. These products can be used to construct a safety function for general industrial machinery. Use the SIL2 Process CPU with the redundant function module as a pair to configure a redundant system. Mount the modules on the slots from the CPU slot to slot number 1 in the order of the SIL2 Process CPU, SIL2 function module, and redundant function module. I/O modules and intelligent function modules set to SIL2 mode are mounted to the intelligent device station (remote head module) on CC-Link IE Field Network.

(1) (2) (3) (5)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(1) SIL2 Process CPU (2) SIL2 function module (3) Redundant function module (4) Tracking cable (5) CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (6) Remote head module (7) Modules set to SIL2 mode ( Page 59 Configuration of a system using the SIL2 Process CPU)
For details on the functions of the SIL2 Process CPU, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
� The mounting positions and order are as described above. They cannot be changed. � The SIL2 Process CPU and the SIL2 function module must be of the same pair version. Check the pair
version with the rating plate on the side of the module, special register, or buffer memory (SIL2 Process CPU: SD206, SIL2 function module: Un\G60). ( Page 184 Rating plate, Page 217 Pair Version)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Configuration of a system using the SIL2 Process CPU

The following table lists system configuration for systems using the SIL2 Process CPU on CC-Link IE Field Network.

System configuration

Overview

Redundant specified station

Redundant master station

A redundant configuration of the master station is available.

Redundant configuration of entire network

Redundant line

A redundant configuration of the entire network including the master station and transmission path is available. The redundant line is configured in combination with the redundant master station and the redundant intelligent device station with remote head modules. When a communication error occurs in the master station, the control is continued by switching systems together with the network instead of switching the faulty station only. In addition, the time required for system switching is shorter than that for the redundant master station.

There are no restrictions on network topologies. However, the ring topology is recommended to configure a redundant system because the loopback function avoids system switching caused by a cable disconnection or a faulty station in a system.
Redundant master station
Mount a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system. If an error occurs in the master station of the control system, the submaster station of the standby system performs control.

(1) (2) (3) (5)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(1) SIL2 Process CPU (2) SIL2 function module (3) Redundant function module (4) Tracking cable (5) CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (6) Remote head module (7) Modules set to SIL2 mode
For the redundant master station, safety communications with a redundant intelligent device station (safety station) cannot be performed. To perform, configure the redundant line. ( Page 60 Redundant line)
For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant line
A redundant configuration of network lines is available. Mount a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system in the master station where a redundant configuration has been configured. Mount two remote head modules on each base unit of intelligent device stations for the redundant configuration of the remote head module. Connect the master station to the remote head modules of the control system and do the same for the standby system. With a redundant configuration of network lines, control is performed on a network of the standby system if an error occurs on the network of the control system.

(1) (2) (3) (5)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(6)

(7)

(1) SIL2 Process CPU (2) SIL2 function module (3) Redundant function module (4) Tracking cable (5) CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (6) Remote head module (7) Modules set to SIL2 mode
For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

For safety digital input/output

To perform safety digital input/output in a system using the SIL2 Process CPU, mount the two RX40NC6Bs and two

RY40PT5Bs which are set to SIL2 mode, to the right of the remote head module.

(1) (2) (3) (5)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(1) SIL2 Process CPU (2) SIL2 function module (3) Redundant function module (4) Tracking cable (5) CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (6) Remote head module (7) Two RX40NC6Bs and two RY40PT5Bs (These four modules are set to SIL2 mode.)
For details, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R I/O Module (With Diagnostic Functions) User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

For safety analog input
To perform safety analog input in a system using the SIL2 Process CPU, mount the two R60AD8-Gs, one R60DA8-G, and one RY40PT5B which are set to SIL2 mode, to the right of the remote head module.

(1) (2) (3) (5)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(1) SIL2 Process CPU (2) SIL2 function module (3) Redundant function module (4) Tracking cable (5) CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (6) Remote head module (7) Two R60AD8-Gs, one R60DA8-G, and one RY40PT5B (These four modules are set to SIL2 mode.)
For details, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Channel Isolated Analog-Digital Converter Module User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

For safety analog output

To perform safety analog output in a system using the SIL2 Process CPU, mount the one R60DA8-G, one R60AD8-G, and

one RY40PT5B-AS which are set to SIL2 mode, to the right of the remote head module.

(1) (2) (3) (5)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(1) SIL2 Process CPU (2) SIL2 function module (3) Redundant function module (4) Tracking cable (5) CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (6) Remote head module (7) One R60DA8-G, one R60AD8-G, one RY40PT5B-AS (These three modules are set to SIL2 mode.)
For details, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Channel Isolated Digital-Analog Converter Module User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Redundant configuration of power supply modules

A redundant configuration of redundant power supply modules is available when two redundant power supply modules are mounted on a redundant power supply base unit. ( Page 67 Lists of Configuration Devices).

Even if one power supply module has failed or an error occurs with its power supply system, system operation can be

continued with the other power supply module.

Replacement procedure of redundant power supply modules)

(1)

(1) Redundant power supply module (2) Redundant power supply main base unit

(2)

(1)

(2)

Redundant configuration of CC-Link IE Controller Network
By mounting a CC-Link IE Controller Network module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system, the new control system can continue data link if an error occurs in the control system. For details, refer to "Redundant System Function" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Controller Network User's Manual (Application)
Redundant configuration of CC-Link
By mounting a CC-Link system master/local module on each of the base units of the control system and standby system, system switching due to a stop error of a CPU module can be supported with the standby master function. For details, refer to "How to Use Standby Master Function in Redundant System" in the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Settings specific to systems using the SIL2 Process CPU

To configure a system using the SIL2 Process CPU, select a model for the systems using the SIL2 Process CPU with the

engineering tool. The following describes the modules for which users need to select an operation mode and a model for the

systems using the SIL2 Process CPU.

CPU module
The operation mode for the SIL2 Process CPU is fixed to "Redundant".

Window

CC-Link IE Field Network
When placing a module on the "Module Configuration" window or adding a module on the "Navigation window" in the
engineering tool, select a proper model depending on whether the remote head module is redundant or not.

Configuration

CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module

Remote head module

When the remote head module is redundant (Redundant line)

RJ71GF11-T2(LR)

RJ72GF15-T2(LR)

When the remote head module is not redundant (Redundant master station)

RJ71GF11-T2(MR)

RJ72GF15-T2

Select a model name for the remote head module at project creation.

Window

� Project creation

� "Element Selection" window of "Module Configuration" (CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module)

� "Element Selection" window of "Module Configuration" (Remote head module)

The RJ71GF11-T2(LR) and RJ71GF11-T2(MR) are model names on the engineering tool for using the RJ71GF11-T2 in a system using the SIL2 Process CPU. (Equivalent model names have been prepared for remote head modules.) (LR) and (MR) of the model names are abbreviations as follows. � LR: Line Redundant � MR: Master Redundant

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

Modules to be mounted to the intelligent device station (remote head module)
When placing a module on the "Module Configuration" window or adding a module from the "Navigation window", select a model name which has "(S2M)" or "(S2S)" on its ending in the engineering tool. For example, select "RX40NC6B(S2M)" or "RX40NC6B(S2S)" for the input module with diagnostic functions.
Window
� "Element Selection" window of "Module Configuration"
For details, refer to the following. Manuals for each module used

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.1 Overall Configuration

1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices 1
The following table lists products that can be used in the MELSEC iQ-R series system. For the modules that are not described in this chapter, refer to the manuals for each module used. Manuals for each module used
MELSEC iQ-R series

The following table lists the configuration devices and the availability of each CPU module and remote head module.

Note that there are restrictions on the usable firmware version of CPU modules and the remote head module or the usable

functions and firmware version of each module, depending on the combination of modules used. Refer to the manuals for

each module used at the same time.

CPU modules and remote head modules are abbreviated as follows:
� Rn: RnCPU � RnEN: RnENCPU � RnP(P): Process CPU (process mode) � RnP(R): Process CPU (redundant mode) � RnP(R)(M): Process CPU (redundant mode) (main base unit) � RnP(R)(E): Process CPU (redundant mode) (extension base unit in a redundant system
with redundant extension base unit*1) � RnMT: Motion CPU � RnNC: NCCPU

� RnRT: Robot CPU � RnC: C Controller module � RnPSF: SIL2 Process CPU � RnSF: Safety CPU � Rem: Remote head module � Rem(R): Remote head module (redundant system)

*1 To configure a redundant system with redundant extension base unit, there are restrictions on the firmware version of the CPU module. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))
: Available, : Not available

Main base unit

Item

Model

Rn Rn RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn Rn RnP Rn Rem Rem

EN (P) (R) MT NC RT C SF SF

(R)

Main base unit

R33B, R35B, R38B, R312B

Extended temperature range main base unit

R310B-HT

Redundant power supply main base R310RB unit

*1 *1

Extended temperature range redundant power supply main base unit

R38RB-HT

*1 When a redundant power supply system is configured, there are restrictions on the firmware version of the CPU module. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

Extension base unit and extension cable

Item

Model

Rn Rn RnP RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn Rn RnP Rn EN (P) (R) (R) MT NC RT C SF SF (M) (E)

Extension base unit

R65B, R68B, R612B

*1 *1

Extended temperature range extension base unit

R610B-HT

*1 *1

Redundant power supply extension base unit

R610RB

*2 *2

*1 *1

Extended temperature range redundant power supply extension base unit

R68RB-HT

*1 *1

Redundant extension base unit R68WRB

Extended temperature range R66WRB-HT redundant extension base unit

RQ extension base unit

RQ65B, RQ68B, RQ612B

*1 *1 *1

Extension cable

RC06B, RC12B, RC30B,

*1 *1

RC50B, RC100B

Rem Rem (R)

*1 When a multiple CPU system is configured, the programmable controller system can be extended if there are no modules controlled by
the Motion CPU, NCCPU, or robot CPU on the extension base unit. *2 When a redundant power supply system is configured, there are restrictions on the firmware version of the CPU module. ( MELSEC
iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)) *3 There are restrictions on the firmware version of the CPU module. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Power supply module

Item

Model

Rn Rn RnP RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn Rn RnP Rn EN (P) (R) (R) MT NC RT C SF SF (M) (E)

Rem Rem (R)

Power supply module

R61P, R63P, R64P

R62P

*3 *2

Redundant power supply module

R63RP, R64RP

*1 *1

*1 When a redundant power supply system is configured, there are restrictions on the firmware version of the CPU module. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))
*2 The R62P cannot be used because the current consumption of the system exceeds the rated output current of the R62P. *3 These modules cannot be mounted on the redundant extension base unit. ( Page 85 Combinations of a base unit and a power
supply module)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

CPU module

Item

Model

Rn Rn RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn RnC RnP Rn Rem Rem

EN (P) (R) MT NC RT

SF SF

(R)

Programmable controller CPU Process CPU*2

R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R04ENCPU*1, R08CPU, R08ENCPU*1, R16CPU, R16ENCPU*1, R32CPU, R32ENCPU*1, R120CPU, R120ENCPU*1
R08PCPU, R16PCPU,
R32PCPU, R120PCPU

Page 86 Combinations of CPU modules in a multiple CPU system

Motion CPU

R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R64MTCPU

NCCPU

R16NCCPU

Robot CPU

R16RTCPU

C Controller module SIL2 Process CPU*3
Safety CPU*4

R12CCPU-V
R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, R120PSFCPU
R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU

*1 RnENCPU is a module with the integrated CPU module/network functionality. When setting the engineering tool, select a network for the RnENCPU (network part) under "CPU Extension". ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))
*2 To configure a redundant system, use redundant function modules and operate Process CPUs in redundant mode.
When a firmware version of a Process CPU (redundant mode) to be used is "06" or earlier, use the Process CPUs with a firmware
version "06" or earlier in both systems. For the configuration of a redundant system, refer to the following. Page 40 Redundant system
*3 The SIL2 function module and the redundant function module must be mounted on the right of the SIL2 Process CPU. For the configuration of a system using the SIL2 Process CPU, refer to the following. Page 58 System using the SIL2 Process CPU
*4 Use the Safety CPU and the Safety function module as a pair. ( Page 56 System using the Safety CPU)

CPU module extension

Item

Model

Rn Rn RnP RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn RnC RnP Rn Rem Rem

EN (P) (R) (R) MT NC RT

SF SF

(R)

(M) (E)

Redundant function module SIL2 function module Safety function module

R6RFM R6PSFM R6SFM

*1 Use the redundant function module in combination with the Process CPU or SIL2 Process CPU. ( Page 40 Redundant system,
Page 58 System using the SIL2 Process CPU) *2 Use the SIL2 function module in combination with the SIL2 Process CPU. ( Page 58 System using the SIL2 Process CPU) *3 Use the Safety CPU and the Safety function module as a pair. ( Page 56 System using the Safety CPU)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

Remote head module

Item

Model

CC-Link IE Field Network

RJ72GF15-T2

Rn Rn RnP RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn RnC RnP Rn Rem Rem

EN (P) (R) (R) MT NC RT

SF SF

(R)

(M) (E)

SD memory card

Item SD memory card

Model
NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD

Rn Rn RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn RnC EN (P) (R) MT NC RT

*1 Use this device with the RnCPU except the R00CPU. *2 Use these devices with the R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU.

RnP Rn SF SF

Rem Rem (R)

Cassette

Item

Model

Extended SRAM cassette

NZ2MC-1MBS NZ2MC-2MBS NZ2MC-4MBS NZ2MC-8MBS NZ2MC-16MBS

Battery-less option cassette

NZ2MC-2MBSE NZ2MC-8MBSE NZ1BLC

Rn Rn RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn RnC EN (P) (R) MT NC RT

*1
*2

*1 *

RnP Rn SF SF

Rem Rem (R)

*1 Use these devices with the R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU. *2 There are restrictions on the firmware version. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Battery

Item Battery

Model
Q6BAT, Q7BATN, Q7BATN-SET, Q7BAT, Q7BAT-SET FX3U-32BL

Rn Rn RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn RnC EN (P) (R) MT NC RT

*1 Use this device with the R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU. *2 Use this device with the R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU.

RnP Rn SF SF

Rem Rem (R)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

I/O module

Item

Model

Rn Rn RnP RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn Rn RnP Rn Rem Rem

EN (P) (R) (R) MT NC RT C SF SF

(R)

(M) (E)

AC input module

RX10

RX10-TS

RX28

DC input module

RX40C7, RX41C4, RX42C4

RX40C7-TS, RX41C4-TS,

RX70C4, RX71C4,

RX72C4

DC high-speed input module RX40PC6H, RX40NC6H

RX41C6HS, RX61C6HS

Input module with diagnostic functions

RX40NC6B

*3 *2

Contact output module

RY10R2

RY10R2-TS

RY18R2A

Triac output module

RY20S6

Transistor output module

RY40NT5P, RY41NT2P,

RY42NT2P, RY40PT5P,

RY41PT1P, RY42PT1P

RY40NT5P-TS, RY41NT2P-TS, RY40PT5P-TS, RY41PT1P-TS

Transistor high-speed output RY41NT2H, RY41PT2H

module

Output module with diagnostic RY40PT5B functions

*3 *2

SIL2 analog control output module

RY40PT5B-AS

I/O combined module

RH42C4NT2P

Dual signal module

R173SXY

*1 Up to three dual signal modules can be connected to one NCCPU. *2 When using these modules in SIL2 mode, mount them with the intelligent device station (remote head module) on CC-Link IE Field
Network. They cannot be used with the main base unit on which the SIL2 Process CPU is mounted. ( Page 58 System using the SIL2 Process CPU) *3 For the restrictions when using the modules on an extension base unit in a redundant system with redundant extension base unit, refer to the following. Manuals for each module used

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

Intelligent function module

Item

Model

Analog-digital converter module

R60AD4, R60ADI8, R60ADV8

Channel isolated analog-digital R60AD8-G

converter module

R60AD16-G*2

Channel isolated analog-digital converter module (with signal conditioning function)

R60AD6-DG

High-speed analog-digital converter module

R60ADH4

HART-enabled analog-digital converter module

R60ADI8-HA

Digital-analog converter module

R60DA4, R60DAI8, R60DAV8

Channel isolated digital-analog R60DA8-G

converter module

R60DA16-G*2

High speed digital-analog converter module

R60DAH4

Simple Motion module

RD77MS2, RD77MS4, RD77MS8, RD77MS16

RD77GF4, RD77GF8, RD77GF16, RD77GF32

Channel isolated RTD input module

R60RD8-G

Channel isolated thermocouple R60TD8-G input module

Temperature control module

R60TCTRT2TT2, R60TCTRT2TT2BW, R60TCRT4, R60TCRT4BW

High-speed counter module

RD62P2, RD62D2, RD62P2E

Channel isolated pulse input module

RD60P8-G

Flexible high-speed I/O control module MES interface module*5

RD40PD01 RD81MES96

RD81MES96N

High speed data logger module*5

RD81DL96

OPC UA server module

RD81OPC96

Recorder module

RD81RC96

Camera recorder module

RD81RC96-CA

C intelligent function module
Positioning module*4
Energy measuring module Ethernet*3*19 CC-Link IE TSN Motion module

RD55UP06-V
RD55UP12-V RD75P2, RD75P4, RD75D2, RD75D4 RE81WH
RJ71EN71 RJ71GN11-T2
RD78G4, RD78G8, RD78G16, RD78G32, RD78G64, RD78GHV, RD78GHW

Rn Rn RnP RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn Rn EN (P) (R) (R) MT NC RT C (M) (E)

*18 *7

*18

*18 *7

*18

*18 *7

*18

*15

*12*15

*15

*12*15

*12

*18

*14 *14

*9 *18

RnP Rn Rem Rem

SF SF

(R)

*11

*15

*14

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

Item
CC-Link IE Controller Network*19

Model
RJ71GP21-SX RJ71GP21S-SX

Rn Rn RnP RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn Rn RnP Rn Rem Rem

EN (P) (R) (R) MT NC RT C SF SF

(R)

(M) (E)

RJ71EN71*1

CC-Link IE Field Network*19

RJ71GF11-T2

RJ71EN71

MODBUS/TCP*9

RJ71EN71

*18

CC-Link*19

RJ61BT11

*9 *18

MELSECNET/H network module

RJ71LP21-25

*14 *14 *14 *14

Serial communication*19

RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2,

*9* *18

RJ71C24-R4

GPIB interface module

RJ71GB91

MODBUS*9

RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2,

*17 *18

RJ71C24-R4

AnyWireASLINK master module*13

RJ51AW12AL

BACnet module

RJ71BAC96

CANopen module

RJ71CN91

*8 *8

*8*12

*8*9

DeviceNet master/slave module PROFIBUS-DP module*9
Laser displacement sensor control module
EtherNet/IP Network interface module

RJ71DN91 RJ71PB91V R60MH112NA RJ71EIP91

*10 *10 *10

*18

*10

*18

*14

*18

*16

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

*1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network function of the RJ71EN71 is used, there are restrictions on the firmware versions of the RnCPU, Safety CPU, C Controller module, and RJ71EN71. ( User's Manual (Application) for the module used)
*2 These modules occupy two slots. When these modules are used with the RnCPU or the C Controller module, there are restrictions on each firmware version. ( User's Manual (Application) for the CPU module used)
*3 When the RJ71EN71 is used with a remote head module, there are restrictions on network combinations. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/
CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))
*4 When a redundant system is built with a master station of CC-Link IE Field Network, these modules cannot be used with a remote head
module. *5 Depending on the CPU module used, there are restrictions on the firmware version of these modules. ( Manual for each module) *6 When an OPC UA server module is used in a redundant system, there are restrictions for constructing the system. ( MELSEC iQ-R
OPC UA Server Module User's Manual (Application)) Also, in a redundant system, use the Process CPU with firmware version "18" or later. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual
(Application)) *7 The method for enabling parameters differs depending on the firmware version of the C Controller module. ( MELSEC iQ-R C
Controller Module User's Manual (Startup)) *8 The refresh settings are restricted depending on the firmware version of the CPU module. ( MELSEC iQ-R CANopen Module User's
Manual (Application)) *9 There are restrictions on the firmware version. ( Manual for each module)
*10 Use the RnCPU with firmware version "28" or later, the RnENCPU with firmware version "17" or later, the Process CPU (process mode)
with firmware version "12" or later, and the Safety CPU with firmware version "14" or later. When the CPU module with a firmware
version earlier than this version is used, there are restrictions on "Refresh Setting" in "Module Parameter".
*11 When using these modules in SIL2 mode, mount them with the intelligent device station (remote head module) on CC-Link IE Field Network. They cannot be used with the main base unit on which the SIL2 Process CPU is mounted. ( Page 58 System using the
SIL2 Process CPU)
*12 These modules cannot be used with the R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU. *13 The iQSS functions are restricted depending on the system configuration. ( iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual) *14 There are restrictions on the firmware version. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)) *15 There are restrictions on the firmware version and production information. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual
(Application)) *16 There are restrictions on the firmware version. ( Manual for each module)
The module cannot be available for the safety communications.
*17 For details on a redundant system in which serial communication is used, refer to the following. Page 50 Redundant system for serial communication
*18 For the restrictions when using the modules on an extension base unit in a redundant system with redundant extension base unit, refer
to the following. Manuals for each module used *19 Read the precautions before configuring a C Controller system. ( Page 96 When using MELSEC iQ-R series modules)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

Blank cover module

Item

Model

Blank cover module

RG60

MELSEC-Q series

Rn Rn RnP RnP RnP Rn Rn Rn Rn RnP Rn Rem Rem

EN (P) (R) (R) MT NC RT C SF SF

(R)

(M) (E)

The following table lists the MELSEC-Q series modules and extension cables which can be used in the MELSEC iQ-R series system. To use MELSEC-Q series modules and extension cables in the MELSEC iQ-R series system, connect the RQ extension base unit or MELSEC-Q series extension base units under the RQ extension base unit. ( Page 148 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit) When a MELSEC-Q series module is used, refer to the following. Page 221 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Item

Model

Base unit

Extension base unit Q series large type extension base unit*5 Q series large type extension base unit (AnS series size)*5

Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B Q55BL, Q65BL, Q68BL Q55BLS, Q65BLS, Q68BLS, Q55BLS-D, Q65BLS-D, Q68BLS-D

Extension cable

QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B

Power supply module

Q61P, Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, Q64PN, Q61P-D

I/O module

AC input module

QX10, QX10-TS, QX28

DC input module DC high-speed input module*4

QX40, QX40-TS, QX40-S1, QX41, QX41-S1, QX41-S2, QX42, QX42-S1, QX70, QX71, QX72, QX80, QX80-TS, QX81, QX81-S2, QX82, QX82-S1
QX40H, QX70H, QX80H, QX90H

AC/DC input module

QX50

Contact output module

QY10, QY10-TS, QY18A

Triac output module

QY22

Transistor output module

QY40P, QY40P-TS, QY41P, QY42P, QY50, QY68A, QY70, QY71, QY80, QY80-TS, QY81P, QY82P

Transistor high-speed output module

QY41H

I/O combined module
Interrupt module Large type AC input module*5 Large type contact output module*5 Large type triac output module*5 Large type transistor output module*5

QH42P, QX48Y57, QX41Y41P QI60*2 QX11L, QX21L QY11AL, QY13L QY23L QY51PL

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

Item Intelligent function module
Blank cover module

Analog-digital converter module*6 Channel isolated high resolution analog-digital converter module*6 Channel isolated high resolution analog-digital converter module (with signal conditioning function)*6 Channel isolated analog-digital converter module*6 Channel isolated analog-digital converter module (with signal conditioning function)*6 High-speed analog-digital converter module*6 Digital-analog converter module*6
Channel isolated digital-analog converter module*6 High speed digital-analog converter module*6 Analog input/output module*6 Load cell input module*6 Current transformer input module*6 RTD input module*6 Channel isolated RTD input module*6 Thermocouple input module*6 Channel isolated thermocouple/micro voltage input module*6 Channel isolated thermocouple input module*6 Temperature control module*6 Loop control module Multichannel high-speed counter module 4Mpps capable high-speed counter module Channel isolated pulse input module Multi function counter/timer module Positioning module*3 Positioning module with built-in counter function*3 MES interface module*2*5*7 Web server module*2*5*7 CC-Link/LT master module AnyWire DB A20 master module MELSECNET/H network module*1*8
MODBUS/TCP interface module MODBUS interface module FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module*8
AS-i master module*2 Intelligent communication module*5 DeviceNet master-slave module AnyWireASLINK master module Energy measuring module Insulation monitoring module Blank cover Large type blank cover*5 Q series large type blank cover (AnS series size)*5

Model Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI Q64AD-GH Q62AD-DGH
Q68AD-G Q66AD-DG
Q64ADH Q62DA, Q62DAN, Q64DA, Q64DAN, Q68DAV, Q68DAVN, Q68DAI, Q68DAIN Q62DA-FG, Q66DA-G Q64DAH Q64AD2DA Q61LD Q68CT Q64RD Q64RD-G, Q68RD3-G Q64TD Q64TDV-GH Q68TD-G-H01, Q68TD-G-H02 Q64TCTTN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTBWN Q62HLC QD63P6 QD64D2 QD60P8-G QD65PD2 QD70P4, QD70P8, QD70D4, QD70D8, QD73A1 QD72P3C3 QJ71MES96, QJ71MES96N QJ71WS96 QJ61CL12 QJ51AW12D2 QJ71LP21*5, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE, QJ71BR11, QJ71NT11B QJ71MT91 QJ71MB91 QJ71FL71, QJ71FL71-T, QJ71FL71-B2, QJ71FL71-B5, QJ71FL71F01, QJ71FL71-T-F01, QJ71FL71-B2-F01, QJ71FL71-B5-F01 QJ71AS92 QD51, QD51-R24 QJ71DN91 QJ51AW12AL QE81WH, QE84WH, QE81WH4W, QE83WH4W QE82LG QG60 QG69L QG69LS

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

*1 MELSECNET/H network modules can be used with the programmable controller CPU, Safety CPU, or C Controller module. When using

this module with the RnCPU, Safety CPU, or C Controller module, check the versions of the CPU module and engineering tool used.

( User's Manual (Application) for the CPU module used) However, in a multiple CPU system where the Process CPU is used, they cannot be used even when the programmable controller CPU,

the Safety CPU, or the C Controller module is set as the control CPU of them.

*2 These modules cannot be used with a remote head module.

*3 This module cannot be used with a remote head module (in a redundant system).

*4 This module cannot be used as an interrupt module when a remote head module is used.

*5 These modules cannot be used with a C Controller module. *6 The method for enabling parameters differs depending on the firmware version of the C Controller module. ( MELSEC iQ-R C

Controller Module User's Manual (Startup)) *7 There are restrictions on the supported CPU modules. ( Page 229 Precautions) *8 Read the precautions before configuring a C Controller system. ( Page 96 When using MELSEC-Q series modules)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.2 Lists of Configuration Devices

1.3 System Configuration Specifications

This section describes the overview of the MELSEC iQ-R series system configuration.

CPU module (except the C Controller module)

The following table shows the system configuration of when a CPU module is mounted on a CPU slot of a main base unit.*1

Item

Description

Module mounting position
Maximum number of mountable modules

Single CPU system Multiple CPU system

Slot number 0 to 63 64*2*4*7*8 57 to 63*2*3*4*7*8

Redundant system

System using the SIL2 Process CPU System using the Safety CPU Maximum number of extension base units Overall extension cable distance

10 63*2*4*7 7*5 20m*6

*1 When a CPU module is mounted on a CPU slot, a remote head module cannot be mounted. *2 Mount modules so that the total number of occupied I/O points of these modules is equal to or less than the number of I/O points of the
CPU module used. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Startup)) The number of I/O points of each module to be mounted can be checked on the engineering tool. ( GX Works3 Operating Manual) *3 Modules can be mounted on the slot number 63 to the slot on the right of the slot on which the rightmost CPU module is mounted. For example, when four CPU modules are mounted on the CPU slot and slot number 0 to 2, the maximum number of mountable modules is 61. *4 The number of mountable modules includes the empty slots. Even if the number of I/O points is set to zero for an empty slot, the slot is counted as one module. *5 This is the total number of the extension base units, RQ extension base units, and MELSEC-Q series extension base units. *6 When a MELSEC-Q series module is used in the system, the overall cable distance is 13.2m.

CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Overall cable distance: 20m

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
60 61 62 63 � � � � � � � �

Maximum of seven extension base units

� Shaded areas are for the power supply modules. � "CPU" is the CPU slot, and the numbers are slot numbers. � Modules cannot be mounted on the slots marked .
*7 Depending on a module used, mounting of the maximum number of modules may not be possible because of the rated output current of the power supply module used. Configure the system taking the current consumption of each module into consideration.
*8 The RnENCPU is a module occupies two slots, and therefore the maximum number of mountable modules decreases due to this one more slot occupied.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.3 System Configuration Specifications

C Controller module

The following table shows the system configuration of when a C Controller module is mounted on a CPU slot of a main base

unit.*1

Item

Description

Module mounting position

Maximum number of mountable modules

Single CPU system Multiple CPU system

Maximum number of extension base units

Overall extension cable distance

Slot number 1 to 63 63*2*3*7 57 to 62*2*3*4*7 7*5 20m*6

*1 When a C Controller module is mounted on a CPU slot, a remote head module cannot be mounted. *2 Mount modules so that the total number of occupied I/O points of these modules is equal to or less than the number of I/O points of the
C Controller module used. ( MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Startup)) The number of I/O points of each module to be mounted can be checked on the engineering tool. ( GX Works3 Operating Manual) *3 The number of mountable modules includes the empty slots. Even if the number of I/O points is set to '0' for an empty slot, the slot is counted as one module. *4 Modules can be mounted on the slot number 63 to the slot on the right of the slot on which the rightmost C Controller modules is mounted. For example, when four C Controller modules are mounted on the CPU slot and slot number 1 to 6, the maximum number of mountable modules is 57. *5 This is the total number of extension base units, RQ extension base units, and MELSEC-Q series extension base units. *6 When a MELSEC-Q series module is used in the system, the overall cable distance is 13.2m.

CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Overall cable distance: 20m

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
60 61 62 63 � � � � � � � �

Maximum of seven extension base units

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.3 System Configuration Specifications

Remote head module

The following table shows the system configuration of when a remote head module is mounted on a CPU slot of a main base unit.*1

Item

Description

Module mounting position

Slot number 0 to 63

Maximum number of mountable modules
Maximum number of extension base units Overall extension cable distance

64 (When two remote head modules are mounted for a redundant system or a redundant line: 63)*2*3*6
7*4
20m*5

*1 When a remote head module is mounted on a CPU slot, a CPU module cannot be mounted. *2 Mount modules so that the total number of occupied I/O points of these modules is equal to or less than the number of I/O points of the
remote head module used. ( MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Startup)) The number of I/O points of each module to be mounted can be checked on the engineering tool. ( GX Works3 Operating Manual) *3 The number of mountable modules includes the empty slots. Even if the number of I/O points is set to zero for an empty slot, the slot is counted as one module. *4 This is the total number of the extension base units, RQ extension base units, and MELSEC-Q series extension base units. *5 When a MELSEC-Q series module is used in the system, the overall cable distance is 13.2m.

CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Overall cable distance: 20m

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
60 61 62 63 � � � � � � � �

Maximum of seven extension base units

� Shaded areas are for the power supply modules. � "CPU" is the CPU slot, and the numbers are slot numbers. � Modules cannot be mounted on the slots marked .
*6 Depending on a module used, mounting of the maximum number of modules may not be possible because of the rated output current of the power supply module used. Configure the system taking the current consumption of each module into consideration.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.3 System Configuration Specifications

Modules having restrictions on the number of mountable

modules

This section describes modules having restrictions on the number of mountable modules.

MELSEC iQ-R series modules

CPU module (except the C Controller module)
The following table shows the restrictions on the number of mountable modules of when a CPU module is mounted on a CPU slot of a main base unit.

Module

Model

Maximum number of mountable modules

Single CPU system

Multiple CPU system

Redundant system

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module
CC-Link IE TSN master/ local module Motion module
CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local module CC-Link module*2

� RJ71GP21-SX � RJ71GP21S-
SX � RJ71EN71*4 � RJ71GN11-T2
� RD78G4 � RD78G8 � RD78G16 � RD78G32 � RD78G64 � RD78GHV � RD78GHW � RJ71GF11-T2 � RJ71EN71*3
� RJ61BT11

8*5 8*1*5*13
8*1

MES interface module*6
High speed data logger module*6

� RD81MES96 � RD81MES96N
� RD81DL96

4 (No restrictions when high-speed access is not used)
4

C intelligent function module*6
Recorder module*19

� RD55UP06-V � RD55UP12-V
� RD81RC96

4 (No restrictions when data sampling in sequence scan is not used)
1

Camera recorder module*19

� RD81RC96-CA 4

Simple motion module
MELSECNET/H network module*18

� RD77GF4 � RD77GF8 � RD77GF16 � RD77GF32
� RJ71LP21-25

8*5*7 4*16

32 (One CPU module

8*8

can control eight

modules.)

32 (One CPU module

can control eight modules.)*1*5*14

8*8

32 (One CPU module

can control eight modules.)*1

16 (One CPU module

can control four

modules.)

16 (One CPU module

can control four

modules.)

16 (One CPU module

can control four

modules.)

4 (One CPU module can control one module.)

16 (One CPU module

can control four

modules.)

8 (Only CPU No.1 can control modules.)*7

4 (One CPU module can 4*16 control four modules.)*17

System using the SIL2 Process CPU 8*8*11

8*8*9*12 8*9

System using the Safety CPU 8*8 8*1*10*13*14
8 4*15 1*20 4*15 8*7

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.3 System Configuration Specifications

*1 There is no restriction on the number of mountable modules when parameters are set using the dedicated instruction after "Program" in "Module Parameter" is selected. Note that this does not apply to a safety station. Only the module where "Parameter Editor" is set can be set for the safety station.
*2 Use three network modules (RJ71GP21(S)-SX, RJ71GF11-T2, and RJ71EN71 (when the CC-Link IE Field Network function is used)) or less per CPU module at the automatic CC-Link startup.
*3 There are the restrictions when the CC-Link IE Field Network function is used. *4 There are the restrictions when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used. *5 This number includes the RnENCPU (network part). When the CPU module used is the RnENCPU and the RnENCPU (network part) is
used for the CC-Link IE Field Network function or the CC-Link IE Controller Network function, the maximum number of mountable modules equipped with the used network function is decreased by 1. For instance, when the RnENCPU (network part) is used for the CC-Link IE Field Network function, the maximum number of mountable CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local modules is decreased by 1. In this case, the maximum number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules remains the same. *6 For one CPU module, the number of mountable modules that use the sequence scan synchronization sampling function should be a combination of RD81MES96, RD81MES96N, RD81DL96, RD55UP06-V, and RD55UP12-V with the maximum module count to be four. For the R00CPU, R01CPU, or R02CPU is used, the number of mountable modules that use the function should be a combination of those modules with the maximum module count to be two. Refer to the manuals for the CPU module and each module that uses the sequence scan synchronization sampling function, because the sequence scan synchronization sampling function has other restrictions in addition to the restriction on the number of modules. *7 The total number of CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local modules and simple motion modules must be eight modules or less. *8 The RJ71EN71 cannot be used. *9 Setting with dedicated instructions is not available. *10 The number is 32 (including safety stations) in a multiple CPU system. (One CPU module can control eight modules.) *11 To mount the maximum number of the RJ71GP21(S)-SX allowed, use the R64P for the power supply module. Since the rated output current of the R64P is 9A, up to six of the RJ71GP21(S)-SX can be mounted. *12 To mount the maximum number of the RJ71GF11-T2 allowed, use the R64P for the power supply module. Since the rated output current of the R64P is 9A, up to seven of the RJ71GF11-T2 can be mounted. *13 In the single CPU system configuration, the total number of CC-Link IE TSN master/local modules, Motion modules, and CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local modules must be 8 modules or less. *14 In the multiple CPU system configuration, the total number of CC-Link IE TSN master/local modules, Motion modules, and CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local modules must be 32 modules or less. *15 The number is 16 in a multiple CPU system. (One CPU module can control four modules.) *16 The total number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules and MELSECNET/H network modules is eight. *17 The total number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules and MELSECNET/H network modules is 32. *18 The CPU module that controls a MELSEC-Q series MELSECNET/H network module mounted on the RQ extension base unit cannot control the MELSEC iQ-R series MELSECNET/H network module. *19 There are restrictions on the firmware version and production information of the CPU module that controls the recorder modules. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)) *20 The number is 4 in a multiple CPU system. (One CPU module can control one module.)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.3 System Configuration Specifications

C Controller module

The following table shows the restrictions on the number of mountable modules of when a C Controller module is mounted on

a CPU slot of a main base unit.

Module

Model

Maximum number of mountable modules

CC-Link IE Controller Networkequipped module
CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local module*4 CC-Link module*4

� RJ71GP21-SX � RJ71GP21S-SX � RJ71EN71*2
� RJ71GF11-T2 � RJ71EN71*5
� RJ61BT11

Simple motion module*6

� RD77GF4 � RD77GF8 � RD77GF16 � RD77GF32

Single CPU system 8*1
8 8 8

Multiple CPU system
32 (One CPU module can control eight modules.)*3

Redundant system

32 (One CPU module can control eight modules.)

8 (Only CPU No.1 can

control modules.)

*1 The total number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) and MELSECNET/H network modules is eight. The number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) will decrease when one or more MELSECNET/H network modules are mounted.
*2 There are the restrictions when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used. *3 The total number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is
used) and MELSECNET/H network modules is 32. The number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) will decrease when one or more MELSECNET/H network modules are mounted. *4 There is no restriction on the number of mountable modules when parameters are set using the dedicated instruction after "Program" in "Module Parameter" is selected. *5 There are the restrictions when the CC-Link IE Field Network function is used. *6 The total number of CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local modules and simple motion modules must be eight modules or less.

Remote head module
The following table shows the restrictions on the number of mountable modules of when a remote head module is mounted on
a CPU slot of a main base unit.

Module

Model

Maximum number of mountable modules

CC-Link module

� RJ61BT11

8 (same as in a redundant system configuration)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.3 System Configuration Specifications

MELSEC-Q series modules

CPU module (except the C Controller module)
The following table shows the restrictions on the number of mountable modules of when a CPU module is mounted on a CPU slot of a main base unit.

Module Interrupt module*1 Input module*1*2
MELSECNET/H network module*5

Model
� QI60 � QX40H � QX70H � QX80H � QX90H
� QJ71LP21 � QJ71LP21-25 � QJ71LP21S-25 � QJ71LP21G,
QJ71LP21GE � QJ71BR11 � QJ71NT11B

Maximum number of mountable modules

Single CPU system

Multiple CPU system

4 (One CPU module can control one module.)

4*3

4*4 (One CPU module can control four modules.)

*1 There are the restrictions when parameters are not set in "I/O Assignment Setting" of the [I/O Assignment] tab on the "System Parameter" window. There is no restriction when parameters are set in "I/O Assignment Setting".
*2 There are the restrictions when the input module is shifted to an interrupt module by turning off the function selection switch (SW2). *3 The total number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is
used) and MELSECNET/H network modules is eight. The number of mountable MELSECNET/H network modules will decrease when five or more CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) are mounted. *4 The total number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) and MELSECNET/H network modules is 32. The number of mountable MELSECNET/H network modules will decrease when 28 or more CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) are mounted. *5 The CPU module that controls a MELSEC iQ-R series MELSECNET/H network module cannot control the MELSEC-Q series MELSECNET/H network module mounted on the RQ extension base unit.

C Controller module
The following table shows the restrictions on the number of mountable modules of when a C Controller module is mounted on a CPU slot of a main base unit.

Module
Interrupt module*1 MELSECNET/H network module

Model
� QI60 � QJ71LP21-25 � QJ71LP21S-25 � QJ71LP21G,
QJ71LP21GE � QJ71BR11 � QJ71NT11B

Maximum number of mountable modules

Single CPU system

Multiple CPU system

4 (One CPU module can control one module.)

4*2

4 (One CPU module can control four modules.)*3

*1 When setting an interrupt pointer to be used with CW Configurator, there is no restriction on the number of mountable modules. (Up to 64 modules can be mounted.)
*2 The total number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) and MELSECNET/H network modules is eight. The number of mountable MELSECNET/H network modules will decrease when five or more CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) are mounted.
*3 The total number of mountable CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) and MELSECNET/H network modules is 32. The number of mountable MELSECNET/H network modules will decrease when 28 or more CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) are mounted.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.3 System Configuration Specifications

Base unit combination

The following tables show which base unit combinations are possible. : Combination possible, : Combination not possible

Main base unit
R3B R3B-HT R3RB R3RB-HT

Extension base unit

R6B

RQ6B*2

R6B-HT *1 *1

R6RB *1 *1

R6RB-HT *1 *1

R6WRB *3 *1*3 *3 *1*3

R6WRB-HT *1*3 *3 *1*3 *3

*1 If the combination contains base units other than the extended temperature range base unit, use in an operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55.
*2 Only the MELSEC-Q series extension base unit can be connected to the lower level of an RQ extension base unit. ( Page 149
When MELSEC-Q series modules are used)
*3 For the combination of extension base units, refer to the following. Page 94 Precautions for redundant system with redundant extension base unit

Only use the redundant power supply base unit for redundant configuration of power supply modules in the entire system. If another type of base unit is used together and an error occurs in its power supply, the entire system stops.

Combinations of a base unit and a power supply module

The following table shows which combinations of a base unit and a power supply module are possible. In addition, check combinations with CPU modules. ( Page 67 Lists of Configuration Devices) : Combination possible, : Combination not possible

Base unit Main base unit
Extension base unit

R3B R3B-HT R3RB R3RB-HT R6B RQ6B R6B-HT R6RB R6RB-HT R6WRB R6WRB-HT

Power supply module R6P

R6RP

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.3 System Configuration Specifications

Combinations of CPU modules in a multiple CPU system

The CPU modules that can be used in the multiple CPU system differ depending on what type of CPU module is mounted as

CPU No.1.

The following table summarizes the possible combination of CPU modules and the number of mountable modules in the

multiple CPU system.

The CPU modules mounted as CPU No.2 or later are described as follows.

� Rn: RnCPU

� RnNC: NCCPU

� RnEN: RnENCPU

� RnRT: Robot CPU

� RnP(P): Process CPU (process mode)

� RnC: C Controller module

� RnMT: Motion CPU

� RnSF: Safety CPU

CPU module mounted as CPU No.1
RnCPU RnENCPU*7 Process CPU (process mode) Safety CPU*11 C Controller module*6

Number of CPU modules that can be mounted as CPU No.2 and later

RnEN*7 RnP(P) RnMT*4

RnNC*4

RnRT*4

RnC*6

0 to 3

0 to 1*2*8 0 to 3*1

0 to 3

0 to 3*10

0 to 3*9

0 to 3*7

0 to 3*1*5 0 to 1*2*8 0 to 3

0 to 3*1*5

0 to 3*9

0 to 3

0 to 1*8

0 to 3*1

0 to 3*12

0 to 3

0 to 3*9*13

0 to 3*9

0 to 1*2*8 0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3*9

RnSF*4 0 to 1*2*3*8 0 0 to 1*2*8 0 0 to 1*2*8

*1 Under the multiple CPU system configuration, online module change is not permitted. *2 The Safety CPU with firmware version "13" or earlier or the RnENCPU must be mounted at the rightmost position of the block of CPU
modules. For the Safety CPU with firmware version "14" or later, there are no restrictions on the mounting position. However, CPU modules cannot be mounted to the right of the safety function module. *3 If the following function is executed in the system where the Safety CPU and the RnCPU with a firmware version "11" or earlier are used, the model of the base unit cannot be displayed. System monitor [Online] [Read Module Configuration from PLC] when the "Module Configuration" window is displayed "Read Mounting Status" of the [I/O Assignment] tab on the "System Parameter" window *4 The Safety CPU with firmware version "13" or earlier, Motion CPU, NCCPU, and robot CPU cannot be set as CPU No.1. *5 If a multiple CPU system is configured in these combinations and "Enable" is set in "Direct change setting" of "CPU Parameter" for the Process CPU No.1 (process mode), an error occurs. To prevent the error, set "Disable" in "Direct change setting". *6 When the C Controller module is used in combination with the Process CPU, use the C Controller module with firmware version "04" or later. *7 When configuring a multiple CPU system, use the RnENCPU with firmware version "25" or later, the Motion CPU with firmware version "10" or later, and the engineering tool with version "1.032J" or later. ( Page 90 Precautions for the case where an RnENCPU is set as CPU No.1) *8 The Safety CPU with firmware version "13" or earlier and the RnENCPU cannot be used together. The Safety CPU with firmware version "14" or later can be used with the RnENCPU. When the two devices are used together, the RnENCPU must be mounted at the rightmost position of the block of CPU modules. *9 The C Controller module cannot be used with the R00CPU, R01CPU, or R02CPU. *10 The robot CPU cannot be used with any CPU modules other than the RnCPU. *11 When the Safety CPU is set as CPU No.1, use the Safety CPU and safety function module with firmware versions "14" or later. *12 In the Safety CPU and multiple CPU system, use the MT Works2 version "1.155M" or later when using the fixed scan communication function. *13 The system parameter utilization function is not available for the import of system parameters of the Safety CPU to the C Controller module.

The Process CPU (redundant mode) or the SIL2 Process CPU cannot be used in a multiple CPU system.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.3 System Configuration Specifications

1.4 Applicable Software 1
The following table lists software that can be used for the MELSEC iQ-R series system. (Manual for each software used)
When using a C Controller module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Startup)

Item

Function and application

iQ Works Version 2

A package software integrated the various software such as a programmable controller, motion controller, and GOT

GX Works3

Software for a system design, programming, debug, and maintenance of a programmable controller

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Software for data logging setting and maintenance

MT Works2

Software for a system design, programming, debug, and maintenance of the Motion CPU

1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

This section describes precautions for configuring a system.
Precautions when using the extended temperature range base unit
Pay attention to the following if using the extended temperature range base unit to construct a system compatible with operating ambient temperature of 0 to 60. � Only use extended temperature range base units in a system. If using a combination with base units other than the
extended temperature range base unit, use the system in an operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55. ( Page 85 Base unit combination) � All modules mounted on the extended temperature range base unit offer the same performance as that for an operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55, and can be used in an operating ambient temperature of 0 to 60. � Select external devices installed in the same control panel that are compatible with an operating ambient temperature of 0 to 60.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.4 Applicable Software

Consideration for internal current consumption
Configure the system so that the internal current consumption of the entire system will be less than the rated output current of the power supply module. The internal current consumption can be checked by using the engineering tool as follows.

The following window shows the check result.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

Precautions for multiple CPU system configuration

This section describes the precautions when configuring a multiple CPU system.

Precautions for access via the network module
In a multiple CPU system, CPU modules cannot access their target CPU module by operating the engineering tool or using dedicated instructions when: � The target CPU module is not compatible with the network module on the communication path. � The CPU module requesting the access is not compatible with the network module on the communication path.
Ex. The following example shows whether each target CPU module is accessible when the network module on the communication path is the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module.

Dedicated instruction � Access to (4)/(5): (d) Accessible

Dedicated instruction � Access to (4)/(5): (e) Inaccessible

Engineering tool � Access to (4)/(5): (d) Accessible

(1) (2) (3) (6)

Engineering tool � Access to (4)/(5): (e) Inaccessible

TSN HUB (4) (8)

CC-Link IE TSN (5) (8)

Engineering tool � Access to (1): (a) Accessible � Access to (2): (b) Accessible � Access to (3): (c) Inaccessible

(7) CC-Link IE Field Network

Dedicated instruction � Access to (1): (a) Accessible � Access to (2): (b) Accessible � Access to (3): (c) Inaccessible

(1), (2), (4): CPU modules compatible with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (3), (5): CPU modules not compatible with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (6): CC-Link IE TSN master/local module controlled by the CPU No.1 (7): CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (8): CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules

Access to

(a)

The control CPU of the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module

(b)

Another CPU module that is compatible with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module*1

(c)

Another CPU module that is not compatible with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module*1

(d)

The CPU modules in other stations (from the CPU module that is compatible with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module*1 via network modules)

(e)

The CPU modules in other stations (from the CPU module that is not compatible with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module*1 via network modules)

*1 For the firmware version of the CPU module that is compatible with the CC-Link IE TSN master/local module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

Precautions for the case where an RnENCPU is set as CPU No.1
When an RnENCPU is set as CPU No.1, set the module configuration diagram and the I/O assignment as shown below.
Module configuration diagram settings
Place the RnENCPU (network part)*1 on the right of the Motion CPU at the rightmost position.
*1 Set the RnENCPU as "_RJ71EN71()" in GX Works3. in brackets indicates an abbreviation of network type. For details, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)
� Configuration of two modules (CPU No.1: RnENCPU, No.2: Motion CPU)
� Actual system

� Module configuration diagram

1. Mount the RnENCPU (CPU part) on the CPU slot. 2. Mount the Motion CPU on the slot 0. 3. Mount the RnENCPU (network part) on the slot 1.

� Configuration of three modules (CPU No.1: RnENCPU, No.2 and No.3: Motion CPU)
� Actual system

� Module configuration diagram

1. Mount the RnENCPU (CPU part) on the CPU slot. 2. Mount the Motion CPUs on the slot 0 and slot 1. 3. Mount the RnENCPU (network part) on the slot 2.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

� Configuration of four modules (CPU No.1: RnENCPU, No.2 to No.4: Motion CPU)
� Actual system
1

� Module configuration diagram

1. Mount the RnENCPU (CPU part) on the CPU
slot.
2. Mount the Motion CPUs on the slot 0 to slot 2. 3. Mount the RnENCPU (network part) on the slot 3.

When "Read Module Configuration from PLC" is performed while parameters are not configured, module configuration is read according to the actual system. In that case, change the position of the RnENCPU (network part) to the right of the Motion CPU at the rightmost position as described in this manual. After setting parameters, the module configuration diagram keeps the setting of the parameters even though "Read Module Configuration from PLC" is performed. (Module configuration that differs from actual system is displayed.)
I/O assignment settings
Set the RnENCPU (network part)*1 just below the Motion CPU on the last slot.
*1 Set the RnENCPU as "_RJ71EN71()" in GX Works3. in brackets indicates an abbreviation of network type. For details, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)
� Configuration of two modules (CPU No.1: RnENCPU, No.2: Motion CPU)
� Actual system

� I/O assignment setting

1. Set the Motion CPU on the CPU slot. 2. Set the RnENCPU (network part) on the slot 1.

� Configuration of three modules (CPU No.1: RnENCPU, No.2 and No.3: Motion CPU)
� Actual system

� I/O assignment setting

1. Set the Motion CPUs (CPU No.2 and No.3) on
the CPU slots.
2. Set the RnENCPU (network part) on the slot 2.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

� Configuration of four modules (CPU No.1: RnENCPU, No.2 to No.4: Motion CPU)
� Actual system

� I/O assignment setting

1. Set the Motion CPUs (CPU No.2 to No.4) on the
CPU slots.
2. Set the RnENCPU (network part) on the slot 3.

When "Read Mounting Status" is performed while parameters are not configured, I/O assignment setting is read according to the actual system. In that case, change the position of the RnENCPU (network part) to just below the Motion CPU on the last slot as described in this manual. After setting parameters, the I/O assignment keeps the setting of the parameters even though "Read Mounting Status" is performed. (I/O assignment that differs from actual system is displayed.)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

Display in the system monitor

The system monitor displays the RnENCPU (network part) placed on the right of the Motion CPU at the rightmost position in

the same way as the module configuration window.

� Actual system

� System monitor

When the system monitor window is opened while parameters are not configured, module configuration is displayed according to the actual system. The same module configuration as that of the module configuration window is displayed when the system monitor window is opened after setting parameters. (Module configuration that differs from actual system is displayed.)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

Precautions for redundant system with redundant extension base unit
This section describes the precautions for the redundant system with redundant extension base unit.
Extension base unit for the extension level 1
Always use the redundant extension base unit in the extension level 1.
Extension base unit for the extension levels 2 to 7
� When extension cable redundancy is required, use the redundant extension base units in the extension levels 2 to 7. � When extension cable redundancy is not required, use other types of extension base units than the redundant extension
base unit in the extension levels 2 to 7. Note that the RQ extension base unit cannot be used.
In a system where extension cables are not redundant, using the redundant power supply extension base unit for extension levels 2 to 7 is recommended. Although other types of extension base units can be used, if an error occurs in a power supply module on an extension base unit where the power supply is not redundant, a stop error occurs in the CPU module of both systems and control of the entire system cannot be maintained.
Mountable power supply modules
For the power supply modules that can be mounted on the extension base units in a redundant system with redundant extension base unit, refer to the following. Page 85 Combinations of a base unit and a power supply module
Replacement and addition of extension cables
� The extension cable between the main base unit and the extension base unit cannot be replaced during system operation. However, the extension cable between the main base unit of the standby system and the extension level 1 can be replaced or added while the control system is powered off.
� When extension cables are redundant, an extension cable can be replaced or added for the inactive side connector (the connector where ACTIVE LED is off) of the redundant extension base unit. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) (Replacement/Addition of an Extension Cable (Online)))
� When extension cables are not redundant, extension cables between extension base units cannot be replaced or added during system operation.
Overall extension cable distance
� Keep the overall cable distance within 20m in total length of extension cables. � Keep each cable distance between two base units up to 10m. � The length of the cables (two extension cables between the redundant extension base unit and two main base units, and
those between two redundant extension base units) does not need to be the same. When using varying lengths of cables, use the longer cable to determine the cable distance.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

Communications between the CPU module and devices

This section describes the precautions when the following devices communicate with the CPU module in a redundant system

via a module on an extension base unit.

When the engineering tool communicates via a module on an extension base unit
� When "Not Specified" is selected for "Specify Redundant CPU" "Specify Redundant CPU" in the "Specify Connection Destination" window, the engineering tool accesses the CPU module of the control system. In the case that the CPU module of system A is the control system, the engineering tool can communicate with the CPU module only when "System A", "Control System", or "Not Specified" is selected. In the case that the CPU module of system A is the standby system, the engineering tool can communicate with the CPU module only when "System A" or "Standby System" is selected.
� In the case where the engineering tool accesses the CPU module in a redundant system via a module on an extension base unit, there are restrictions on the executable functions of the engineering tool depending on the connection destination settings. For details, refer to the following.
"Precautions for Communications with CPU Module in Redundant System via Module on Extension Base Unit" in the MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) � A timeout may occur while the systems are being switched. In this case, retry the access or use other communication
paths.

When a device communicates via a module on an extension base unit using SLMP
� Request destination module I/O numbers that can be specified differ depending on the command. ( SLMP Reference Manual)
� A timeout may occur while the systems are being switched. In this case, retry the access or use other communication paths.

When the FTP server function is used
When the FTP server function of the Ethernet interface module with built-in CC-Link IE mounted on an extension base unit is used, FTP commands that access the CPU module cannot be executed. If executed, an error occurs.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

Precautions for C Controller system configuration
Pay attention to the following when configuring a C Controller system by using a C Controller module.
When using MELSEC iQ-R series modules
The following describes the precautions when using MELSEC iQ-R series modules.
CC-Link IE Controller Network module
� The module cannot be used as a relay station for the interlink transmission function or the routing functions. To use either of those functions, use a CC-Link IE Controller Network module controlled by a programmable controller CPU as a relay station.
� An interrupt sequence program cannot be started. � The dynamic routing function cannot be used. � The IP packet transfer function using the Ethernet port of C Controller module are not available.
CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module
� The module cannot be used as a relay station for the interlink transmission function or the routing functions. To use either of those functions, use a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module controlled by a programmable controller CPU as a relay station.
� An interrupt sequence program cannot be started. � It cannot be used as a submaster station. � The dynamic routing function cannot be used. � The IP packet transfer function using the Ethernet port of C Controller module are not available. � The high-speed remote net of communication mode cannot be used.
CC-Link module
� An interrupt sequence program cannot be started. � The automatic CC-Link start function cannot be used. � The standby master function cannot be used. � The remote I/O net mode cannot be used. � The master station duplex function cannot be used. � The station-based block data assurance cannot be used.
Serial communication module
� Only the nonprocedural protocol can be used.
Ethernet interface module with built-in CC-Link IE
� The Ethernet function cannot be used.
When using MELSEC-Q series modules
The following describes the precautions when using MELSEC-Q series modules.
FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module
� The word block read/write request messages using the message transmission function cannot be received. � The auto refresh function cannot be used.
MELSECNET/H network module
� Remote I/O net cannot be used. � The module cannot be used as a relay station for the interlink data transmission function or the routing functions. To use
either of those functions, use a MELSECNET/H network module controlled by a programmable controller CPU as a relay station. � An interrupt sequence program cannot be started. � The network diagnostic function cannot be used. � The module cannot be used in the simple dual-structured system. � The debug mode cannot be set.

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

Precautions when using the recorder module, camera recorder

module, MES interface module (RD81MES96N), or C intelligent

function module (RD55UP12-V)

When configuring a system by using the recorder module/camera recorder module/MES interface module (RD81MES96N)/C

intelligent function module (RD55UP12-V) and any of the modules in the table below, select "Online" for the following item in "Module Parameter" of each module: "Basic Settings" "Various Operations Settings" "Mode Settings".

Module

Model

MES interface module

RD81MES96, RD81MES96N (firmware version "04" or earlier)

High speed data logger module

RD81DL96 (firmware version "08" or earlier)

OPC UA server module

RD81OPC96 (firmware version "04" or earlier)

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.5 Precautions for System Configuration

2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES

This chapter describes how to assign slot numbers, I/O numbers, CPU numbers, and control CPUs to modules. These assignments can be set by placing the same modules in the actual system on the "Module Configuration" window using the engineering tool. These assignments can also be set by reading system parameters or actual system configuration. ( GX Works3 Operating Manual) The following table lists the setting availability on the module configuration window or system parameters for each item.

Item
Base unit model Power supply module model Extension cable model Module model Module order Module I/O number ( Page 102 I/O Numbers of Modules) Module status setting ( Page 108 Module status setting) Number of points of an empty slot ( Page 107 I/O numbers of an empty slot) Control CPU ( Page 112 Control CPU) Number of slots on a base unit ( Page 100 Setting the number of slots) Number of points of a module

Module configuration window

System parameter

Set assignments either on the module configuration window or in the system parameters depending on the application. � Module configuration window: To use information unique to each module, such as the number of occupied
points, as it is � System parameter: To change the number of slots on a base unit or the number of occupied points of a
module

2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES

2.1 Slot Numbers on a Base Unit

Slot numbers are sequentially assigned starting from the slot on the right side of the CPU slot.

When extension base units are connected, slot numbers are assigned to the main base unit first, and successively to the

extension base units (1st level to 7th level).

An extension level needs to be set to the MELSEC-Q series extension base unit with the extension level setting connector pin.

( Page 150 Setting method with connector pin for extension level setting)

CPU 0

Slot number

9 10 11 12

If a module which occupies two slots is mounted, slot numbers for two modules are assigned.

2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.1 Slot Numbers on a Base Unit

Setting the number of slots
The number of slots for each base unit can be set within the range of 1 to 12. Set the number of slots for the following purposes. � To secure slots so that the base unit can be changed to the one having the different number of slots in the future � To keep the same number of slots even after the base unit used in the existing system is changed
[Navigation window] [System Parameter] [I/O Assignment] [Base/Power/Extension Cable Setting]
100 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.1 Slot Numbers on a Base Unit

When the number of set slots is more than the number of actual slots
Slots corresponding to the set number are occupied, where the slots exceeding the actual number are regarded as empty slots.

Ex.

When the number of slots is set to eight for the base unit with five slots, three slots are regarded as empty slots.

CPU 0

Empty slots

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

The number of points for empty slots can be changed on the "Module Configuration" window, or in "Setting of Points Occupied by Empty Slot" of the [I/O Assignment] tab on the "System Parameter" window. ( Page 107 I/O numbers of an empty slot)

When the number of set slots is less than the number of actual slots
Slots corresponding to the set number are occupied, where slots that are out of the set range are prohibited from mounting a
module, and the slot number is not assigned.

Ex. When the number of slots is set to five for the base unit with eight slots, three slots will be use-prohibited.

CPU 0

Mounting prohibited

9 10 11 12

101 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES
2.1 Slot Numbers on a Base Unit

2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules

An I/O number is a number (hexadecimal) assigned to I/O modules and intelligent function modules to communicate data with

the CPU module or remote head module. On/off data are classified into two types: input and output, and the symbol, "X" for

input, and "Y" for output, is added in front of the I/O number.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) Input modules (2) Output modules (3)Intelligent function module

X X Y Y X/Y 16 16 16 16 32 Number of
points 00 10 20 30 40 to to to to to I/O number 0F 1F 2F 3F 5F

Automatic setting of I/O numbers
I/O numbers are automatically assigned in sequential order. On the main base unit, the I/O number starts from 00H, which is given to the module on the right side of the CPU module or remote head module. On the extension base unit (1st level), the I/O number starts from the next number of the last I/O number on the main base unit. Each slot on the base unit occupies I/O numbers corresponding to the number of points of the module mounted.

CPU 0

16 16 16 16 16 Number of points
00 10 20 30 40 to to to to to I/O number 0F 1F 2F 3F 4F

9 10 11 12

16 16 16 16 32 32 16 16 50 60 70 80 90 B0 D0 E0 to to to to to to to to 5F 6F 7F 8F AF CF DF EF
Upon placing a module on the "Module Configuration" window, the I/O numbers are automatically assigned according to the number of occupied points of the module. Even though the mounting position of the module is changed, the I/O numbers once assigned remain unchanged.
102 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules

When the CPU module is the RnENCPU, the I/O numbers of the RnENCPU (network part) are automatically assigned as shown below.*1*2

CPU 0

32 Number of points 00 to I/O number 1F
*1 The RnENCPU (network part) occupies I/O numbers of 32 points. *2 When modules are already placed on the engineering tool, the I/O numbers of empty slots are assigned.
The mounted modules and their I/O numbers can be checked on the "System Monitor" window using the engineering tool. ( GX Works3 Operating Manual)

103 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules

Changing I/O numbers
Upon placing a module on the "Module Configuration" window, the I/O numbers are automatically assigned according to the number of occupied points of the module. The assigned I/O numbers, however, can be changed for each module. � To eliminate the need of modification due to an overlap of I/O numbers after the module is changed to a module having a
different number of occupied points � To reduce the program modifications when using an existing program by assigning modules according to the I/O numbers
that have already been used in the program
I/O numbers can be freely assigned beyond a boundary between the MELSEC iQ-R series and the MELSECQ series, being free from the restriction of assignment orders.
32 16 16 16 16 Number of points 00 40 30 80 C0 to to to to to I/O number 1F 4F 3F 8F CF
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 50 60 70 20 90 A0 B0 D0 to to to to to to to to 5F 6F 7F 2F 9F AF BF DF
104 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules

Precautions

� Set the same model as the one actually mounted.

� The CPU module or remote head module that is not set as actually mounted denies access.

� The number of I/O points of a module can be changed in "I/O Assignment Setting" of the [I/O Assignment] tab on the

"System Parameter" window.

� If the number of I/O points set in the parameters differs from that of the module actually mounted, the number of I/O points

will be as follows:

Setting

Operation

Remarks

The number of I/O points set in the parameters is less than that of the module actually mounted.
The number of I/O points set in the parameters is more than that of the module actually mounted.

The available number of points for the mounted I/O modules is reduced to the set number of points.
The number of I/O points exceeding the actual number of I/O points is not used in the mounted I/O modules and intelligent function modules.

Intelligent function modules do not permit the setting of a fewer number of I/O points.

� Set same modules as in the actual system on the "Module Configuration" window. Because the settings of the engineering tool control the module operation, a setting that is different from the actual configuration may result in unintended operation.
� When changing the default I/O numbers, setting the I/O numbers to all the modules is recommended. I/O numbers of a module that is not set in the engineering tool are assigned following the I/O numbers of the module already set, which may cause an overlap of I/O numbers.

Ex.

I/O numbers overlap as a result of setting the I/O numbers up to the module on slot No.4.

� I/O numbers set by using the engineering tool

Set the start I/O number 40 to the module on slot

No.3, and 30 to the module on slot No.4.

105 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules

� I/O numbers in the actual system

CPU 0

16 16 16 16 16 Number of points
00 10 20 40 30 to to to to to I/O number 0F 1F 2F 4F 3F

9 10 11 12

16
40 to 4F

I/O numbers of the module on slot No.5, which is not set in the engineering tool, are assigned following the I/O numbers of the module on slot No.4. This results in an overlap of I/O numbers.
Set the I/O numbers of the module on slot No.5 in the parameter so that they do not overlap.

� To set the module reserved for future use, or when an already set module is not to be mounted, perform the module status setting. ( Page 108 Module status setting)

106 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules

I/O numbers of an empty slot

An empty slot is a slot where a module is not mounted, and occupies 16 points by default.

I/O numbers and the number of points can be set to empty slots for future use.

The number of I/O points can be changed for all empty slots at once by selecting the CPU module or remote head module on

the "Module Configuration" window as shown below.

107 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules

Module status setting

The module status setting makes it possible to set the module status such as reserved status and disabled status, interpreting

a configured module in the engineering tool as an empty slot.

The following table summarizes the application of the module status setting.

Status

Application

Reserved status Disabled status

� To operate the system allocating a module on the "Module Configuration" window on the engineering tool, but actually not mounting the module
� To reserve the I/O numbers of a module for future use
� To disable operation of an actually mounted module

The change of the parameter settings is not reflected in the module where the module status setting has been performed. In addition, the following operations have no effect on the module where the module status setting has been performed: � Setting a remote password � Executing a program that accesses the set target module Set the module status as shown below. ( GX Works3 Operating Manual)

Ex.

To operate the system allocating a module on the "Module Configuration" window on the engineering tool, but actually not

mounting the module
� Module configuration window

When the module status is set, the set target module is high-lighted, and regarded as an empty slot.

� Actual system

Empty

Writing the module configuration to the programmable controllers allows operation even without mounting modules actually.

108 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules

Assigning I/O numbers in the slave station
Network systems such as CC-Link IE Field Network can be controlled by assigning input "X" and output "Y", which are in the device of the CPU module, to the I/O modules and intelligent function modules in the slave station.

Ex. Controlling a module connected to the head module on CC-Link IE Field Network

(1) Master station

(2) Slave station

(3) Head module

(1)

16 16 16 16 20 30 40 50 to to to to 2F 3F 4F 5F
CC-Link IE Field Network

(2)

16 16
(3) 1000 1010
to to 100F 101F

Available I/O numbers
In the slave station, assign the I/O numbers following the I/O numbers assigned to the modules in the master station.
Precautions
� The same I/O numbers cannot be used for the refresh destination (device on the CPU module side) on CC-Link IE Field Network and for the CC-Link remote station.
� If there is a possibility of connecting more I/O modules and intelligent function modules to the CPU module, reserve I/O numbers for modules to be added.

X/Y0
� X/Y3FF X/Y400
� X/YFFF X/Y1000

Input/output (X/Y)
For a CC-Link IE Field Network slave station

I/O numbers used for an I/O module or intelligent function module
For the future extension

Empty

For a CC-Link remote station �

I/O numbers that can be used for a slave station

X/Y2FFF

109 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.2 I/O Numbers of Modules

2.3 CPU Numbers
CPU numbers refer to the numbers for identifying the CPU modules on the multiple CPU system or the remote head modules on the redundant system.*1
*1 For details on the redundant system configuration of remote head modules, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module User's Manual (Application)
The CPU module mounted on the CPU slot in the base unit is CPU No.1. CPU No.2, CPU No.3, and CPU No.4 are sequentially assigned starting from the module on the right side of CPU No.1.
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 Slot number

CPU number

The multiple CPU system configuration requires the specification of mounted CPU modules, so that the I/O numbers are

assigned to the CPU modules as well. The following table lists the start I/O numbers assigned to each CPU module.

CPU number

Start I/O number of CPU module

CPU No.1

3E00H

CPU No.2

3E10H

CPU No.3

3E20H

CPU No.4

3E30H

110 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.3 CPU Numbers

Reservation setting of the CPU module

The reservation setting of the CPU modules excluding CPU No.1 is possible to reserve CPU numbers for the CPU modules to be mounted in the future. ( Page 108 Module status setting)

However, if an actually mounted CPU module is set to the disabled status, the module is not to be regarded as an empty slot.

� Module configuration window

Perform the module reservation setting on the CPU module at slot number 1.

� Actual system

A reserved CPU number of the CPU module is assigned even though the CPU module is not mounted actually.

The CPU module can be mounted on the CPU slot and the slot number 0 to 6, where the opening slot between CPU modules can be reserved as an empty slot. I/O modules and intelligent function modules, however, cannot be mounted on the opening slot between CPU modules.

CPU number

111 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.3 CPU Numbers

2.4 Control CPU
The control CPU refers to the CPU module that controls I/O modules and intelligent function modules. In a multiple CPU system, a control CPU must be set for each module. If the control CPU is not set, CPU No.1 controls all the modules.
CPU module 123411234
Set the control CPU for each module in the "Module Configuration" window.
112 2 ASSIGNMENT FOR MODULES 2.4 Control CPU

3 PART NAMES

3.1 Power Supply Module
This section describes the part names of the power supply module. (The R62P is used as an example.)

(1)

(2) (8)
(3)
(6) (4)
(9)
(5)

(7)

No. Name

Description

(1)

POWER LED

(2)

ERR contact*3

(3)

FG terminal*1

(4)

LG terminal*1

Indicates the operating status of the power supply module. On: Normal operation Off: Power-off, power failure, or hardware failure ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))
When mounting the module on the main base unit The contact turns on when the entire system operates normally. (M4 screw) This contact turns off (opens) in the following cases: � When the power supply module fails � When the power is not supplied � When a stop error (including reset) occurs in the CPU module � When the fuse is blown In a multiple CPU system, the contact turns off when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules. When the remote head module is mounted, this contact turns off when moderate or major error (including reset) occurs. When mounting the module on the extension base unit The contact is off at all times. When the module is mounted on a redundant power supply extension base unit, the following operation is performed: � The contact turns on when the power supply module operates normally. (M4 screw) � This contact turns off (opens) when the power supply module fails, the power is not supplied, or the fuse is blown.
A functional ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board (M4 screw)
A functional ground terminal for the power supply input filter. For AC input, the terminal has one-half the potential of the input voltage. (M4 screw)

(5)

Power input terminal

A power input terminal for the power supply module. The power supply to be connected differs depending on a power supply module. (M4 screw) ( Page 120 Performance Specifications of Power Supply Module)

(6)

Terminal cover

A protective cover for the terminal block

(7) (8)*2

Production information marking
+24V terminal and 24G terminal

Shows the production information (16 digits) of the module.
Used for a device that requires a supply of 24VDC. (M3.5 screw) The power is supplied to a device through the external wiring.

(9)

Electric shock warning

A warning symbol to warn of the risk of electric shock when the users touch the exposed current-carrying parts

*1 Individually ground the FG and LG terminals with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less. *2 Only the R62P has these terminals. *3 Place the cables for the ERR contact output in the control panel and keep the length to 30m or less.

113 3 PART NAMES
3.1 Power Supply Module

3.2 Base Unit

Main base unit

This section describes the part names of the main base unit. (The R312B is used as an example.)

(1) (2) (5) (9)

(4)

(8) (6)

(3)

(7)

No. Name

Description

(1)

Extension cable connector (OUT) A connector for connecting to an extension base unit. A MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable is connected here.

When no cable is connected, attach the supplied extension connector cover to prevent entry of foreign matter

such as dust.

(2)

Extension connector cover

A protective cover for the extension cable connector

(3)

Module connector

A connector for mounting MELSEC iQ-R series modules. Attach a blank cover module (RG60) to a connector where no module is mounted to prevent entry of foreign matter such as dust.

(4)

Module fixing hole

A screw hole to fix a module to the base unit (M312 screw)

(5)

Base unit installation hole

A hole to install a base unit to a control panel (M4 screw)

(6)

DIN rail adapter mounting hole A hole to mount a DIN rail adapter

(7)

Guide

A guide to mount a module to the base unit

(8)

Production information marking Shows the production information (16 digits) of the module.

(9)

10m mark

Indicates that the base unit supports the ten-meter extension cable (RC100B).

For the redundant power supply main base unit, the power supply module mounted on the left power supply slot is POWER 1,

and the power supply module mounted on the right power supply slot is POWER 2. This number is used to recognize the redundant power supply module when the special relay or special register is used.

114 3 PART NAMES 3.2 Base Unit

Extension base unit
This section describes the part names of the extension base unit. (The R612B is used as an example.)
(10) (3) (6) (10) (2) (5)
(1)
3
(9)

(4)

(8)

(7)

No. Name

Description

(1)

Extension cable connector (IN)

A connector for connecting to a base unit (upper level). A MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable is connected here.

(2)

Extension cable connector (OUT)

A connector for connecting to a base unit (lower level). A MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable is connected here. When no cable is connected, attach the supplied extension connector cover to prevent entry of foreign matter such as dust.

(3)

Extension connector cover

A protective cover for the extension cable connector

(4)

Module connector

A connector for mounting MELSEC iQ-R series modules. The CPU module and remote head module cannot be mounted on an extension base unit. Attach a blank cover module (RG60) to a connector where no module is mounted to prevent entry of foreign matter such as dust.

(5)

Module fixing hole

A screw hole to fix a module to the base unit (M312 screw)

(6)

Base unit installation hole

A hole to install a base unit to a control panel (M4 screw)

(7)

DIN rail adapter mounting hole

A hole to mount a DIN rail adapter

(8)

Guide

A guide to mount a module to the base unit

(9)

Production information marking

Shows the production information (16 digits) of the module.

(10) 10m mark

Indicates that the base unit supports the ten-meter extension cable (RC100B).

For the redundant power supply extension base unit, the power supply module mounted on the left power supply slot is POWER 1, and the power supply module mounted on the right power supply slot is POWER 2. This number is used to recognize the redundant power supply module when the special relay or special register is used.

115 3 PART NAMES 3.2 Base Unit

Redundant extension base unit

This section describes the part names of the redundant extension base unit. (The R68WRB is used as an example.)

(3) (6) (11) (12) (10)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(9)

(7)

(4)

(8)

No. Name

Description

(1) Extension cable connector (IN1/IN2)

A connector for connecting to a MELSEC iQ-R series base unit (upper level). A MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable is connected here. ( Page 148 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit)

(2) Extension cable connector (OUT1/OUT2) A connector for connecting to a MELSEC iQ-R series extension base unit (lower level). A MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable is connected here. ( Page 148 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit) When no cable is connected, attach the supplied extension connector cover to prevent entry of foreign matter such as dust.

(3) Extension connector cover

A protective cover for the extension cable connector

(4) Module connector

A connector for mounting a redundant power supply module, an I/O module, and an intelligent function module. The CPU module cannot be mounted on an extension base unit. Attach a blank cover module (RG60) to a connector where no module is mounted to prevent entry of foreign matter such as dust.

(5) Module fixing hole

A screw hole to fix a module to the base unit (M312 screw)

(6) Base unit installation hole

A hole to install a base unit to a control panel (M4 screw)

(7) DIN rail adapter mounting hole

A hole to mount a DIN rail adapter

(8) Guide

A guide to mount a module to the base unit

(9) Production information marking

Shows the production information (16 digits) of the module.

(10) 10m mark

Indicates that the base unit supports the ten-meter extension cable (RC100B).

(11) LED

CONNECT

Indicates whether the extension cable between the redundant extension base unit (OUT1/OUT2) and the base unit of the next level is connected properly. � On (green): Connected properly � Off: Not connected, extension cable error, or connected improperly

(12)

ACTIVE

Indicates whether the extension cable connected to OUT1/OUT2 is active (being used).

� On (green): Active

� Off: Inactive

For the redundant extension base unit, the power supply module mounted on the left power supply slot is POWER 1, and the power supply module mounted on the right power supply slot is POWER 2. This number is used to recognize the redundant

power supply module when the special relay or special register is used.

116 3 PART NAMES 3.2 Base Unit

RQ extension base unit (for MELSEC-Q series modules)

This section describes the part names of the extension base unit. (The RQ612B is used as an example.)

(9) (3) (6) (2)

(5)

(1)
3
(8)

(4) (7)

No. Name

(1)

Extension cable connector (IN)

(2)

Extension cable connector (OUT)

(3)

Extension connector cover

(4)

Module connector

(5)

Module fixing hole

(6)

Base unit installation hole

(7)

DIN rail adapter mounting hole

(8)

Production information marking

(9)

10m mark

Description
A connector for connecting to a MELSEC iQ-R series base unit (upper level). A MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable is connected here.
A connector for connecting to a MELSEC-Q series base unit (lower level). A MELSEC-Q series extension cable is connected here. When no cable is connected, attach the supplied extension connector cover to prevent entry of foreign matter such as dust.
A protective cover for the extension cable connector
A connector for mounting MELSEC-Q series modules. The CPU module cannot be mounted on an extension base unit. Attach a blank cover module (QG60) to a connector where no module is mounted to prevent entry of foreign matter such as dust. A screw hole to fix a module to the base unit (M312 screw)
A hole to install a base unit to a control panel (M4 screw)
A hole to mount a DIN rail adapter
Shows the production information (16 digits) of the module.
Indicates that the base unit supports the ten-meter extension cable (RC100B).

117 3 PART NAMES 3.2 Base Unit

3.3 SD Memory Card
This section describes the part names of the SD memory card. (The NZ1MEM-16GBSD is used as an example.)
(1)

No. Name

(1)

Write protect switch

Description Prevents the data in the card from being erased or modified by setting this switch to the LOCK position.

118 3 PART NAMES 3.3 SD Memory Card

4 SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 General Specifications

This chapter describes the general specifications of the modules used.

Item

Specifications

Operating ambient temperature Storage ambient temperature Operating ambient humidity Storage ambient humidity Vibration resistance
Shock resistance Operating atmosphere Operating altitude*1

0 to 55 (When an extended temperature range base unit is not used)

0 to 60*6 (When an extended temperature range base unit is used)

-25 to 75

5 to 95%RH, non-condensing

Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2

Under intermittent vibration

Frequency
5 to 8.4Hz 8.4 to 150Hz

Constant acceleration 9.8m/

Half amplitude Sweep count

3.5mm

10 times each in X, Y, and Z directions

Under continuous vibration

5 to 8.4Hz 8.4 to 150Hz

4.9m/

1.75mm

Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147m/, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z bidirections)

No corrosive gases*4, flammable gases, less conductive dust

0 to 2000m*5

Installation location Overvoltage category*2 Pollution degree*3

Inside a control panel or less 2 or less

*1 Do not use or store the programmable controller under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m. Doing so may cause malfunction. When using the programmable controller under pressure, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
*2 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises. Category applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V.
*3 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used. Pollution degree 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally.
*4 Use the special coated products which comply with the IEC 60721-3-3 3C2 in the environment with the corrosive gases. For details on the special coated products, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
*5 When the programmable controller is used at altitude above 2000m, the withstand voltage performance and the upper limit of the operating ambient temperature decrease. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
*6 All modules mounted on the extended temperature range base unit provide the same performance as that for an operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55, even though they are used in an operating ambient temperature of 0 to 60. When using the modules in the environment of the temperature exceeding 60, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

119 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 General Specifications

4.2 Performance Specifications of Power Supply
Module

This section describes the performance specifications of the power supply module.

Item

AC input power supply module

DC input power supply module

R61P

R62P

R64P

R64RP

R63P

R63RP

Input power supply voltage
Input frequency Input voltage distortion factor Maximum input apparent power Maximum input power

100 to 240VAC (85 to 264VAC) 50/60Hz5% Within 5% 130VA

120VA

160VA

24VDC (15.6 to 31.2VDC)
50W

24VDC (19.2 to 31.2VDC)

Inrush current

20A, 8ms or less

100A, 1ms or less (24VDC input)

Rated output current 5VDC

6.5A

3.5A

24VDC

0.6A

6.5A

Overcurrent protection

5VDC 24VDC

7.1A or higher

3.8A or higher 0.66A or higher

10.0A or higher

7.1A or higher

Overvoltage protection

5VDC

5.5 to 6.5V

Efficiency
Allowable momentary power failure time

76% or more Within 20ms

70% or more Within 10ms (24VDC input)*1

Withstand voltage

2300VACrms per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m), Between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output"

510VAC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000m), between primary terminal and 5VDC terminal

Insulation resistance

10M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester (between the combined "line input/LG terminals" and the "FG terminal and output", the line input and LG terminals, the output and FG terminals)

Noise immunity

� Noise voltage 1500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (noise simulator condition)
� Noise immunity test IEC 61000-4-4: 2kV

Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1s, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (noise simulator condition)

Fuse

Built-in (user-unchangeable)

Contact output section

Application
Rated switching voltage/current

ERR contact 24VDC, 0.5A

Minimum

5VDC, 1mA

switching load

Response time Offon: 10ms or less Onoff: 12ms or less

Life

Mechanical: 20 million times or more

Electrical: Rated switching voltage/current, 100 thousand times or more

Surge suppressor

None

Fuse

None

Terminal screw size Applicable wire size

M4 (M3.5 for +24V and 24G terminals of the R62P) 0.75 to 2

Applicable solderless terminal

RAV1.25-4, RAV2-4, thickness of 0.8mm or less, up to two solderless terminal connections per terminal (for the +24V and 24G terminals of the R62P: RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5, thickness of 0.8mm or less, up to two solderless terminal connections per terminal)

Applicable tightening torque

M4 screw: 1.02 to 1.38Nm M3.5 screw: 0.66 to 0.89Nm

External dimensions Height

106mm (Base unit mounting side: 98mm)

Width

54.6mm

Depth

110mm

Weight

0.41kg

0.45kg

0.46kg

0.41kg

*1 It will be shorter than 10ms if the input voltage is lower than 24VDC.

120 4 SPECIFICATIONS 4.2 Performance Specifications of Power Supply Module

Detailed explanation of items

Input power supply voltage
Input power supply voltage is a voltage required for the power supply module to operate normally. If the voltage is out of the specified range, an error is detected and the system may stop.

Inrush current

Inrush current is the maximum, instantaneous input current drawn into the circuits immediately after power-on.

If power is supplied to the system immediately after shut-off, an inrush current of more than the specified value may flow.

Wait for five seconds or more after shut-off, and supply power to the system again.

When selecting a fuse or a breaker for the external circuit, consider blowouts, sensing property, and specified value of inrush

current.

Overcurrent protection

The function of this protection is to shut off the circuit to stop the system if a current exceeding the specification value flows

into a circuit of 5VDC or 24VDC.

With overcurrent protection activated, the LED of the power supply module goes off or lights dim green due to a voltage drop.

To restart the system, shut off the power and eliminate the cause of the problem, such as insufficient current or short-circuit.

After the cause is eliminated, wait for a few minutes, and supply power to the system again. When the output current is back

to normal, the system starts initially.

Overvoltage protection
The function of this protection is to shut off the circuit to stop the system if an overvoltage exceeding the specified value is applied to a 5VDC circuit. With overvoltage protection activated, the POWER LED of the power supply module turns off. To restart the system, shut off the power, wait for a few minutes, and supply power to the system again. Then, the system starts initially. If the system does not restart and the POWER LED remains off, replace the power supply module.

Allowable momentary power failure time
The system detects an input voltage down and stops its operation when a momentary power failure occurs. Allowable momentary power failure time is a period of time that the system can continue its operation even after the power failure. If power fails exceeding this period of time, the system can either continue its operation or start initially, depending on the load of the power supply module. When the system continues its operation, the operation will be the same as that of the system returned within the allowable momentary power failure time.

121 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.2 Performance Specifications of Power Supply Module

Selecting the power supply module
The power supply module should be selected in accordance with the total current consumption of the power supply target base unit and each module. Select the power supply module so that the current consumption of the base unit does not exceed the rated output current of the power supply module mounted on the base unit. For the internal current consumption (5VDC) of the base unit and CPU module, refer to the following. � Base unit ( Page 123 Performance Specifications of Base Unit) � CPU module ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Startup)) For the internal current consumption (5VDC) of each module, refer to the manual for the module used. For devices obtained by a user, such as an external power supply (24VDC) and breaker, refer to the manual for the device used.
When a redundant power supply system is configured
If one redundant power supply module failed, only the other redundant power supply module continues the operation. Therefore, keep the current consumption of the redundant power supply base unit within the rated output current for one redundant power supply module. When the R64RP and the R63RP are used in a redundant power supply system, adapt the smaller rated output current value in the system. While the rated output current of the R64RP is 9.0A, the rated output current of the R63RP is 6.5A. Therefore, keep the current consumption less than 6.5A.
When MELSEC-Q series modules are connected
Select the power supply module so that the current consumption of each extension base unit does not exceed the rated output current of the power supply module mounted on each extension base unit. When the extension base unit (type requiring no power supply module) (Q5B) is used, power is supplied from the power supply module mounted on the RQ extension base unit. Select the power supply module so that the total current consumption of the modules on the RQ extension base unit and the Q5B does not exceed the rated output current of the power supply module mounted on the RQ extension base unit. ( Page 88 Consideration for internal current consumption)
The current consumption can be checked in "Power Supply Capacity and I/O Points" of the engineering tool.
122 4 SPECIFICATIONS 4.2 Performance Specifications of Power Supply Module

4.3 Performance Specifications of Base Unit

This section describes the performance specifications of the base unit.
Main base unit

Item

R33B

R35B

R38B

R312B

Number of mountable I/O modules

DIN rail adapter model

R6DIN1

Internal current consumption (5VDC) 0.46A

0.58A

0.71A

0.88A

Mounting hole size

M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)

External

Height

101mm

dimensions

Width

189mm

245mm

328mm

439mm

Depth

32.5mm

Weight

0.31kg

0.41kg

0.55kg

0.72kg

Extended temperature range main base unit

Item

Number of mountable I/O modules

DIN rail adapter model

Internal current consumption (5VDC)

Mounting hole size

External dimensions

Height Width

Depth

Weight

R310B-HT 10 R6DIN1 0.82A M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 101mm 439mm 32.5mm 0.69kg

Redundant power supply main base unit

Item

Number of mountable I/O modules

DIN rail adapter model

Internal current consumption (5VDC)

Mounting hole size

External dimensions

Height Width

Depth

Weight

R310RB 10 R6DIN1 0.91A M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 101mm 439mm 32.5mm 0.73kg

Extended temperature range redundant power supply main base unit

Item

Number of mountable I/O modules

DIN rail adapter model

Internal current consumption (5VDC)

Mounting hole size

External dimensions

Height Width

Depth

Weight

R38RB-HT 8 R6DIN1 0.86A M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 101mm 439mm 32.5mm 0.72kg

123 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.3 Performance Specifications of Base Unit

Extension base unit

Item Number of mountable I/O modules DIN rail adapter model Internal current consumption (5VDC) Mounting hole size External dimensions Height
Width Depth Weight

R65B 5

R68B 8

R6DIN1 0.70A

0.81A

M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)

101mm

245mm

328mm

32.5mm

0.41kg

0.55kg

R612B 12 0.92A
439mm 0.73kg

Extended temperature range extension base unit

Item Number of mountable I/O modules DIN rail adapter model Internal current consumption (5VDC) Mounting hole size External dimensions Height
Width Depth Weight

R610B-HT 10
R6DIN1 0.85A
M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 101mm 439mm 32.5mm 0.72kg

Redundant power supply extension base unit

Item Number of mountable I/O modules DIN rail adapter model Internal current consumption (5VDC) Mounting hole size External dimensions Height
Width Depth Weight

R610RB 10
R6DIN1 0.97A
M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 101mm 439mm 32.5mm 0.73kg

Extended temperature range redundant power supply extension base unit

Item Number of mountable I/O modules DIN rail adapter model Internal current consumption (5VDC) Mounting hole size External dimensions Height
Width Depth Weight

R68RB-HT 8
R6DIN1 0.93A
M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 101mm 439mm 32.5mm 0.72kg

124 4 SPECIFICATIONS 4.3 Performance Specifications of Base Unit

Redundant extension base unit

Item

R68WRB

Number of mountable I/O

modules

DIN rail adapter model

R6DIN1

Internal current consumption (5VDC)

1.50A

Mounting hole size

M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)

External dimensions Height

101mm

Width

439mm

Depth

32.5mm

Weight

0.76kg

Extended temperature range redundant extension base unit

Item Number of mountable I/O modules DIN rail adapter model Internal current consumption (5VDC) Mounting hole size External dimensions Height
Width Depth Weight

R66WRB-HT 6
R6DIN1 1.35A
M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw) 101mm 439mm 32.5mm 0.76kg

Extension cable
Item Length Weight

RC06B 0.6m 0.15kg

RC12B 1.2m 0.21kg

RC30B 3.0m 0.40kg

RC50B 5.0m 0.60kg

RC100B 10.0m 1.12kg

The ten-meter extension cable (RC100B) can be used only with a base unit having the 10m mark on it.
Check that the 10m mark is printed on the extension connector cover of the base unit to be connected before using the ten-meter extension cable. ( Page 114 Base Unit).

RQ extension base unit (for MELSEC-Q series modules)

Item

RQ65B

RQ68B

Number of mountable I/O modules DIN rail adapter model Internal current consumption (5VDC) Mounting hole size External dimensions Height
Width Depth Weight

Q6DIN2 0.28A

Q6DIN1 0.31A

M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)

98mm

245mm

328mm

44.1mm

0.32kg

0.41kg

For the specifications of MELSEC-Q series extension cables, refer to the following. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

RQ612B 12 0.32A
439mm 0.55kg

125 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.3 Performance Specifications of Base Unit

4.4 Performance Specifications of SD Memory Card

This section describes the performance specifications of the SD memory card.
When using an SD memory card in a C Controller module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Startup)

Item

NZ1MEM-2GBSD NZ1MEM-4GBSD

Type

SDHC

Capacity

2G bytes

4G bytes

Number of writes

60000 times

100000 times

External dimensions

Height

32mm

Width

24mm

Depth

2.1mm

Weight

NZ1MEM-8GBSD 8G bytes

NZ1MEM-16GBSD 16G bytes

For the performance specifications of the L1MEM-2GBSD and L1MEM-4GBSD, refer to the following. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

Handling precautions
� The operation of the SD memory cards manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric (NZ1MEM-GBSD) has been tested on the MELSEC iQ-R series modules. If an SD memory card*1 manufactured by other companies is used, a problem, such as damage to data in the SD memory card and system operation stop, may occur.
� SD memory cards manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric conform to IEC 61131-2 when being used in a module. � SDHC memory cards can be used only with CPU modules that are compatible with them. (An SDHC logo is shown on the
module or the support is described in the manual.) Note that SDHC memory cards cannot be used with the CPU modules that are compatible with SD only. � All SD memory cards to be used in the CPU module need to be formatted. SD memory cards manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric are already formatted at the factory. When using other SD memory cards that are not formatted, format the cards before use. � Use the engineering tool to format SD memory cards. (Do not use a personal computer.) ( GX Works3 Operating Manual) � Data in the SD memory card may corrupt if the following operation is performed while the SD memory card is being accessed: powering off the system, resetting the CPU module, or removing the SD memory card. When the CARD ACCESS LED is on, terminate the access to the SD memory card with the SD CARD OFF button, and then power off the system, reset the CPU module, or remove the SD memory card. The use of the SD memory card can be disabled by SM606 (SD memory card forced disable instruction) and the disabled status can be checked by SM607 (SD memory card forced disable status flag). � Regularly backup important data on other media, such as CDs and DVDs.
*1 If commercially available SD memory cards are used, operation under the environment described in Page 119 General Specifications is not guaranteed. Ensure that such SD memory cards will not cause system control problems.

126 4 SPECIFICATIONS 4.4 Performance Specifications of SD Memory Card

Precautions

If the system is powered off, the CPU module is reset, or the SD memory card is removed while the SD memory card is being

accessed as below, data in the SD memory card may corrupt.

� Data in the buffer memory is being saved to the SD memory card. (Data logging function is being executed.)

� During the folder delete by "User Data Operation" in the engineering tool

In the above case, the SD memory card diagnostics such as the file system check and restoration) is performed at powering

off the system or the reset clear.

Note that the data may be not restored because of the file system status.

The following time is required to diagnose the SD memory card (assuming that 10000 files (100K bytes) are stored in the SD

memory card and file system fragmentation has not occurred).*1*2

� NZ1MEM-2GBSD: approximately 7 seconds, NZ1MEM-4GBSD: approximately 8 seconds, NZ1MEM-8GBSD:

approximately 9 seconds, NZ1MEM-16GBSD: approximately 10 seconds

*1 The more number of files are or the more files are fragmented in the SD memory card, the more time is required for diagnostics, and it may take several minutes in some cases.
*2 When the CPU module is in connection with an external device, running the CPU module and the external device simultaneously can cause communication time-out on the external device side.

127 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.4 Performance Specifications of SD Memory Card

4.5 Performance Specifications of Battery

This section describes the performance specifications of the battery used for the CPU module.

Item

Q6BAT

Q7BATN*1

Q7BAT*1

Type

Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery

Initial voltage

3.0V

Nominal current

1800mAh

6000mAh

5000mAh

Battery life when not used Lithium content

Approximately 5 years (room temperature)

0.57g*2

1.80g

1.55g

*1 The Q7BATN-SET and Q7BAT-SET include a battery holder. Note that the battery holder for the Q7BAT cannot be used for the Q7BATN.
*2 The lithium content of batteries manufactured in July 2017 or earlier differs. For details, refer to the following. Changes in battery parts (FA-A-0242)
For the FX3U-32BL, refer to the following. FX3U-32BL Battery

Application

A battery is used as the backup power for the device/label for which the latches are enabled and clock data. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Battery life

There are two types of values for describing a battery life: actual service value and guaranteed value. � Actual service value: Refers to the battery life estimated based on the value actually measured by Mitsubishi under a
storage ambient temperature of 40 This value varies depending on the characteristics and variation of the components, and should be referred to as a reference value. � Guaranteed value: Refers to the battery life at 70 guaranteed by Mitsubishi in a storage ambient temperature of 70 based on the characteristics of the memory device provided by the component manufacturer

Q6BAT, Q7BATN, Q7BAT

When used in a programmable controller CPU (except for the R00CPU, R01CPU, or R02CPU)
The actual service values and guaranteed values are as follows:
� Actual service value (reference value)

Extended SRAM cassette

Power-on
time ratio*1

Actual service value when used in the R04CPU or R04ENCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Actual service value when used in the R08CPU, R08ENCPU, R16CPU, R16ENCPU, R32CPU, R32ENCPU, R120CPU, or R120ENCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Not used, used (1MB type), used (2MB type), used (4MB type), used (8MB type)
Used (16MB type)*2

0 to 100% 0%

43800 hours (5.00 years)
30100 hours (3.43 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)
25500 hours (2.91 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

30%

43000 hours (4.90 years)

36400 hours (4.15 years)

50 to 100% 43800 hours (5.00 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

128 4 SPECIFICATIONS 4.5 Performance Specifications of Battery

� Guaranteed value

Extended SRAM cassette

Power-on
time ratio*1

Guaranteed value when used in the R04CPU or R04ENCPU

Guaranteed value when used in the R08CPU, R08ENCPU, R16CPU, R16ENCPU, R32CPU, R32ENCPU, R120CPU, or R120ENCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Not used

31700 hours

43800 hours

30600 hours

43800 hours

(3.61 years)

(5.00 years)

(3.49 years)

(5.00 years)

30%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

43700 hours (4.98 years)

50 to 100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (1MB type)

22000 hours

21500 hours

(2.51 years)

(2.45 years)

30%

31400 hours

30700 hours

(3.58 years)

(3.50 years)

50%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

43000 hours (4.90 years)

70 to 100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (2MB type)

19600 hours (2.23 years)

19100 hours (2.18 years)

43100 hours (4.92 years)

30%

28000 hours (3.19 years)

27200 hours (3.10 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

50%

39200 hours (4.47 years)

38200 hours (4.36 years)

70 to 100% 43800 hours (5.00 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (4MB type)

15300 hours (1.74 years)

40550 hours (4.63 years)

39600 hours (4.52 years)

15000 hours (1.71 years)

39640 hours (4.53 years)

36200 hours (4.13 years)

30%

21800 hours (2.48 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

21400 hours (2.44 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

50%

30600 hours (3.49 years)

30000 hours (3.42 years)

70 to 100% 43800 hours (5.00 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (8MB type)

10100 hours (1.15 years)

29822 hours (3.40 years)

26900 hours (3.07 years)

10000 hours (1.14 years)

29591 hours (3.38 years)

24800 hours (2.83 years)

30%

14400 hours (1.64 years)

42604 hours (4.86 years)

38400 hours (4.38 years)

14200 hours (1.62 years)

42272 hours (4.83 years)

35400 hours (4.04 years)

50%

20200 hours (2.30 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

20000 hours (2.28 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

70%

33600 hours (3.83 years)

33300 hours (3.80 years)

100% Used (16MB type)*2 0%

43800 hours (5.00 years)
6400 hours (0.73 years)

18853 hours (2.15 years)

16100 hours (1.83 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)
6400 hours (0.73 years)

18861 hours (2.15 years)

16000 hours (1.82 years)

30%

9100 hours (1.03 26933 hours

years)

(3.07 years)

23000 hours (2.62 years)

9100 hours (1.03 26945 hours

years)

(3.08 years)

22800 hours (2.62 years)

50%

12800 hours (1.46 years)

37706 hours (4.30 years)

32200 hours (3.67 years)

12800 hours (1.46 years)

37722 hours (4.31 years)

32000 hours (3.65 years)

70%

21300 hours (2.43 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

21300 hours (2.43 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

*1 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of the programmable controller power-on time to 24 hours. (If the total power-on time is 12
hours, the ratio will be 50%. If the total power-on time is 6 hours, the ratio will be 25%.) *2 Check the versions of the CPU module and engineering tool used. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

129 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.5 Performance Specifications of Battery

When used in a Process CPU
The actual service values and guaranteed values are as follows: � Actual service value (reference value)

Extended SRAM cassette

Power-on
time ratio*1

Actual service value when used in the R08PCPU or R16PCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Not used

0 to 100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (ECC-compatible 2MB type)

0%
30% 50%

43300 hours (4.94 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

70%

100%

Used (ECC-compatible 8MB type)

0% 30%

24000 hours (2.73 years)
34200 hours (3.90 years)

50 to 100% 43800 hours (5.00 years)

Actual service value when used in the R32PCPU or R120PCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

43800 hours (5.00 years)

40200 hours (4.58 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

23000 hours (2.62 years)
32800 hours (3.74 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

� Guaranteed value

Extended SRAM cassette

Power-on
time ratio*1

Guaranteed value when used in the R08PCPU or R16PCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Not used

24400 hours

43800 hours

(2.78 years)

(5.00 years)

30%

34800 hours (3.97 years)

50%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

70 to 100%

Used (ECC-compatible 2MB type)

0% 30% 50% 70% 100%

13300 hours (1.51 years)
19000 hours (2.16 years)
26600 hours (3.03 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

33300 hours (3.80 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (ECC-compatible 8MB type)

0% 30% 50% 70% 100%

6100 hours (0.69 years)
8700 hours (0.99 years)
12200 hours (1.39 years)
20300 hours (2.31 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

18462 hours (2.11 years)
26374 hours (3.01 years)
36923 hours (4.21 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

15100 hours (1.72 years)
21500 hours (2.45 years)
30200 hours (3.44 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

Guaranteed value when used in the R32PCPU or R120PCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

17300 hours (1.97 years)

42083 hours (4.80 years)

39900 hours (4.55 years)

24700 hours (2.81 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

34600 hours (3.94 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

10800 hours (1.23 years)

37600 hours (4.29 years)

27000 hours (3.08 years)

15400 hours (1.75 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

38500 hours (4.39 years)

21600 hours (2.46 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

36000 hours (4.10 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

5500 hours (0.62 16835 hours

years)

(1.92 years)

13700 hours (1.56 years)

7800 hours (0.89 24051 hours

years)

(2.75 years)

19500 hours (2.22 years)

11000 hours (1.25 years)

33671 hours (3.84 years)

27400 hours (3.12 years)

18300 hours (2.08 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

130 4 SPECIFICATIONS 4.5 Performance Specifications of Battery

When used in a SIL2 Process CPU
The actual service values and guaranteed values are as follows: � Actual service value (reference value)

Extended SRAM cassette

Power-on
time ratio*1

Actual service value when used in the R08PSFCPU or R16PSFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Actual service value when used in the R32PSFCPU or R120PSFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Not used

0 to 100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used

43300 hours

40200 hours

(ECC-compatible 2MB type)*2

30%

(4.94 years) 43800 hours

(4.58 years) 43800 hours

50% 70%

(5.00 years)

100%

Used (ECC-compatible 8MB type)

0% 30%

24000 hours (2.73 years)
34200 hours (3.90 years)

23000 hours (2.62 years)
32800 hours (3.74 years)

50 to 100% 43800 hours (5.00 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

� Guaranteed value

Extended SRAM cassette

Power-on
time ratio*1

Guaranteed value when used in the R08PSFCPU or R16PSFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Not used

24400 hours

43800 hours

(2.78 years)

(5.00 years)

30%

34800 hours (3.97 years)

50%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

70 to 100%

Used
(ECC-compatible 2MB type)*2

0% 30% 50% 70% 100%

13300 hours (1.51 years)
19000 hours (2.16 years)
26600 hours (3.03 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

33300 hours (3.80 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (ECC-compatible 8MB type)

0% 30% 50% 70% 100%

6100 hours (0.69 years)
8700 hours (0.99 years)
12200 hours (1.39 years)
20300 hours (2.31 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

18462 hours (2.11 years)
26374 hours (3.01 years)
36923 hours (4.21 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

15100 hours (1.72 years)
21500 hours (2.45 years)
30200 hours (3.44 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

Guaranteed value when used in the R32PSFCPU or R120PSFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

17300 hours (1.97 years)

42083 hours (4.80 years)

39900 hours (4.55 years)

24700 hours (2.81 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

34600 hours (3.94 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

10800 hours (1.23 years)

37600 hours (4.29 years)

27000 hours (3.08 years)

15400 hours (1.75 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

38500 hours (4.39 years)

21600 hours (2.46 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

36000 hours (4.10 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

5500 hours (0.62 16835 hours

years)

(1.92 years)

13700 hours (1.56 years)

7800 hours (0.89 24051 hours

years)

(2.75 years)

19500 hours (2.22 years)

11000 hours (1.25 years)

33671 hours (3.84 years)

27400 hours (3.12 years)

18300 hours (2.08 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

*1 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of the programmable controller power-on time to 24 hours. (If the total power-on time is 12
hours, the ratio will be 50%. If the total power-on time is 6 hours, the ratio will be 25%.) *2 Check the version of the engineering tool used. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

131 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.5 Performance Specifications of Battery

When used in a Safety CPU
The actual service values and guaranteed values are as follows:

� Actual service value (reference value)

Extended SRAM cassette

Power-on
time ratio*1

Actual service value when used in the R08SFCPU or R16SFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Not used, used (1MB type), used (2MB type)

0 to 100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (4MB type)

30 to 100%

Used (8MB type)
Used (ECC-compatible 2MB type)
Used (ECC-compatible 8MB type)

0%
30 to 100%
0%
30% 50% 70% 100% 0%
30%
50 to 100%

33700 hours (3.84 years) 43800 hours (5.00 years) 43300 hours (4.94 years) 43800 hours (5.00 years)
24000 hours (2.73 years) 34200 hours (3.90 years) 43800 hours (5.00 years)

Actual service value when used in the R32SFCPU or R120SFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

43800 hours (5.00 years)

42200 hours (4.81 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)
31700 hours (3.61 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)
40200 hours (4.58 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

23000 hours (2.62 years)
32800 hours (3.74 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

132 4 SPECIFICATIONS 4.5 Performance Specifications of Battery

� Guaranteed value

Extended SRAM cassette

Power-on
time ratio*1

Guaranteed value when used in the R08SFCPU or R16SFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Guaranteed value when used in the R32SFCPU or R120SFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Not used

24400 hours

43800 hours

17300 hours

42083 hours

39900 hours

(2.78 years)

(5.00 years)

(1.97 years)

(4.80 years)

(4.55 years)

30%

34800 hours (3.97 years)

24700 hours (2.81 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

50%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

34600 hours (3.94 years)

70 to 100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (1MB type)

18100 hours (2.06 years)

43516 hours (4.97 years)

41500 hours (4.73 years)

13900 hours (1.58 years)

38678 hours (4.42 years)

34200 hours (3.90 years)

30%

25800 hours (2.94 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

19800 hours (2.26 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

50%

36200 hours (4.13 years)

27800 hours (3.17 years)

70 to 100% 43800 hours (5.00 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (2MB type)

16400 hours (1.87 years)

42178 hours (4.81 years)

38500 hours (4.39 years)

12900 hours (1.47 years)

36641 hours (4.18 years)

32000 hours (3.65 years)

30%

23400 hours (2.67 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

18400 hours (2.10 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

50%

32800 hours (3.74 years)

15800 hours (2.94 years)

70%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

43000 hours (4.90 years)

100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (4MB type)

13300 hours (1.51 years)

37143 hours (4.24 years)

33300 hours (3.80 years)

10900 hours (1.24 years)

32051 hours (3.66 years)

27000 hours (3.08 years)

30%

19000 hours (2.16 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

15500 hours (1.76 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

38500 hours (4.39 years)

50%

26600 hours (3.03 years)

21800 hours (2.48 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

70%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

36300 hours (4.14 years)

100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (8MB type)

9200 hours (1.05 27634 hours

years)

(3.15 years)

22900 hours (2.61 years)

8000 hours (0.91 24074 hours

years)

(2.75 years)

19800 hours (2.26 years)

30%

13100 hours (1.49 years)

39478 hours (4.51 years)

32700 hours (3.73 years)

11400 hours (1.30 years)

34392 hours (3.93 years)

28200 hours (3.21 years)

50%

18400 hours (2.10 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

16000 hours (1.82 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

39600 hours (4.52 years)

70%

30600 hours (3.49 years)

26600 hours (3.03 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

Used (ECC-compatible 2MB type)

0% 30%

13300 hours (1.51 years)
19000 hours (2.16 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

33300 hours (3.80 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

10800 hours (1.23 years)
15400 hours (1.75 years)

37600 hours (4.29 years)
43800 hours (5.00 years)

27000 hours (3.08 years)
38500 hours (4.39 years)

50%

26600 hours (3.03 years)

21600 hours (2.46 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

70%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

36000 hours (4.10 years)

100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

133 4 SPECIFICATIONS
4.5 Performance Specifications of Battery

Extended SRAM cassette

Power-on
time ratio*1

Guaranteed value when used in the R08SFCPU or R16SFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Guaranteed value when used in the R32SFCPU or R120SFCPU

Q6BAT

Q7BATN

Q7BAT

Used (ECC-compatible 8MB type)

0% 30%

6100 hours (0.69 years)
8700 hours (0.99 years)

17320 hours (1.98 years)
24743 hours (2.82 years)

15100 hours (1.72 years)
21500 hours (2.45 years)

5500 hours (0.62 years)
7800 hours (0.89 years)

15893 hours (1.81 years)
22704 hours (2.59 years)

13700 hours (1.56 years)
19500 hours (2.22 years)

50%

12200 hours (1.39 years)

34641 hours (3.95 years)

30200 hours (3.44 years)

11000 hours (1.25 years)

31786 hours (3.63 years)

27400 hours (3.12 years)

70%

20300 hours (2.31 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

18300 hours (2.08 years)

43800 hours (5.00 years)

100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

FX3U-32BL

When used in the R00CPU, R01CPU, or R02CPU
The actual service values and guaranteed values are as follows: � Actual service value (reference value)

Power-on time ratio

Actual service value

0 to 100%

43800 hours (5.00 years)

� Guaranteed value
Power-on time ratio 0 to 100%

Guaranteed value 43800 hours (5.00 years)

Precautions

Note the following precautions regarding battery life. � Use a battery within the guaranteed period of life time. If the battery is used exceeding the guaranteed period, back up the
data on the device/label memory. � When SM52 (Battery low) turns on, replace the battery immediately. ( Page 181 Battery replacement procedure)

134 4 SPECIFICATIONS 4.5 Performance Specifications of Battery

5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

5.1 Installation Environment

Install a programmable controller according to the installation environment shown in the general specifications. (Page 119

General Specifications)

Do not install the programmable controller to the following place. � Ambient temperature is outside the range of 0 to 55*1.

� Ambient humidity is outside the range of 5 to 95%RH.

� Condensation occurs because of rapid temperature change.

� Corrosive gas or combustible gas exists.

� Conductive powder such as dust and iron powder, oil mist, salinity, or organic solvent is filled.

� Programmable controller is exposed to direct sunlight.

� Strong electric field or strong magnetic field is generated.

� Programmable controller is subject to vibration and shock.
*1 When an extended temperature range base unit is used, each module can be used in the environment of 0 to 60.

135 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.1 Installation Environment

5.2 Installation Position
When installing a programmable controller in a control panel, fully consider its operability, maintainability, and environmental resistance.
Installation position for programmable controller
To improve the airflow and change a module easily, provide clearance between the module top/bottom and structures/parts as shown below.

30mm or more*1*5 *3

5mm or more*2

5mm or more

A shaded area shows the ceiling of a control panel, wiring duct, or parts.
*1 Provide clearance of 30mm or more when the height of a wiring duct is 50mm or less. In other cases, provide clearance of 40mm or more.
*2 Provide clearance of 20mm or more when an extension cable is connected/removed without removing a power supply module. *3 Provide clearance of 20mm or more for a power supply module, and 80mm or more for a module using a connector for external devices. *4 Provide clearance of 50mm or more when the Q7BATN is installed, and 45mm or more when the Q7BAT is installed. *5 Secure adequate space for wiring when connecting Ethernet cables to the R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.

Installation direction for programmable controller
� To improve the airflow for heat dissipation, install a programmable controller in the following direction.

� Do not install the programmable controller in the following direction.

136 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.2 Installation Position

Installation surface
Install a base unit on a flat surface. If the installation surface is uneven, excessive force is applied to the printed-circuit board, which may cause malfunction.
Installation of programmable controller with other devices
To avoid the close installation of a programmable controller and vibration sources such as an electromagnetic contactor and no fuse breaker, install them in a different control panel or at a distance.
Clearance between a programmable controller and other devices
Provide the following clearance between the programmable controller and other devices such as a contactor and relay to avoid influence from the radiated noise and heat.

(2)

(1)
(1) A device in front of a programmable controller: 100mm or more (2) A device on the right and left of a programmable controller: 50mm or more

137 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.2 Installation Position

5.3 Installing Base Unit to Control Panel
This section describes the installation method for a base unit to a control panel.
Installation method
1. Fix two mounting screws for the upper side of the base unit to
the control panel.

Main base unit, extension base unit

2. Place the notch on the right side of the base unit to a screw
on the right side of the control panel. When the RQ extension base unit is used, place the bell-shaped hole on the right side of the base unit to the screw on the right side of the control panel.

RQ extension base unit

3. Place the bell-shaped hole on the left side of the base unit to
a screw on the left side of the control panel.
4. Fix the mounting screws into the holes at the bottom of the
base unit, and retighten all the mounting screws.
138 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.3 Installing Base Unit to Control Panel

When the base unit mounted modules is installed on the control panel, install the base unit, without a module on the right end slot, on the control panel. The removal method is the same. Installing the main base unit, without the power supply module on the left end slot, on the control panel is recommended. The mounting screws can be tightened by inserting a screwdriver acock. The removal method is the same.
5
139 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.3 Installing Base Unit to Control Panel

5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail

Mounting the base unit on the DIN rail

This section describes the installation method for a base unit to a DIN rail. A DIN rail adapter (sold separately) is required to install the base unit to the DIN rail. For the MELSEC-Q series extension base unit, refer to the following. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

Applicable DIN rail adapter model

Main base unit, extension base unit
� For R3B, R3B-HT, R6B, R6B-HT, R3RB, R3RB-HT, R6RB, R6RB-HT, R6WRB, R6WRB-HT: R6DIN1

Model

Pieces

Hook A

Hook B-C (with two Stopper mounting screws)

Square washer

Mounting screw (M510)

R6DIN1

RQ extension base unit
Use the MELSEC-Q series DIN rail adapter for the RQ extension base unit.

� For RQ68B, RQ612B: Q6DIN1

� For RQ65B: Q6DIN2

Model

Pieces

Adapter (larger)

Adapter (smaller)

Stopper

Q6DIN1

Q6DIN2

Square washer
3 2

Mounting screw (M510)
3
2

Applicable DIN rail model (IEC 60715)
� TH35-7.5Fe � TH35-7.5Al � TH35-15Fe

140 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail

Interval between DIN rail mounting screws

When a DIN rail is used, tighten DIN rail mounting screws in interval of 200mm or less to ensure the sufficient strength of the rail. Tighten the DIN rail by using the mounting screws and square washers included with the DIN rail adapter. When the TH3515Fe is used, the square washers are not required. � When the base unit which has eight slots or more is used, screw three spots as below.

B*3

A*2

B*3

(1)

(2)

35mm

(3)

P = 200mm or less (1) Mounting screws (included with the DIN rail adapter)*1 (2) Mounting screws (sold separately) (3) Stoppers

� When the base unit which has five slots or less is used, screw two spots as below.

B*3

A*2

B*3

(1)

(2)

35mm

(3)

P = 200mm or less (1) Mounting screws (included with the DIN rail adapter)*1 (2) Mounting screws (sold separately) (3) Stoppers

*1 The following shows the installation position of the square washer.

(1)

(2)

Side view A

(1) DIN rail (2) Square washer (3) Mounting screw (M510) (4) Mounting side such as a control panel

(3) � A arrow view

(1)

(2) (3)

(4) *2 For the A position, tighten the DIN rail on the control panel by using the mounting screws and square washers included with the DIN rail
adapter. *3 For the B position where the base unit is not mounted, the mounting screws and square washers included with the DIN rail adapter are
not required. Tighten the DIN rail with the mounting screws (sold separately).
141 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail

Precautions
� Use the DIN rail which M5 size screws can be used. � Use only one square washer for each mounting screw. Use only the square washers included with the DIN rail adapter. If
two or more square washers are used together for one mounting screw, the screw may interfere with the base unit. � Align the square washer parallel to the DIN rail.
142 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail

Installing the DIN rail adapter

When the base unit is mounted on the DIN rail, install the DIN rail adapter on the base unit.

Main base unit, extension base unit

Use the hook As, hook B-Cs, and stoppers included with the MELSEC iQ-R series DIN rail adapter for the main base unit and

extension base unit.

1. Insert the hook A (1) to the lower square hole

of two square holes at the upper part of the

base unit and push the upper part of the hook

until it clicks. (two spots)

(1)
5

(2)

2. Project the hook B (3) of the hook B-C (2) on

the downside shown the left figure.

(3) (2)

3. Push the tab of the hook B-C into two square
holes at the lower part of the base unit until it clicks. (two spots)

4. Tighten the mounting screws (M310) of the
hook B-C with a screwdriver and fix the hook B-C. (total four spots (two mounting screws per one hook B-C), tightening torque: 0.37 to 0.48Nm)

143 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail

5. Project the tab (4) of the hook B-C on the

(4)

upside by pushing up the hook B (3).

(3)
6. Hitch the upper part of the base unit to the
DIN rail and push the lower part of the base unit until it clicks.
7. Fix the stopper of the DIN rail. (Page 146
Fixing of the stopper)

RQ extension base unit

Use the adapters (larger), adapters (smaller), and stoppers included with the MELSEC-Q series DIN rail adapter for the RQ

extension base unit.
(1)

(1) Spot for the hook of the adapter (smaller) (2) Spot for the hook of the adapter (larger)

(2)
1. Insert the hook of the adapter (smaller) into
the lower square hole of two square holes at
the upper part of the base unit and push the
upper part of the adapter until it clicks.

144 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail

2. Insert the adapter (larger) into the groove of
the base unit from below. As the adapter is inserted into the groove, push the lower part of the adapter (larger) into two square holes at the lower part of the base unit until it clocks.
3. Mount the base unit installed the DIN rail
adapter on the DIN rail.
4. Fix the stopper of the DIN rail. (Page 146
Fixing of the stopper)
5
145 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail

Fixing of the stopper

Fix the stopper to the DIN rail after the base unit installed the DIN rail adapter is mounted on the DIN rail.
1. Loosen the screw at the upper part of the

stopper (1).

(1) (2)

2. For the stopper fixed to the left side of the base
unit, turn up the arrow mark printed on the

stopper and hitch the tab (2) at the lower part of

the stopper to the DIN rail (3).

3. Hitch the tab at the upper part of the stopper to

the upper part of the DIN rail.
(3)

4. Fix the stopper on the right side of the base
unit upside down for the stopper of the left side.
5. Slide the stopper to the end of the base unit. 6. Tighten the screw of the stopper with a
screwdriver. (tightening torque: 1.00 to 1.35Nm)
7. Check that both stoppers are fixed on the DIN
rail securely.

When the base unit is mounted on the DIN rail, select the DIN rail in the light of the following dimensions of the stopper. For the dimensions (W) of the base unit, refer to the following. Page 123 Performance Specifications of Base Unit

Stopper

Base unit

Stopper

DIN rail

W W+18

Unit: mm The method for fixing the DIN rail stopper is an example. Fix the module in accordance with the manual for the DIN rail stopper used.

146 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail

Lateral dimensions of the base unit with the DIN rail
This section describes the lateral dimensions when the base unit is mounted on the DIN rail.

DIN rail depth (D)

TH35-7.5Fe: 7.5 TH35-7.5AL: 7.5 TH35-15Fe: 15

(1)
5.7 Base unit

(3) (2)
Power supply module

DIN rail adapter
5

35 98 106

DIN rail adapter

Internal surface of a control panel

The following table lists the dimensions (1), (2), and, (3) in the figure when (2) is the power supply module. (1) differs

depending on a base unit. (2) and (3) differ depending on the module used.

No. MELSEC iQ-R series main base unit and extension base unit RQ extension base unit and MELSEC-Q series extension base unit

(1) 8.9mm

7.5mm

(2) 110.0mm

115.0mm

(3) 118.9mm

122.5mm

147 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.4 Mounting Base Unit on the DIN Rail

5.5 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit
Up to seven base units can be extended including the extension base unit, RQ extension base unit, and MELSEC-Q series extension base unit. Use an extension cable for the connection with the extension base unit. Connect the extension cable to the connector of the base unit in order of OUTIN. Do not connect the extension cable to the connector in order of ININ, OUTOUT, or INOUT.
OUT
Main base unit

IN OUT
Extension base unit

The extension level setting for the extension base unit and RQ extension base unit is not required, because the extension level is set automatically in order near from the main base unit. The setting cannot be changed arbitrarily.
When a redundant system with redundant extension base unit is configured
Connect OUT of the main base unit of system A to either IN1 or IN2 of the redundant extension base unit using an extension cable. Do the same in system B. (For OUT of the main base unit of both system A and system B, there is no difference between using IN1 and using IN2 of the redundant extension base unit.)

OUT
Main base unit

IN1 IN2 OUT1 OUT2
Extension base unit
IN1 IN2 OUT1 OUT2
Extension base unit
Connecting extension base units
� To make an extension cable between the two redundant extension base units redundant, connect OUT1 of one redundant extension base unit to IN1 of the redundant extension base unit in the level immediately below using an extension cable. Do the same to OUT2 of one redundant extension base unit and IN2 of the redundant extension base unit in the level immediately below.*1
*1 Extension cables in the extension level 1 and below levels are not necessarily redundant. (Connect OUT1 to IN1 only or OUT2 to IN2 only, using a single extension cable.) In this case, however, a continuation error will be detected in the control system at startup of the redundant system. To avoid this error, set "Extension cable redundant error detection setting at startup" in "Redundant System Settings" of "CPU Parameter". ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))
� When using an extension base unit other than the redundant extension base unit in the extension level 2 and later, connect either OUT1 or OUT2 of the redundant extension base unit in the extension level 1 to IN of the extension base unit in the extension level 2. In this case, there is no difference between using OUT1 or OUT2.
148 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.5 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit

When MELSEC-Q series modules are used

This section describes the connection between the RQ extension base unit and MELSEC-Q series extension base unit.

The RQ extension base unit is connected to the lower level of the main base unit or MELSEC iQ-R series extension base unit

with a MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable.
� When the RQ extension base unit is connected to the lower level of the main base unit

� When the RQ extension base unit is connected to the lower level of the extension base unit

Main base unit

RQ extension base unit

Extension base unit

RQ extension base unit

5
When additional MELSEC-Q series modules are mounted, the MELSEC-Q series extension base unit is connected to the

lower level of the RQ extension base unit with a MELSEC-Q series extension cable.

� When the RQ extension base unit is connected to the lower level of the main � When the RQ extension base unit is connected to the lower level of the

base unit

extension base unit

Main base unit

RQ extension base unit Extension base unit for MELSEC-Q series
The dot lines show the MELSEC-Q series extension cables.

Extension base unit
RQ extension base unit
Extension base unit for MELSEC-Q series

For the MELSEC-Q series extension base unit that can be used in the MELSEC iQ-R series system, refer to the following. Page 75 MELSEC-Q series
The MELSEC-Q series extension base unit is required the extension level setting with the connector pin for the extension level setting. (Page 150 Setting method with connector pin for extension level setting)

Extension Setting

level

necessity

Main base unit

Extension base unit

�

RQ extension base unit
Extension base unit for MELSEC-Q series
Extension base unit for MELSEC-Q series

�

149 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.5 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit

Setting method with connector pin for extension level setting

This section describes the extension level setting method for the MELSEC-Q series extension base unit.

Set the extension level surely, because the level is set 1 by the factory default.

(1)

1. The extension level setting connector of the

MELSEC-Q series extension base unit is

located within the IN side extension connector

cover. Loosen the fixing screws (1) of the IN

side extension connector cover and remove

the extension connector cover (2).

(2) (3)

2. Insert the connector pin for the extension level
setting (3) into the connector (PIN1) between the IN and OUT sides extension cable connector.

Extension level 2 3 4 5 6 7
Insert position of a connector pin for extension level setting

3. Set the extension level using the connector pin
for the extension level setting in accordance with the left figure.
4. Install the IN side extension connector cover
on the MELSEC-Q series extension base unit and tighten the screws of the extension connector cover. (tightening torque: 0.36 to 0.48Nm)

Set the extension level in order of connection, starting from the extension base unit connected to the main base unit. Set the correct extension level for the extension level setting connector. The incorrect settings as below may cause the incorrect input or incorrect output. When any extension level is skipped, slots cannot be reserved because no slots will be allocated to a skipped extension base unit. � Any extension level is skipped. � The same extension level is set to two or more extension base units. � Two or more connector pins for the extension level setting are inserted, or no connector pins are not
inserted. For details on the extension level setting, refer to the following. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
150 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.5 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit

Voltage drop when a MELSEC-Q series extension base unit is used

When the Q5B is used, the Q5B is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module on the RQ extension base unit, a

voltage drop occurs at extension cables. Incorrect input or output may occur if the specified voltage (4.75VDC or higher) is not supplied to the IN connector of the Q5B. When the Q5B is used, check that the IN connector of the Q5B set as the last level is supplied with 4.75VDC or higher.

Connecting the extension base unit to the lower level of the RQ extension base unit with the shortest extension cable is

recommended to reduce the influence of the voltage drop.

The following table lists the conductor resistance value for each extension cable.

Model

Conductor resistance value for extension cable

QC05B

0.044

QC06B

0.051

QC12B

0.082

QC30B

0.172

QC50B

0.273

QC100B

0.530

The voltage drop can be checked on the engineering tool.

The following window shows the check result.
151 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.5 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit

When only the Q5B is connected to the lower level of the RQ extension base unit
The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the RQ extension base unit is set to 4.90VDC (minimum value). Therefore, the Q5B can be used when the voltage drop at the extension cable is 0.15V or lower (4.9V - 4.75V = 0.15V).
Main base unit

V1 R1

RQ extension base unit

Extension level 1

Q5 B

Extension level 2

V6 R6

Q5 B

Extension level 7

Diagonal lines show the power supply modules.

Symbol V1 Vn R1 Rn I1 to I6

Description Voltage drop at the extension cable between the RQ extension base unit and the Q5B Voltage drop at the extension cable between the Q5B set as the extension level n and the extension level n+1 Resistance value for the cable between the RQ extension base unit and the Q5B Resistance value for the extension cable between the Q5B set as the extension level n and the extension level n+1 Current consumption value (5VDC) at the extension level 2 to 7*1

*1 Sum total (I1 to I6) of the current consumption by the Q5B and current consumption by I/O modules and intelligent function modules mounted on the Q5B differs depending on modules mounted on the Q5B. For detail, refer to the following. User's manual for the module used

Mounting Voltage drop for the extension cable at each extension level

Sum total (V) of

position of V1

voltage drops to IN

the Q5B

connector of the

Q5B

Extension

R1I1

level 2

Extension

R1(I1+I2)

R2I2

level 3

Extension

R1(I1+I2+I3)

R2(I2+I3)

R3I3

level 4

Extension

R1(I1+I2+I3+I4) R2(I2+I3+I4)

R3(I3+I4)

R4I4

level 5

Extension

R1(I1+I2+I3+I4+ R2(I2+I3+I4+I5) R3(I3+I4+I5)

R4(I4+I5)

R5I5

level 6

I5)

V=V1 V=V1+V2 V=V1+V2+V3 V=V1+V2+V3+V4 V=V1+V2+V3+V4+V5

Extension level 7

R1(I1+I2+I3+I4+ R2(I2+I3+I4+I5+ R3(I3+I4+I5+I6) R4(I4+I5+I6)

I5+I6)

I6)

R5(I5+I6)

R6I6

V=V1+V2+V3+V4+V5+V6

152 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.5 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit

When the Q6B is connected between the RQ extension base unit and the Q5B
The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the Q6B is set to 4.90VDC (minimum value). Therefore, the Q5B can be used when the voltage drop at the extension cable is 0.15V or lower (4.9V - 4.75V = 0.15V).
Main base unit

RQ extension base unit

Q6 B

Extension level n

V Rn

Q6 B

Extension level n+1

Rn+1

Q5 B

Extension level n+2

Diagonal lines show the power supply modules.

Symbol V In
Rn Rn+1

Description
Voltage drop at the extension cable between the RQ extension base unit and the Q5B
Current consumption (5VDC) when the Q5B is used as the extension level n+2 (n = 1 to 5), n: Extension level for the Q6B (Sum total of the current consumption by the Q5B and current consumption by I/O modules and intelligent function modules mounted on the Q5B)
Resistance value for the extension cable between the RQ extension base unit and the Q6B or the Q6B and the Q6B Resistance value for the extension cable between the Q6B and the Q5B

Mounting position Q6B Extension level 2 Extension level 2 to 3 Extension level 3 to 4 Extension level 4 to 5 Extension level 5 to 6

Q5B Extension level 3 Extension level 4 Extension level 5 Extension level 6 Extension level 7

Sum total (V) of the voltage drop at the extension cable from the main base unit to the IN connector of the Q5B
V=(R1+R2)I1 V=(R1+R2+R3)I2 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4)I3 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5)I4 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6)I5

153 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.5 Connection Method for the Extension Base Unit

5.6 Connection/Disconnection of Extension Cable
This section describes the connection/disconnection procedure of an extension cable.
MELSEC iQ-R series extension cable

Connection procedure
(1)

1. Remove the extension connector protective
cover (2) from the extension connector cover (1) before the extension cable is connected to the base unit.

(2)
2. Insert the connector (3) of the extension cable
with the triangle mark at the left side to the connector of the base unit. Lock the connector securely until it clicks.

(3)
Removal procedure
To disconnect the extension cable, hold the connector part with pushing two lock buttons on the connector.

154 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.6 Connection/Disconnection of Extension Cable

MELSEC-Q series extension cable
Connection procedure
RQ extension base unit (1)

1. Remove the extension connector protective
cover (2) from the extension connector cover (1) of the RQ extension base unit before the extension cable is connected to the base unit. For the MELSEC-Q series extension base unit, peel the seal (3) on the extension connector cover (1).

5
(2) MELSEC-Q series extension base unit
(1)

(3) (4)

2. Connect the extension cable connector to the
connector of the base unit holding the connector part (4) of the extension cable correctly.
3. After connection, tightening the connector
fixing screws (5) on the extension cable connector securely. (tightening torque: 0.20Nm)

(5)
Removal procedure
Remove the connector part of the extension cable after loosing the fixing screws and checking that the screws are coming off completely.
155 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.6 Connection/Disconnection of Extension Cable

Handling precautions
� Connect an extension cable to the base unit with the extension connector cover. � When an extension cable is connected, keep 55mm or more as the minimum bending radius for the cable. Failure to do so
may result in malfunction because of the characteristic deterioration or disconnection. � Keep the overall cable distance within 20m in total length of extension cables. When MELSEC-Q series extension cables
are used, keep the overall cable distance within 13.2m in total length of a MELSEC iQ-R series extension cables and the MELSEC-Q series extension cables. � Do not install extension cables together with the main circuit lines (high voltage and large current). � For an extension cable, hold the connector part of the cable. Holding a ferrite core installed at both ends of the extension cable may cause the cable disconnection inside the connector. � Do not displace the ferrite core when the extension cable is used. Doing so may change the characteristics. � Do not connect a ten-meter extension cable (RC100B) to a base unit that the 10m mark is not printed on its extension connector cover. Connecting them may cause an error.
156 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.6 Connection/Disconnection of Extension Cable

5.7 Wiring

This section describes the wiring common to all modules. � For the wiring of each module, refer to the following. User's manual (Startup) for the module used � For the wiring for a redundant system, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
Wiring to the power supply module

This section describes the wiring to the power supply module.

The terminal block of the power supply module has a screw size of M4. Wire cables to the terminal block with the applicable

solderless terminal RAV1.25-4 or RAV2-4. Tighten the terminal screws of the power supply module in the range of 1.02 to

1.38 Nm.

Note, however, that the +24V and 24G terminals of the R62P have a screw size of M3.5. Wire cables to the terminal block with

the applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25-3.5 or RAV2-3.5. Tighten the terminal screws of the power supply module in the

range of 0.66 to 0.89 Nm.

Wire

Use the wires in the following table for the power supply module.

Applicable wire size

Type

Material

0.75 to 2 (18 to 14 AWG)

Stranded wire

Copper

Temperature rating 75 or higher

Wiring example

The following figures show wiring examples of the power cables connected to a main base unit and extension base unit and the ground cables. For wiring examples for each power supply module, refer to the manual included with the power supply module. ( Before Using the Product)

AC power supply

DC power supply

100 to 240VAC

R61P R04CPU

ERR

AC DC
24VDC

FG LG INPUT 100-240VAC

24VDC

AC DC

R63P R04CPU

ERR

FG LG INPUT +24V 24G

(1)

R61P

100 to 240VAC

ERR
FG LG INPUT 100-240VAC

R63P 24VDC

ERR
FG LG INPUT +24V 24G

(1) Connected to the 24VDC terminal of a module that requires a supply of 24VDC inside an I/O module.

157 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

The following figure shows a wiring example of a redundant power supply system. Use a power supply in a different system for each redundant power supply module (A or B, as shown below) so that the redundant power supply modules are powered on or off individually at replacement.
� AC power supply

100 to 240VAC

R310RB

R64RP

R04CPU

ERR

100 to 240VAC AC

FG LG INPUT 100-240VAC

R610RB

R64RP

100 to 240VAC AC

ERR
FG LG INPUT 100-240VAC

100 to 240VAC AC

� Power cables must be twisted starting from the connected terminal, and connected between modules at the shortest distance possible. Also, use the thickest wire (maximum 2) to reduce the voltage drop.
� For the wiring to a terminal block, use a solderless terminal. � Use UL listed solderless terminals, and for processing, use a tool recommended by their manufacturer. � To prevent the short-circuit because of loosening screws, use the solderless terminal with an insulation
sleeve of 0.8mm or less. Note that up to two solderless terminals can be connected per terminal block.

Solderless terminal with an insulation sleeve

Terminal block

� Ground the LG and FG terminals after short-circuiting them. Failure to do so may be susceptible to the noise. The LG terminal has a half potential of the input voltage.
� When two redundant power supply modules operate in parallel as a redundant power supply system, it is recommended to connect the one redundant power supply module to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

158 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

Precautions
� Wire cables of the programmable controller power supply, I/O power supply, and motor power supply separately as shown below.

100 to 240VAC

Main power supply

Programmable Isolation controller power transformer supply

Relay terminal block

T1 I/O power supply

Programmable controller
I/O equipment

Motor power supply

Motor equipment

� Use an isolation transformer to reduce the noise such as the lightning surge. ( Page 238 Isolation transformer)

� Considering the rated current and inrush current of the power supply module, connect a breaker having the appropriate

sensing property or an external fuse causing proper blowout. When a single programmable controller is used, connecting a

breaker around 10A or an external fuse is recommended.

� Avoid connecting the 24VDC output of two or more power supply modules in parallel to supply power to one I/O module.

This parallel connection causes a breakdown of the power supply modules.

Power supply module I/O module Power supply module I/O module

24VDC

External power supply

� Do not install the power cables together with the main circuit lines (high voltage and large current) or I/O signal wires (including common lines). Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them.
� A momentary power failure may be detected, or the CPU module or remote head module may be reset because of the lightning surge noise. As a measure against the lightning surge noise, connect a surge absorber for lightning as shown below. Using the surge absorber for lightning can reduce the influence from the lightning.

Programmable controller
AC
I/O equipment

Surge absorber for lightning

� Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightning (E1) from that of a programmable controller (E2). � Select a surge absorber for lightning which the power supply voltage does not exceed the maximum
allowable circuit voltage even when line voltage is maximum.
� There will be clearances between adjacent modules when the extended temperature range base unit is used, and therefore care should be taken to ensure that cables do not pass between units at wiring.

159 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

Wiring to a screw terminal block

This section describes the wiring to an 18-point screw terminal block.

Wiring method

1. Strip the insulating coating of a cable.

2. Connect a solderless terminal to the stripped part of the
cable. For applicable solderless terminals, refer to the specifications of each module.
3. Wire the solderless terminal to an 18-point screw
terminal block. For the terminal layout, refer to the specifications of each module.

Wired cables can be fixed to the 18-point screw terminal block by using a fixing band (width: 3mm, thickness: 1mm or less). Fix the cables by passing the fixing band (1) to the hole for fixing band (2) as shown below.

(1) (2)

160 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

Precautions

� Use UL listed solderless terminals if necessary for UL compliance, and for processing, use a tool recommended by their manufacturer. Note that a solderless terminal with an insulation sleeve cannot be used.
� The wires used for connection to the terminal block must be 0.3 to 0.75 in core and 2.8mm or less in outside diameter. � Wire the input and output lines away from each other. � When the lines cannot be wire away from the main circuit and power lines, use a batch-shielded cable and ground it on the
programmable controller side. In some cases, ground it in the opposite side.

Programmable controller

Shielded cable

Input

Output

RA Jacket for the
shielded cable

DC
� Ground the piping securely where wiring runs through the piping.

� Install a 24VDC input line away from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines.

� Wiring of 200m or longer will occur the current leakage because of the line capacity, resulting in a fault.

� As a measure against the lightning surge, separate the AC wiring and DC wiring and connect a surge absorber for lightning. (Page 166 Precautions)

� Failure to do so may cause the failure of an I/O device because of the lightning.

� There will be clearances between adjacent modules when the extended temperature range base unit is used, and therefore

care should be taken to ensure that cables do not pass between units at wiring.

161 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

Wiring to a spring clamp terminal block

This section describes the wiring to a spring clamp terminal block.

Wiring method

Connecting a cable
(1) (3)
(2)

1. Securely insert a spring clamp terminal block tool (2) to
the Q6TE-18SN tool insertion opening (square hole) (1) deeply and straight.
2. Insert a cable or bar solderless terminal to the wire
insertion opening (round hole) (3) and pull out the spring clamp terminal block tool.
3. Pull the cable or bar solderless terminal lightly, check
that it is clamped securely.

Disconnecting a cable
Securely insert the spring clamp terminal block tool to the Q6TE-18SN tool insertion opening (square hole) deeply and straight, and pull out the bar solderless terminal or cable.

Wiring precautions
� Insert only one wire into the circular shaped hole of the spring clamp terminal block. Inserting two or more wires may result in a poor contact to the terminal part.
� For the wire strip length, satisfy the specifications in this manual. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or short circuit between adjacent terminals because the conductive part. If the wire strip length is too short, it may result in the poor contact to the spring clamp terminal part.
� Do not use the wire soldered the head. Poor contact or insertion-extraction failure to the spring clamp terminal block may occur because of the difference of the solder processing result.
� There will be clearances between adjacent modules when the extended temperature range base unit is used, and therefore care should be taken to ensure that cables do not pass between units at wiring.

Precautions for using a spring clamp terminal block tool
Observe the following precautions for using a spring clamp terminal block tool. Failure to do so may result in the damage to the spring clamp terminal part or resin part of the terminal block. � Use the dedicated spring clamp terminal block tool. � Do not insert a bar solderless terminal or cable before inserting the spring clamp terminal block tool to the tool insertion
opening. � Insert the spring clamp terminal block tool to the tool insertion opening straight.

162 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

Wiring to a spring clamp terminal block (lever type)
This section describes the wiring to a spring clamp terminal block (lever type).
Connecting a cable
Insert a wire with a bar solderless terminal into the wire insertion opening and push the wire. Then, pull the wire lightly and check that it is clamped securely.
Disconnecting a cable
Push the open/close button of the wire to be disconnected using a flathead screwdriver. Pull out the wire with the open/close button pushed.
(1)
5
(2) (1) Open/close button (2) Wire insertion opening
Precautions
� Use a bar solderless terminal for the wiring to the terminal block. If a stripped wire is inserted to a wire insertion opening, the wire cannot be clamped securely.
� When inserting a bar solderless terminal, make sure that the size of the terminal and its insertion direction are correct to prevent the terminal from getting stuck in or the terminal block damage. When using a bar solderless terminal other than the recommended products, make sure that the cross-sectional shape of the terminal after processing (the size includes an error in processing) is smaller than the size shown below. For the correct terminal insertion direction, refer to the figure below.
Cross-sectional shape of bar solderless terminal
1.5mm R1.2mm
163 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

(2.4mm) (1.8mm)

Wiring a connector
This section describes how to wire connectors for external devices.

Applicable connectors

The following reference products are the connector types and crimping tool for a module.

40-pin connectors

Type Soldering type connector (straight type) Crimping type connector (straight type) Soldering type connector (dual purpose (straight/oblique) type)

Model A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CON4

Applicable wire size 0.088 to 0.3 (28 to 22 AWG) (stranded wire) 0.088 to 0.24 (28 to 24 AWG) (stranded wire) 0.088 to 0.3 (28 to 22 AWG) (stranded wire)

40-pin connector crimping tool

Manufacturer FUJITSU COMPONENT LIMITED

Type Crimping tool

Model FCN-363T-T005/H

Contact www.fujitsu.com/jp/group/fcl/en

For how to wire the connector and how to use the crimping tool, contact the manufacturer.

Wiring method
A6CON1, A6CON4

1. Loosen the four fixing screws on the connector and
remove the screws. Open the connector cover from the connector side.

(1)

2. Solder the wires and coat them with heat shrinkable

tubes (1).

3. Check the terminal layout and wire them to the
connector. When the connector is plugged into an I/O module, an FG wire needs not to be installed.

164 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

4. Place the connector on one side of the connector cover
and put the fixing screws through the screw holes. Cover another connector cover onto the connector.

5
5. Tighten the four screws.

A6CON2
The following table shows the specifications of the FCN-363T-T005/H used for the A6CON2.

Applicable wire size
AWG24 AWG26 AWG28

Cross-section area of wire 0.20 to 0.24 0.13 to 0.16 0.088 to 0.096

Crimp height
1.25 to 1.30 1.20 to 1.25 1.15 to 1.20

Sheath outside diameter of wire 1.2 or less 1.2 or less 1.2 or less

Wiring of the A6CON2 requires the special tool. For how to use and adjust the tool, contact the manufacturer.

Arrangement for a flat cable is in the order of A1 B1 A2 (The following figure shows a connector viewed from the plug-in side.)
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01

Length of stripped wire part 3.0 to 4.0 3.0 to 4.0 3.0 to 4.0

165 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

Plugging a connector
Installation procedure

1. Plug the connector into the slot on the module.

2. Tighten the two connector screws (M2.6) (1).
(1)

(1)
Removal procedure
Loosen the two connector screws and pull out the connector from the module straight.

Precautions

� Crimp or solder the connector for an external device (A6CON) correctly. � Connect the A6CON to the module securely and tighten the two connector screws.

� Tighten the connector screws within the specified torque range.

Screw

Tightening torque range

Connector screw (M2.6)

0.20 to 0.29Nm

� Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cables may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in malfunction or damage to modules or cables. In addition, the weight of the cables may put stress on modules in an environment of strong vibrations and shocks.
� Use copper wire with a temperature rating of 75 or higher for the connector. � Use UL listed connectors if necessary for UL compliance.

To ensure that the connector used maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives, please refer to the following. Page 235 EMC and Low Voltage Directives Even when compliance with the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directives is not required, configuring the system that complies with the EMC Directive may reduce external noise.

166 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

Grounding

Observe the following: � Provide independent grounding when possible. Ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor
dedicated to the programmable controller (ground resistance: 100 ohms or less). � If independent grounding cannot be provided, employ (2) Shared grounding shown below.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Programmable controller

Equipment

Ground resistance of 100 or less

Programmable controller

Equipment

Ground resistance of 100 or less

Programmable controller

Equipment

(1) Independent grounding: Recommended

(2) Shared grounding: Allowed (3) Common grounding: Not allowed

� Use the thickest cable (maximum of 2). Bring the grounding point close to the programmable controller as much as

possible so that the ground cable can be shortened.

167 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.7 Wiring

5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Mounting/removing a module on/from a main base unit or extension base unit

This section describes the procedure for mounting/removing a module on/from a base unit or extension base unit. Power off a system when mounting/removing the module. Attach a blank cover module (RG60) to each connector where no module is mounted to prevent entry of foreign matter such as dust.

Mounting procedure (with a module fixing hook)
(1)

1. When a cap is attached to the module
connector of the base unit, remove it.
2. Place the concave part (1) of a module onto
the guide (2) of the base unit.

(2)
3. Push in the module until the module fixing hook
(3) snaps into place.
4. Check that the module fixing hook (3) hangs
the base unit and the module is mounted on the base unit securely.

(3)
When using the programmable controllers in environments in which they are subject to strong vibrations and shocks, take the following measures: � Fix the modules to the base unit using screws. (Module fixing screw: M312 (sold separately)) � Place the cables connected to the modules in a duct or clump them to prevent the weight of the cables from
putting stress on the modules.
168 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Precautions for installation
Place the concave part of a module onto the guide of a base unit before mounting a module. Failure to do so may damage the module.
When the extended temperature range base unit is used
Clearances between adjacent modules are provided on the extended temperature range base unit. Mount modules using the white lines on the circuit board as markers. Mount the module occupying two slots as shown below � For the CPU module, align the long edge of the white line on the circuit board with the left side of the module, and then
mount on the base unit.
5
� For the modules other than the CPU module, align the short edge of the white line on the circuit board with the left side of module, and then mount on the base unit.
169 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Removal procedure (with a module fixing hook)

1. Support the module with both hands and
securely press the module fixing hook (1) with your finger.

(1)
2. Pull the module straight supporting it at its
bottom while pressing the module fixing hook
(1).
3. While lifting the module, remove the concave
part (2) from the guide (3) of the base unit.

(2)
(3)
� When module fixing screws are used, remove the screws first and module from the base unit. Failure to do so may damage the module.
� The module surface temperature may be high immediately after power-off. When the module is removed, pay attention to the burn injury.

170 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Mounting procedure (without a module fixing hook)

The module without a module fixing hook is equipped with a module fixing screw on its case. To properly use the module fixing

screw and the base unit, observe following instructions when mounting or removing the module.

� When securing units, align a screwdriver with the screw slot and tighten slowly.

� Do not use an electric screwdriver.

� If foreign matter is sticking to the module fixing screw, remove it before mounting the module.
1. If a cap is attached to the base unit module

connector, remove the cap.

(1)

2. Place the concave part (1) of a module onto

the guide (2) of the base unit.

(2)

3. Push in the module and tighten the module
fixing screw (3) to fix the module on the base unit. (tightening torque: 0.36 to 0.48Nm)
4. Make sure that the module is securely
mounted.

(3)
Use the module fixing screw that is equipped with the module. When using the programmable controllers in environments in which they are subject to strong vibrations and shocks, place the cables connected to modules in a duct or clump them to prevent the weight of the cables from putting stress on the modules.
Precautions for installation
Place the concave part of a module onto the guide of a base unit before mounting a module. Failure to do so may damage the module.
171 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Removal procedure (without a module fixing hook) 1. Loosen the module fixing screw (1).
(1)
2. Pull the module toward supporting it at its
bottom.
3. While lifting the module, remove the concave
part (2) from the guide (3) of the base unit.
(2)
(3)
� The module surface temperature may be high immediately after power-off. When the module is removed, pay attention to the burn injury.
� When removing the module, make sure that the module fixing screw is loosened up completely. Failure to do so may damage the module.
� If the module fixing screw is broken, replace the case of the module. When replacing the case, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
172 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Mounting/removing a module on/from a RQ extension base unit

This section describes the procedure for mounting/removing a module on/from a RQ extension base unit. Power off a system when mounting/removing the module. Attach a blank cover module (QG60) to each connector where no module is mounted to prevent entry of foreign matter such as dust.

Mounting procedure
(1)

1. When a cap is attached to the module connector of the
base unit, remove it.
2. Insert the module fixing projection (1) into the module
fixing hole (2).

(2)

3. Push in the module until the module fixing hook (3)
snaps into place.

4. Check that the module fixing hook (3) hangs the base

(3)

unit and the module is mounted on the base unit

securely.

When using the programmable controllers in environments in which they are subject to strong vibrations and shocks, take the following measures: � Fix the modules to the base unit using screws. (Module fixing screw: M312 (sold separately)) � Place the cables connected to the modules in a duct or clump them to prevent the weight of the cables from
putting stress on the modules.
Precautions for installation
Insert the module fixing projection to the module fixing hole properly before mounting module. Failure to do so may damage the module.

173 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Removal procedure
(1)

1. Support the module with both hands and securely press
the module fixing hook (1) with your finger.
2. Pull the module straight supporting it at its bottom while
pressing the module fixing hook (1).
3. While lifting the module, remove the module fixing
projection part from the module fixing hole (2).

(2)
� When module fixing screws are used, remove the screws first and module from the base unit. Failure to do so may damage the module.
� The module surface temperature may be high immediately after power-off. When the module is removed, pay attention to the burn injury.

174 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Installing/removing a terminal block

This section describes the removal and installation procedure of the terminal block of a module.

Removal procedure
Removing an 18-point screw terminal block
(1)

1. Open the terminal cover and loosen two
terminal block mounting screws (1).

5
2. Remove the terminal block.

Removing a spring clamp terminal block (lever type)
Turn the lever to the release lever position and remove the terminal block from the module.

175 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Installation procedure

Installing an 18-point screw terminal block
After installing the terminal block, tighten two terminal block mounting screws.

Installing a spring clamp terminal block

1. Remove the protective cap from the Q6TE-18SN.

2. Install the Q6TE-18SN to the module and tighten the
terminal block mounting screws. (tightening torque: 0.66
to 0.89Nm)
(1)

176 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Installing a spring clamp terminal block (lever type)
Move the lever to the lock lever position and push the terminal block. When the terminal block is fully pushed in, the hook of the lever hangs on the module and fits the terminal block.

The terminal block can be inserted with the lever locations other than the lock lever position. After insertion, check that the lever is in the lock lever position.

Lock and release lever positions

To make it easy to install and remove the terminal block, a three-stage positioning stopper is attached so that the lever does

not freely turn around.

When installing or removing the terminal block, move the lever to the lock or release lever position.

1. � Figure viewed from the module top surface: When pulling the terminal block

Release lever position

(3) (2)

This lever position shows the state in which the terminal

block has been completely pulled out from the module. Turn

from the lock lever position to the release lever position and

lift the terminal block from the module.

(1)

� Figure viewed from the module top surface: When insertion of the terminal block has completed
(2) (3)

2. Lock lever position
This lever position shows the state in which the terminal block completely fits the module. Check the lock lever position and pull the terminal block lightly to check that the module completely fits the terminal block.

(1)

(1) Front part of a module (2) Terminal block (3) Lever position

177 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

Handling precautions

This section describes precautions for the handling of a module.

� Do not drop or apply strong shock to the module, SD memory card, extended SRAM cassette, battery-less option cassette,

terminal block connector, and pin connector. � Do not disassemble or modify the modules, extended SRAM cassettes, and battery-less option cassette. Doing so may
cause failure of the module.

� Do not place any objects that generate strong magnetic force near the battery-less option cassette. Placing an object which

generates strong magnetic force within a few centimeters from the battery-less option cassette may cause malfunction or

failure of this cassette. � Tighten each screw within the following torque range.

Screw

Tightening torque range

Module fixing screw (M312)

0.36 to 0.48Nm

Terminal block screw (M3)

0.42 to 0.58Nm

Terminal block mounting screw (M3.5)

0.66 to 0.89Nm

Connector screw (M2.6)

0.20 to 0.29Nm

Terminal screw (M4) of a power supply module

1.02 to 1.38Nm

Terminal screw (M3.5) of a power supply module

0.66 to 0.89Nm

� Mount a power supply module on the slot for the module (except the base unit which is not required the power supply module). Failure to do so cannot guarantee the operation because of the unstable voltage even if the module which is mounted on the base unit operates.
� Do not install extension cables together with the main circuit lines (high voltage and large current). Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them.
� Malfunction of the module may occur if the foreign matter such as the conductive dust contacts with the module surface other than front during the operation. Protect modules by attaching a blank cover module (RG60) to each connector where no module is mounted.

178 5 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5.8 Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block

6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

This chapter describes items that must be maintained or inspected daily or periodically to properly use a programmable controller in optimal condition at all times. When using the C Controller module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Startup)
6.1 Daily Inspection

This section describes items that must be inspected daily.

Item Inspection Item

Inspection method

Judgment criteria

Corrective action

Mounting of the

Looseness of the base Check that mounting screws The screws and cover must be Retighten the screws.

base unit

unit

are not loose and the cover is fixed.

not dislocated.

Mounting of the

Looseness of the

module

Connection status Terminal screw

loosening

Check that the module is

The module must be mounted Fix the module fixing hook

mounted and the module fixing and the module fixing hook

securely.

hook is fixed securely.

must be fixed.

Check for the terminal screw The terminal screws must not Retighten the terminal screws.

loosening.

be loose.

Clearance between the solderless terminals

Check for the clearance between the solderless terminals.

The proper clearance must be provided between solderless terminals.

Provide the proper clearance.

Connector loosening

Check for the cable connector The cable connector must not Connect the connector with no

loosening.

be loose.

loosening securely.

LED status

POWER LED (power supply module)
READY LED and RUN LED
ERROR LED, ERR LED, P ERR LED, and L ERR LED

Check that the LED is on. Check that the LED is on. Check that the LED is off.

The LED must be on. The LED must be on. The LED must be off.

When the judgment criteria is not satisfied, refer to the following and take the corrective action. User's Manual (Application) for the module used

BATTERY LED (CPU modules other than the R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU)

Check that the LED is off.

The LED must be off.

USER LED (CPU module)

Check that the LED is off.

The LED must be off.

I/O indicator LED (I/O module)

Check that the LED is on or off.

The LED turns on when I/O signals are on. The LED turns off when I/O signals are off.

179 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 6.1 Daily Inspection

6.2 Periodic Inspection

This section describes items that must be inspected one or two times every six months to one year. When the equipment has been relocated or modified, or wiring layout has been changed, inspect the items.

Item 1

Inspection Item

Environment

Ambient temperature*1

Inspection method
Measure the temperature by using a thermometer.

Judgment criteria 0 to 55*2

Corrective action
Create the environment that satisfies the judgment criteria

Ambient humidity

Measure the humidity by using 5 to 95%RH a hygrometer.

Atmosphere

Measure corrosive gases.

No corrosive gases

Power supply voltage check

Measure a voltage between the terminals of 100/200VAC and 24VDC.

85 to 264VAC 15.6 to 31.2VDC

Change the supply power.

Installation

Looseness and rattling

Touch the module to check for the looseness and rattling.

The module must be mounted securely.

Retighten the screws. If the module is loose, fix the module with screws.

Attachment of dirt and foreign matter

Check visually.

Dirt and foreign matter must not be attached.

Remove them. Clean the programmable controller.

Battery

Check the BATTERY LED on the CPU module.

The LED must be off.

Replace the battery when the LED is on.

Check the length of term after purchasing the battery.

The battery must not be used more than five years.

Replace the battery if it has been used more than 5 years.

Module diagnostics

Check that SM51 or SM52 is turned off using an engineering tool.
Check an event history using the module diagnostics.

SM51 or SM52 must be off.
An event history must not be updated.

Replace the battery when SM51 or SM52 is on.
GX Works3 Operating Manual

Maximum scan time

Check the values of SD526 and SD527 using an engineering tool.

Maximum scan time must be within the allowable range given in the specification of the system.

Specify causes that increase the scan time. Check the operation status of the trigger signal that passes through a loop if loop positions exist in the sequence program.

*1 The temperature in the control panel installed a programmable controller is called the ambient temperature. *2 When an extended temperature range base unit is used, each module can be used in the environment of 0 to 60.

180 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 6.2 Periodic Inspection

Battery replacement procedure
When the life of the battery comes to an end, follow the procedure below to replace the battery. Keep the programmable controller on for ten minutes or longer before removing the battery from the CPU module. Power off the programmable controller, and then replace the battery.

Replacement procedure for the Q6BAT

Replace the battery within the backup power time (three minutes).

The CPU module holds the data on the memory for three minutes by the capacitor even after the battery is removed. Note that

the data on the device/label memory may be erased if the replacement time exceeds the backup power time.
1. Back up the program and data. 2. Power off the programmable controller. 3. Remove the CPU module from the base unit. 4. Open the battery cover located on the bottom of the CPU module. 5. Disconnect the connector plug of the Q6BAT from the jack of the CPU

module. When disconnecting the connector, hold the connector part

so that the cables are not damaged.

6. Remove the Q6BAT from the battery cover. 7. Set a new Q6BAT to the cover in the right direction (with the positive

terminal of the battery facing the connector holder).
8. Securely insert the connector plug of the Q6BAT to the jack of the

CPU module. Set the connector (1) to the connector holder (2) on the

(1) (3)
(2)

cover.
9. Close the battery cover (3). 10. Mount the CPU module back on the base unit. 11. Power on the programmable controller. 12. Using the engineering tool, check that SM51 (Battery low latch) is off.

If SM51 is off, the battery has been replaced successfully.

If SM51 is on, the battery may not be installed properly. Repeat the

procedure from step 2. If SM51 remains on, the possible cause is a

hardware failure of the battery. Perform the procedure with a different

battery.

Replacement procedure from the Q6BAT to the Q7BATN-SET/Q7BAT-SET

Replace the battery within the backup power time (three minutes).

The CPU module holds the data on the memory for three minutes by the capacitor even after the battery is removed. Note that

the data on the device/label memory may be erased if the backup power time is exceeded.
1. Back up the program and data.

(1)

2. Power off the programmable controller.

(2)

3. Remove the CPU module from the base unit.

4. Open the battery cover located on the bottom of the CPU module.

5. Disconnect the connector plug of the Q6BAT from the jack of the CPU module.

When disconnecting the connector, hold the connector part so that the cables

are not damaged.

(3)

6. Securely insert the connector plug of the Q7BATN-SET/Q7BAT-SET to the jack

of the CPU module.

7. Set the connector (1) into the connector stopper (2) of the battery holder.

8. Attach the Q7BATN-SET/Q7BAT-SET (3) to the CPU module.*1

*1 Be careful not to let the battery cable get caught between the Q7BATN-SET/Q7BAT-SET and the CPU module when attaching the battery.

181 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 6.2 Periodic Inspection

Replacement procedure for the Q7BATN/Q7BAT

Replace the battery within the backup power time (three minutes).

The CPU module holds the data on the memory for three minutes by the capacitor even after the battery is removed. Note that

the data on the device/label memory may be erased if the backup power time is exceeded.
1. Back up the program and data. 2. Power off the programmable controller. 3. Remove the CPU module from the base unit. 4. Remove the battery holder. 5. Disconnect the connector plug of the Q7BATN/Q7BAT from the jack of the CPU

module. When disconnecting the connector, hold the connector part so that the

cables are not damaged.

(3)

6. Disengage the latches on both sides of the battery holder to disassemble the

holder into two, and remove the Q7BATN/Q7BAT.
7. Insert the new Q7BATN/Q7BAT into the holder in the correct orientation,

checking the positive/negative terminal markings. (For the Q7BATN, insert it at
(1)
a slight angle as shown in the figure.) Reassemble the battery holder, making

the battery cable come out of the hole in the holder connection. (Push the
(2)
holder parts in until they click.)
8. Securely insert the connector plug of the Q7BATN/Q7BAT to the jack of the

(4)

CPU module (4). Set the connector into the connector stopper (5) of the battery

holder.

(5)

9. Attach the battery holder (6) to the CPU module.

10. Mount the CPU module back on the base unit.

11. Power on the programmable controller.

12. Using the engineering tool, check that SM51 (Battery low latch) is off.

If SM51 is off, the battery has been replaced successfully.

If SM51 is on, the battery may not be installed properly. Repeat the procedure from

(6)

step 2. If SM51 remains on, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the battery.

Perform the procedure with a different battery.

182 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 6.2 Periodic Inspection

Replacement procedure for the FX3U-32BL

Replace the battery within the backup power time (10 days).

Note that the clock data may be erased if the backup power time is exceeded.
1. Power off the programmable controller.

2. Open the LED cover located on the front of the CPU module.

3. Take the used battery out of the battery compartment (1) and

(1)

(2)

disconnect the battery from the battery connector (2).

4. Connect the lead connector of the new battery to the battery

connector (2) with the correct orientation. Insert the new battery

to the battery compartment (1).

5. Close the LED cover located on the front of the CPU module.

6. Power on the programmable controller.

7. Using the engineering tool, check that SM51 (Battery low latch) is

off.

If SM51 is off, the battery has been replaced successfully. If SM51 is on, the battery may not be installed properly. Repeat the

procedure from step 2. If SM51 remains on, the possible cause is a

hardware failure of the battery. Perform the procedure with a different

battery.

Replacement procedure of redundant power supply modules

The following describes the replacement procedure for a redundant power supply module in the online state (power is on).
(Assuming that the other redundant power supply module is normally operating)
1. Check which redundant power supply module is to be replaced with either of the following methods.
� System monitor of an engineering tool
� SM151 (Power supply module failure detection) or SD151 (Power supply failure detection status)
2. Power off the input power supply of the redundant power supply module to be replaced. (A continuation error occurs.)*1 3. Replace the redundant power supply module with a new one.
When replacing a redundant power supply module, pay full attention to the mounting/removing procedure. ( Page 168
Mounting/Removing a Module or Terminal Block)
4. Power on the input power supply of the new redundant power supply module. 5. Check that the POWER LED turns on.*2
*1 When a remote head module is mounted on the right of the redundant power supply module, a continuation error is not detected by turning on and holding SB000F (Clear error).
*2 When SB000F (Clear error) of the remote head module has turned on, turn off it.

� If one redundant power supply module has failed, remove the module from the base unit and replace it with a normal one as soon as possible (within 14 days as a guide). Even if a redundant power supply module does not fail, replacement is recommended after five years.
� In a redundant power supply system, a continuation error occurs when either of redundant power supply modules has failed. Clear the error after replacing the defective redundant power supply module with a new one.
� If a power supply module other than a redundant power supply module is mounted, a continuation error occurs.

183 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 6.2 Periodic Inspection

APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Checking Production Information and
Firmware Version
Checking methods
This section describes how to check the production information and firmware version of a module.
Checking on the module
Rating plate
The rating plate is located on the side of the module. The production information (16 digits) of the module is shown on the SERIAL field.
(1) Production information (16 digits) (2) Relevant regulation standards (3) QR code

123456789ABCDEF

(1)

(2)

(3)
Production information marking
The production information (16 digits) of the module is printed on the marking on the front (at the bottom) of the module.
1234567890ABCDEF � R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU
1234567890ABCDEF

184 APPX Appendix 1 Checking Production Information and Firmware Version

Checking with the engineering tool
Product information list
The firmware version*1 and the production information (16 digits) of the module can be checked on the "Product Information List" window.
*1 For the RnENCPU, each firmware version of the CPU part and network part can be checked.
[Diagnostics] [System Monitor] [Product Information List] button
Module diagnostics
The production information (16 digits) of the module can be checked on the "Module Diagnostics" window. [Diagnostics] [Module Diagnostics]
A
185 APPX
Appendix 1 Checking Production Information and Firmware Version

Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

This function enables users to update the firmware versions of modules by using firmware update files. (For the firmware update file, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.) The following two methods for updating firmware are available.

Update method

Description

Update using an engineering tool

The firmware versions of multiple modules can be changed at a time by using an engineering tool.

Update using an SD memory card

The firmware version of a module can be changed just using an SD memory card. Dedicated software is not required.

Confirm the safety of the system before updating the firmware version. If the firmware version of CPU module is updated with being connected to the other system through a network, a system error (stop error) may occur.
Update using an engineering tool
The firmware versions of multiple modules can be changed at a time by using an engineering tool.
(1) Update writing CPU module (2) Modules to be updated

Firmware update file

(1) (2)

The firmware version of a module is updated by writing the firmware update information for updating firmware to the module from the CPU module. A CPU module that writes the information is called an update writing CPU module.

Update writing CPU modules and modules to be updated
This section lists the models of update writing CPU modules and modules to be updated.
Update writing CPU module
The following CPU modules can be used as update writing CPU modules. � Programmable controller CPU � Process CPU

186 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Modules to be updated
The following indicates the update writing CPU module types.
� Rn(1): R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU � Rn(2): R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU � RnEN: RnENCPU (CPU part)/RnENCPU (network part) � RnP: Process CPU

Modules to be updated Product Programmable controller CPU*1*4
Process CPU Redundant function module CC-Link IE Controller Network module CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module Ethernet-equipped module CC-Link IE TSN master/local module Serial communication module*3*4

Model
R00CPU R01CPU, R02CPU R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU R6RFM RJ71GP21-SX, RJ71GP21S-SX RJ71GF11-T2

Firmware version "01" or later "14" or later "46" or later
"46"/"42" or later
"24" or later
"01" or later "01" or later*7

RJ71EN71 RJ71GN11-T2*2 RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2, RJ71C24-R4

"01" or later

Firmware version of the update writing CPU module

Version of the engineering tool

� Rn(1): "14" or later � Rn(2): "46" or later � RnEN: "46"/"42" or
later � RnP: "24" or later

1.060N or later

RnP: "24" or later*5
� Rn(1): "14" or later � Rn(2): "46" or later � RnEN: "46"/"42" or
later � RnP: "24" or later

1.065T or later 1.060N or later

MELSECNET/H network module GPIB interface module
Analog-digital converter module Channel isolated analog-digital converter module (with signal conditioning function) High-speed analog-digital converter module HART-enabled analog-digital converter module Digital-analog converter module

RJ71LP21-25 RJ71GB91 R60AD4, R60ADI8, R60ADV8 R60AD6-DG
R60ADH4 R60ADI8-HA R60DA4, R60DAI8, R60DAV8

� Rn(1): "18" or later � Rn(2): "50" or later � RnEN: "50"/"46" or
later � RnP: "24" or later

1.063R or later 1.072A or later 1.065T or later

1.070Y or later 1.065T or later

High speed digital-analog converter module
Channel isolated RTD input module
Channel isolated thermocouple input module

R60DAH4
R60RD8-G R60TD8-G

1.072A or later

Channel isolated pulse input module Flexible high-speed I/O control module Positioning module*4

RD60P8-G RD40PD01 RD75P2, RD75P4, RD75D2, RD75D4

"06" or later*6

1.070Y or later 1.065T or later

*1 Update simultaneously the CPU part and network part of RnENCPU. *2 The model with the main base unit can be updated. *3 When using the following update writing CPU modules, set the control CPU of the module to the CPU No.1.
R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU with firmware version of "17" or earlier Programmable controller CPU (excluding the R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU) with firmware version of "49" or earlier *4 For the precautions, refer to the User's Manual (Application) for the module used. *5 Only a Process CPU (redundant mode) can be used as an update writing CPU module. *6 A module whose 3rd and 4th digits from the left of the production information are "13" or earlier are excluded. *7 When the firmware version is "52" or later, the firmware versions of the update writing CPU module are as follows: Rn(1): "18" or later Rn(2): "50" or later RnEN: "50"/"46" or later RnP: "24" or later

187 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

To update the firmware version of CPU module not available for the update using an engineering tool, use an SD memory card. ( Page 201 Update using an SD memory card) The firmware version of R00CPU is updated by using models other than the R00CPU as the update writing CPU module.
System configuration
The following figure shows a configuration example of the system.
(2) (1)
(2) (3)
(2)
(2)
(1) Update writing CPU module (2) Modules to be updated (3) Engineering tool
� Mount the update writing CPU module on the CPU slot, and mount the modules to be updated on the slot of No.0 and later. ( Page 186 Update writing CPU modules and modules to be updated)
� The firmware versions of 65 modules can be updated in a single CPU system or multiple CPU system. The firmware version of the update writing CPU module only can be updated. In a redundant system, the module mounted to the main base unit can be updated. (The module cannot be updated via a network such as a module of the remote station.)
� Connect the engineering tool and update writing CPU module using a USB or Ethernet (Ethernet port direct connection/ connection via hub).
188 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Ex. When one CPU module and three intelligent function modules are targeted
Ex. In a multiple CPU system, when two CPU modules and four intelligent function modules are targeted
The intelligent function modules controlled by other CPU modules than the host CPU module can be targeted.
A
Ex. When only the update writing CPU module is targeted
189 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Ex. In a redundant system, when one CPU module*1, one redundant function module, and four network modules are targeted *1 In a redundant system, a Process CPU (redundant mode) is used as an update writing CPU module. Ex. In a redundant system with redundant extension base unit, when modules on extension base units are targeted (only when the extension base units are connected to the control system)
190 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Update procedure
Preparation

For the preparation for an update in a redundant system, refer to the following. Page 193 Preparation (in a redundant system)
1. From your local Mitsubishi representative, obtain firmware update information for the model where the firmware update
will be executed.
Ex. For the RnCPU and Process CPU

.zip Firmware update information

$FWUPDFILE$ Firmware update folder

mmmm_vv.SYF Firmware update file

FWUPDP.SYU Firmware update prohibition file

SUPPORTED_PRODUCTS.TXT

Target model list file

Ex. For the RnENCPU

.zip Firmware update information

$FWUPDFILE$ Firmware update folder

(1)
mmmm_vv.SYF Firmware update file

FWUPDP.SYU Firmware update prohibition file

(2)
mmmm_vv.SYF Firmware update file

SUPPORTED_PRODUCTS.TXT Target model list file (1) For the CPU part (2) For the network part
2. Unzip the firmware update information (ZIP file). mmmm of the firmware update file represents a model name and vv of
the firmware update file represents a firmware version.
191 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

3. Connect the engineering tool and update writing CPU module using a USB or built-in Ethernet (Ethernet port direct
connection/connection via hub).
4. Check that the devices other than the CPU module and the programmable controller that execute the update function
stop. (Power off the other systems and devices connecting the programmable controller. If the systems or devices cannot be powered off, unplug the communication cable of them.)
5. Check that no function is executed on the update writing CPU module. 6. Check that the file operations (such as the write to programmable controller, online change, and file transfer function) are
not executed on the modules to be updated and those not to be updated. (Starting the firmware update during file operations may result in corruption of the file.)
7. Clear the setting for firmware update prohibition if it has been set. ( Page 197 Setting for firmware update
prohibition)
8. Check that the stop error in the update writing CPU module and any error in the module to be updated do not occur. 9. The data such as programs and parameters are backed up. (In a multiple CPU system, the data of the CPU module of
No.2 or later are backed up.)
192 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Preparation (in a redundant system)
This section describes the preparation for an update in a redundant system.
1. From your local Mitsubishi representative, obtain firmware update information for the model where the firmware update
will be executed. (For examples of the folder structure, refer to Page 191 Preparation.)
2. Unzip the firmware update information (ZIP file). mmmm of the firmware update file represents a model name and vv of
the firmware update file represents a firmware version.
3. Connect the engineering tool and update writing CPU module using a USB or built-in Ethernet (Ethernet port direct

connection/connection via hub).

Whether to stop the system Procedure control

When updating the firmware version without stopping the system control

To update the firmware versions of modules in the control system, turn on SM1646 (System switching by a user) and switch the system to the standby system.*1
Stop the standby system. Unplug the tracking cable of the standby system as well as the communication cables and wires of the other systems and devices connected to the standby system.*2*3

When updating the firmware version with the system control stopped

Set the system to be updated to the control system. Set "Specify Redundant CPU" in the connection destination settings to "Not Specified" and connect the engineering tool and the CPU module of the control system. Stop the control system and power off the standby system.

*1 In a redundant system with redundant extension base unit, the firmware versions of the modules on extension base units cannot be updated while control of the redundant system is operating. To update them, follow the procedure for updating the firmware version with the system control stopped.
*2 In the network configuration of CC-Link IE Controller Network and CC-Link IE Field Network, both systems may be set to the control system. If the cables are already unplugged, however, the system control is not affected. The firmware update also is not affected.
*3 When "Control System Start-up Setting (Input (X))" is set to "Enable", turn off external input signals because the system may be started up as the control system at the completion of the firmware update.
4. Check that the devices other than the CPU module and the programmable controller that execute the update function

stop. (Power off the other systems and devices connecting the programmable controller. If the systems or devices cannot

be powered off, unplug the communication cable of them.) When the firmware update is executed to the control system,

the system control of the updated module stops. Before executing the firmware update, check the following: The system to be updated has stopped; and the communication cables and wires of other systems, which are connected to the

system to be updated via networks, has been disconnected.

5. Check that no function is executed on the update writing CPU module.

6. Check that the file operations (such as the write to programmable controller, online change, and file transfer function) are

not executed on the modules to be updated and those not to be updated. (Starting the firmware update during file

operations may result in corruption of the file.)

7. Clear the setting for firmware update prohibition if it has been set. ( Page 197 Setting for firmware update

prohibition)

8. Check that the stop error in the update writing CPU module and any error in the module to be updated do not occur.

9. The data such as programs and parameters of the module in the system to be updated is backed up.

193 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Operation of engineering tool
On (red) On (green) On (red) On (green) On (green) On (green) Flashing (green) Flashing (green)
194 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

1. Open the "Update Firmware" window from the
engineering tool. [Tool] [Firmware Update]
2. Check the checkbox for the module to be
updated.*1*3 (Only the target module to be updated can be selected. ( Page 186 Update writing CPU modules and modules to be updated))
3. Click the [...] button for the module to be
updated to select the firmware update file (*.SYF).
4. After the completion of firmware update, the
CPU module is reset automatically. Uncheck the checkbox not to be reset the CPU module automatically.*2
5. Click the [Update] button, displaying the
precautions on firmware update. Click the [Yes] button to execute the firmware update.
6. The update status during the firmware update
is checked on the "Update Firmware" window in the engineering tool and the LED indication on the update writing CPU module. For details on LED indications, refer to the following. Every module specified to be updated, whether the firmware update is completed successfully or completed with an error, is updated.
When the update status is "in standby" or "in transferring", the READY LED turns on in red and the PROGRAM RUN LED turns on in green.
When the update status is "in writing", the READY LED turns on in red, and the PROGRAM RUN LED and FUNCTION LED turn on in green.
When the update status is "update completion", the READY LED turns on in green, and the PROGRAM RUN LED and FUNCTION LED flash in green.

7. After the firmware update is completed, the
automatic reset window or the manual reset window is displayed. Click the [OK] button. When the manual reset is selected, reset the module manually.
8. Check the result of firmware update in the
"Status" column on the "Update Firmware" window. The detailed information can be checked on "Event History".

9. When an error occurs, check the error code on

"Event history". MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual

(Application)

10. The backed up programs and parameters are

restored.

For how to restore the data in a redundant system, refer to the following. ( Page 196 Procedure to

restore the prepared backup data in a redundant

system).

11. Check the system operation.

In a redundant system, check it switching the

systems as needed.

*1 If a module cannot be selected even though there is the firmware update information for it, update the engineering tool to the latest version and try again.
*2 To execute the remote RESET function, use the remote operation function of the engineering tool. In addition, set "Remote Reset Setting" to "Enable" in the "CPU Parameter" in advance.
*3 Some modules may be reset while the firmware update is being executed. *4 A stop error may occur after reset, depending on the control/standby system startup settings. The systems are not switched in this case.
Check the connection of the tracking cables and reset the system where the firmware update has been executed.

195 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Procedure to restore the prepared backup data in a redundant system
The following table shows the procedures.

Whether to stop the system Procedure control

When updating the firmware version without stopping the system control

Connect the tracking cable and restore the backed up programs and parameters to the standby system. Connect the communication cables and wires of the other systems and devices, and run the standby system. When updating the firmware versions of modules in the control system, turn on SM1646 (System switching by a user) and switch the system to the standby system.*1 Unplug the tracking cables and connect the standby system and the engineering tool. Check that the standby system is in the STOP state, then execute the firmware update. (Return to procedure 1.)

When updating the firmware version with the system control stopped

Restore the backed up programs and parameters to the control system. Restart both systems simultaneously. When executing the firmware update to the standby system, unplug the tracking cable and connect the standby system and the engineering tool. Check that the standby system is in the STOP state, then execute the firmware update. (Return to procedure 1.)

*1 A stop error may occur after reset, depending on the control/standby system startup settings. The systems are not switched in this case. Check the connection of the tracking cables and reset the system where the firmware update has been executed.
When the update writing CPU module does not start up due to update failure
Update the firmware version of the update writing CPU module using an SD memory card. ( Page 201 Update using an
SD memory card)

The R00CPU and intelligent function modules are not available for the update using an SD memory card. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

196 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Setting for firmware update prohibition
This section describes how to prohibit the firmware update. To prohibit the firmware update, write a firmware update prohibition file to the CPU module and set a file password.
1. Using an engineering tool, write the firmware update prohibition file (FWUPDP.SYU) to the "$MELPRJ$" folder in the
data memory of the CPU module. The firmware update prohibition file (FWUPDP.SYU) is included in the firmware update information obtained for the preparation. ( Page 191 Preparation)
[Online] [User Data] [Write]

A
2. Using the engineering tool, set a file password to the firmware update prohibition file.
[Project] [Security] [File Password Setting]

For the setting method of file password, refer to the following. GX Works3 Operating Manual
3. Power off and on or reset the CPU module.

197 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Clearing the setting for firmware update prohibition
This section describes how to remove the prohibition on the firmware update. To execute the firmware update, clear the setting for firmware update prohibition using an engineering tool.
1. Delete the file password set to the firmware update prohibition file.
[Project] [Security] [File Password Setting]
2. Delete the firmware update prohibition file from the "$MELPRJ$" folder in the data memory of the CPU module.
[Online] [User Data] [Delete] For details on the operation method, refer to the following. GX Works3 Operating Manual
198 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Precautions

For the precautions of the modules used, refer to the User's Manual for each module.

Precautions on firmware update files
� Check the target model and obtain the firmware update file that matches with the target model from your local Mitsubishi representative. The firmware update is not executed if the firmware update file does not match with the target model.
� Do not modify the firmware update file (file name and data) obtained from your local Mitsubishi representative. � When multiple firmware update files are obtained for one module, do not modify the combination of file versions. Execute
the firmware update of the update files simultaneously.

Precautions for executing the firmware update
� Before starting the firmware update, check that the module to be updated has started up normally.

� Check the following before executing the firmware update: The programmable controller has stopped; the system to be

updated has stopped; and the communication cables and wires of the other systems, which are connected with the system

to be updated via networks, has been disconnected.

� Starting the firmware update during the file operations may result in corruption of the file. Before starting the firmware

update, check that all file operations are finished.

� Check that the file operations (such as the write to programmable controller, online change, and file transfer function) are

not executed on the modules to be updated and those not to be updated. Starting the firmware update during file operations

may result in corruption of the file.

� When executing the firmware update for multiple modules, it takes some time until update completion. The firmware update

for one module takes approximately four minutes.

� If the CPU module is powered off while the firmware update is being executed, the CPU module may fail. In this case, the

CPU module can be recovered by executing the firmware update using an SD memory card.

� Do not execute the other functions while the firmware update is being executed. � Check the system operation before and after the firmware update. If an error occurs in the system after the firmware

update, return the version to the previous one. When returning the version to the previous one, please consult your local

Mitsubishi representative.

� When the firmware update is performed with the checkbox of "Automatically Reset After Completing Update" unchecked,

reset the CPU module manually after the firmware update is completed. To use the remote RESET function, set "Remote

Reset Setting" to "Enable" in the "CPU Parameter" in advance. When "Remote Reset Setting" is set to "Disable", visiting

the site where the programmable controller is installed is necessary for resetting the CPU module.

� The update writing CPU module stores the event occurrence time by the internal time of CPU module. The time is

displayed on "Output Log" of the "Update Firmware" window by the time of personal computer. The time of "Event History"

matches the time of "Output Log" by synchronizing the internal time of CPU module with the time on the personal computer.

� When the following operations are executed during the firmware update, the firmware update may be completed with an

error, resulting in failure of the module. In addition, the module may not start up or the firmware update may not restart.

Execute the firmware update using an engineering tool carefully.
� Turning off or resetting the CPU modules � Changing the operating status using the remote operation from the engineering tool or the switch of the CPU module � Operating from an external device � Connecting/disconnecting the connection cable between the update writing CPU module and engineering tool � Connecting/disconnecting the module to be updated � Starting the firmware update from the engineering tool � Finishing the engineering tool

� Do not insert/remove the SD memory card during the firmware update. Doing so may destroy the SD memory card data.

The SD CARD OFF button is not available during the firmware update. Do not press the button to remove the SD memory

card.

� The module during the online module change cannot be selected on the "Firmware Update" window in the engineering tool.

After the firmware update is executed to even one module, the online module change is not started/continued to all

modules.

199 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Precautions of when the firmware update is being executed in a multiple CPU system
� Do not execute the firmware update during the remote operation from the other engineering tool and the remote operation during the firmware update to the CPU module of No.2 or later in a multiple CPU system. If the state of CPU module is changed to the RUN state during the firmware update, the data will not be written, resulting in failure of the module.
� When the firmware version of the targeted module does not support this method (the update using an engineering tool), update it to the version that supports this method using an SD memory card first. Then, execute the update. If the firmware update is executed to the CPU module from the engineering tool, the operation is not guaranteed.
� Check that the file operations including the write to programmable controller, online change, and file transfer function are not executed on the CPU module of No.2 or later, which are not to be updated. Starting the firmware update during file operations may result in corruption of the file.
Precautions of when the firmware update is completed
After the firmware update is completed, power off and on or reset the update writing CPU module. To execute the remote RESET function, use the remote operation function of the engineering tool. If the other function is executed without the CPU module being reset or powered off and on, the operation of all modules and the display on the engineering tool are not guaranteed.
Precautions of when the firmware update is suspended
During the firmware update, when the engineering tool is finished, when the personal computer running the engineering tool is shut down, or when a communication error occurs, the update is suspended. The reset using the automatic reset setting in the engineering tool is not executed. Check that the data is not being writing using the LED, and reset the CPU module manually.
Precautions of when the firmware version is changed to the previous version
Using an engineering tool, the firmware version of the CPU module can be changed to the previous version that is not available for the firmware update using an engineering tool. When updating the firmware version again, update the version using an SD memory card.
Precautions for redundant system configuration
� When the firmware update is executed to the control system, the system control of the updated module stops. Before executing the firmware update, check the following: The system to be updated has stopped; and the communication cables and wires of other systems, which are connected to the system to be updated via networks, has been disconnected.
� Before executing the firmware update without stopping the system control, unplug the tracking cable. If the firmware update is executed with the tracking cable connected, the operation is not guaranteed.
� When executing the firmware update without stopping the system control, if an error occurs in the control system before the update is completed in the standby system, the system control stops.
� The firmware update is not executed to the system that the firmware update prohibition is set to. When the firmware update should not be executed to both systems, set the firmware update prohibition to both systems.
� Do not switch the system during the firmware update. Doing so can cause the system to stop or the firmware update to fail. � In a redundant system with redundant extension base unit, do not execute the firmware update of modules in the control
system while the standby system is operating. If executed, update may fail. � When updating modules on extension base units, connect the computer directly to the CPU module of the control system.
If updated connecting the computer to the CPU module of the standby system, update fails.
200 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Update using an SD memory card
The firmware versions of the CPU module and intelligent function module are updated using an SD memory card. The firmware version of a module is updated just using an SD memory card. Dedicated software is not required.

Firmware update file

Target models

The following table lists the target models.

CPU module

Module Programmable controller CPU*1
Process CPU C Controller module

Model R01CPU, R02CPU R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU
R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU R12CCPU-V

Applicable module firmware version "01" or later "23" or later CPU part: "38" or later Network part: "32" or later "14" or later "09" or later

*1 For the RnENCPU, firmware versions of the CPU part and network part are updated.
Intelligent function module

Module

Model

C intelligent function module
MES interface module High speed data logger module OPC UA server module Recorder module Camera recorder module

RD55UP06-V RD55UP12-V RD81MES96N RD81DL96
RD81OPC96 RD81RC96 RD81RC96-CA

Applicable module firmware version

Applicable engineering tool version

"07" or later

1.050C or later

"01" or later "01" or later

1.065T or later 1.060N or later

"08" or later

1.065T or later

"04" or later "01" or later "01" or later

1.065T or later 1.065T or later 1.072A or later

201 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Update procedure
Preparation
1. From your local Mitsubishi representative, obtain the firmware update information for the model to which the update will
be executed. The following figures show folder structures of the firmware update information. mmmm of the firmware update file represents a model name and vv of the firmware update file represents a firmware version. � For the RnCPU and Process CPU

.zip Firmware update information

$FWUPDFILE$ Firmware update folder

mmmm_vv.SYF Firmware update file

FWUPDP.SYU Firmware update prohibition file

� For the RnENCPU
.zip Firmware update information

SUPPORTED_PRODUCTS.TXT Target model list file
$FWUPDFILE$ Firmware update folder

(1)
mmmm_vv.SYF Firmware update file

FWUPDP.SYU Firmware update prohibition file

(2)
mmmm_vv.SYF Firmware update file

SUPPORTED_PRODUCTS.TXT Target model list file
(1) For the CPU part (2) For the network part
� For the C Controller module or intelligent function module

.zip Firmware update information

FWUPDFILE Firmware update folder

mmmm_vv.SYF Firmware update file

202 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

For the C Controller module or intelligent function module, a firmware update prohibition file and a target model list file are not stored in a ZIP file. In addition, the name of the "$FWUPDFILE$" folder will be "FWUPDFILE".
2. Unzip the firmware update information (ZIP file). 3. Use a personal computer to save the "$FWUPDFILE$" folder in the root directory of an SD memory card. If the
"$FWUPDFILE$" folder already exists in the SD memory card, delete the "$FWUPDFILE$" folder before saving the folder.
$FWUPDFILE$
4. Mount the module on the base unit.
� For the CPU module Mount the CPU module on the CPU slot.
For the Process CPU (redundant mode), the firmware can be updated without interrupting the redundant system. For the procedure (operation), refer to the following. Page 205 Operation (firmware update of the Process CPU (redundant mode) without interrupting the redundant system)
A
When using the RnENCPU, configure a single CPU system. If a multiple CPU system is configured, the firmware is not updated. � For the intelligent function module Mount the CPU module on the CPU slot, and mount the intelligent function module on a slot located after the CPU slot.
5. Clear the setting for firmware update prohibition if it has been set. ( Page 212 Clearing the setting for firmware
update prohibition) Use a personal computer to save the "$FWUPDFILE$" folder in an SD memory card. The "$FWUPDFILE$" folder cannot be saved in an SD memory card using an engineering tool.
6. Before updating the firmware version, back up the data such as programs and parameters.
203 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Operation (programmable controller CPU and Process CPU)
1. Power off the CPU module and insert the SD memory card to it.
2. Press and hold the SD CARD OFF button (1) and power on the CPU module, and subsequently the firmware update is
executed.*1*2*3*4

(1)
While the firmware update is being executed, READY LED turns on in red and PROGRAM RUN LED turns on in green.
On (red) On (green)

*1 Resetting the CPU module while pressing the SD CARD OFF button also executes the firmware update. *2 Note, for the programmable controller CPU (excluding the R01CPU, R02CPU, and RnENCPU) with firmware version earlier than "28",
just powering on or resetting the CPU module will execute the firmware update, even without pressing the SD CARD OFF button. *3 Do not update the firmware version of the Process CPU while the automatic restoration with the SD CARD OFF button is being
executed. If the both functions are executed simultaneously, the automatic restoration with the SD CARD OFF button does not work. *4 In the Process CPU, the 300CH error is detected if a firmware update file is not stored in the SD memory card.
3. When the firmware update is completed successfully, the PROGRAM RUN LED flashes in green. If the firmware update
failed, the ERROR LED*1 flashes in red. Take necessary actions for the failure. ( Page 215 Troubleshooting)

Normally finished

Failed

On (red) Flashing (green)

On (red) or off Flashing (red)

*1 For the RnENCPU, the LED of the CPU part flashes.
During execution of the firmware update, the CPU module cannot communicate with other modules, and an engineering tool or external devices cannot communicate with the CPU module.
4. Once the firmware update is complete, power off the CPU module and remove the SD memory card.*1 After that, power
on or reset the CPU module.
*1 To retry the firmware update, leave the SD memory card in the CPU module, press and hold the SD CARD OFF button, and power off and on or reset the CPU module.
5. The backed up programs and parameters are restored. 6. Check the system operation.

204 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Operation (firmware update of the Process CPU (redundant mode) without interrupting the redundant system)
1. Remove the tracking cable from the redundant function module of the standby system.
2. Power off the CPU module of the standby system and insert an SD memory card to the CPU module.
3. Press and hold the SD CARD OFF button (1) and power on the CPU module, and subsequently the firmware update is
executed.*1*2*3

(1)
While the firmware update is being executed, READY LED turns on in red and PROGRAM RUN LED turns on in green.
On (red) On (green)

*1 Resetting the CPU module while pressing the SD CARD OFF button also executes the firmware update.

*2 Do not update the firmware version while the automatic restoration with the SD CARD OFF button is being executed. If the both

functions are executed simultaneously, the automatic restoration with the SD CARD OFF button does not work.

*3 The 300CH error is detected if a firmware update file is not stored in the SD memory card.
4. When the firmware update is completed successfully, the PROGRAM RUN LED flashes in green. If the firmware update

failed, the ERROR LED flashes in red. Take necessary actions for the failure. ( Page 215 Troubleshooting)

Normally finished

Failed

On (red) Flashing (green)

On (red) or off Flashing (red)

During execution of the firmware update, the CPU module cannot communicate with other modules, and an engineering tool or external devices cannot communicate with the CPU module.
5. Remove the SD memory card and power off the standby system. Then, connect a tracking cable to the redundant
function module of the standby system. After connecting a tracking cable, power on the standby system.*1
*1 To retry the firmware update, leave the SD memory card in the CPU module, press and hold the SD CARD OFF button, and power on the standby system.

205 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

6. To ensure that the systems are ready for the system switching, check the status of the following:
� BACKUP LED: On*1 � SM1646 (System switching by a user): On
*1 When a network module is used, returning disconnected stations to the system may take some time after the standby system is powered on or reset.
When the systems are ready for the system switching, switch the systems using the engineering tool. For the system switching using the engineering tool, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
7. Remove the tracking cable from the redundant function module of the new standby system. 8. Take the same steps from Step 2 to 4 for the CPU module of the new standby system to update the firmware version. 9. Remove the SD memory card and power off the new standby system. Then, connect a tracking cable to the redundant
function module of the new standby system. After connecting a tracking cable, power on the new standby system.*1
*1 To retry the firmware update, leave the SD memory card in the CPU module, press and hold the SD CARD OFF button, and power on the new standby system.
10. To change the system setting (control/standby) to the same state before the firmware update, switch the systems using
the engineering tool. Before switching the systems, take the step 5 to ensure that the systems are ready for the system switching.
206 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Operation (C Controller module)
1. Power off the C Controller module and insert the SD memory card to it. 2. Set the MODE/SELECT switch (1) on the MODE position.
(1)
3. Power on the C Controller module with the MODE/SELECT switch set to the MODE position.
� Normal: The BUS RUN LED turns on in green, and "M-00" is displayed on the dot matrix LED.
On (green)
� Error: The ERROR LED flashes in red, and an error code is displayed on the dot matrix LED. ( Page 215 Troubleshooting)
4. Release the MODE/SELECT switch and put it back to the center position. 5. Set the MODE/SELECT switch (2) to the SELECT position. Every time the switch is set to the SELECT position, the
value of mode displayed on the dot matrix LED is changed. Repeat this switch movement until "0020" is displayed on the dot matrix LED.
A
(2)
6. Set the RESET/STOP/RUN switch (3) to the RUN position.
(3)
7. The BUS RUN LED flashes in green.
Flashing (green)
207 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

8. Check that the BUS RUN LED turns on in green and "0000" is displayed on the dot matrix LED, then power off and on or
reset the C Controller module.

On (green)
9. The firmware update is executed. While the firmware update is being executed, READY LED turns on in red and BUS
RUN LED turns on in green.

On (red) On (green)

10. When the firmware update is completed successfully, the BUS RUN LED flashes in green. If the firmware update failed,

the READY LED turns off, turns on, or flashes in red, and the ERROR LED flashes in red. Take necessary actions for the

failure. ( Page 215 Troubleshooting)

Normally finished

Failed

On (red) Flashing (green)

Flashing (red) Off

Flashing (red) On (red) or flashing (red)
During execution of the firmware update, the C Controller module cannot communicate with other modules, and an engineering tool or external devices cannot communicate with the C Controller module.

208 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Operation (intelligent function module)
1. Power off the target module, and insert the SD memory card to it. 2. Set "Mode Settings" of the target module to "Firmware update" in the engineering tool.
[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] [(the target module)] [Basic Setting] [Various Operations Settings] [Mode Settings]
3. Check that the operating status of the CPU module is the STOP state, and write parameters. 4. Reset the CPU module.
After the CPU module is reset, the firmware update is executed. While the update is being executed, the RUN LED on the target module flashes in red.
Ex. (Example) C intelligent function module

Flashing (red)
5. Once the firmware update is completed successfully, the RUN LED on the target module turns on in red. If the firmware
update failed, the RUN LED turns off, turns on in red, or flashes in red, and the ERR LED flashes in red. Take necessary actions for the failure. ( Page 215 Troubleshooting)
Ex. (Example) C intelligent function module

Normally finished

Failed

On (red)

Flashing (red) Off
A

Flashing (red) On (red) or flashing (red)
6. Change "Mode Settings" of the target module to "Online" in the engineering tool.
[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] [(the target module)] [Basic Setting] [Various Operations Settings] [Mode Settings]
7. Write parameters to the CPU module. 8. Reset the CPU module.
During the execution of the firmware update, the engineering tool or external devices cannot communicate with the intelligent function module.

209 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Checking the version after the firmware update (for the CPU module)
1. Power off and on the CPU module and check that the firmware version is updated. Although an error may occur at
power-on, the error can be cleared by following the procedure of step 2 and later. ( Page 213 Result of the firmware update)
For the programmable controller CPU (excluding the R01CPU, R02CPU, and RnENCPU) with a firmware version earlier than "28", remove an SD memory card before powering on the CPU module. If not, the firmware update will be executed again.
2. Initialize the CPU module where the firmware is updated.
[Online] [CPU Memory Operation]
3. Write the data, which are backed up before the firmware update, to the CPU module. Then, power off and on the CPU
module.
Checking the version after the firmware update (for the intelligent function module)
1. Power off the CPU module. 2. Remove the SD memory card from the intelligent function module. 3. Power on the CPU module, and check that the firmware version is updated. ( Page 213 Result of the firmware
update)
210 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Setting for firmware update prohibition
This section describes how to prohibit the firmware update.
Programmable controller CPU and Process CPU
To prohibit the firmware update, write a firmware update prohibition file to the CPU module and set a file password.
1. Using an engineering tool, write the firmware update prohibition file (FWUPDP.SYU) to the "$MELPRJ$" folder in the
data memory of the CPU module. The firmware update prohibition file (FWUPDP.SYU) is included in the firmware update information obtained for the preparation. ( Page 202 Preparation)
[Online] [User Data] [Write]

A
2. Using the engineering tool, set a file password to the firmware update prohibition file.
[Project] [Security] [File Password Setting]

For the setting method of file password, refer to the following. GX Works3 Operating Manual

211 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

C Controller module
To prohibit the firmware update, set a file password by using the C Controller module dedicated function (CCPU_LockFWUpdate). For details on the C Controller module dedicated function, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module Programming Manual
MES interface module
To prohibit the firmware update, set a password on the "Manage MES Interface Module" window of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool. For details on the "Manage MES Interface Module" window, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R MES Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
High speed data logger module
To prohibit the firmware update, set a password on the "Manage" window of High Speed Data Logger Module Configuration Tool. For details on the "Manage" window, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual (Application)
OPC UA server module
To prohibit the firmware update, set a password on the "OPC UA Server Module Manage" window of OPC UA Server Module Configuration Tool. For details on the "OPC UA Server Module Manage" window, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R OPC UA Server Module User's Manual (Application)
Clearing the setting for firmware update prohibition
This section describes how to remove the prohibition on the firmware update.
Programmable controller CPU and Process CPU
To execute the firmware update, clear the setting for firmware update prohibition using an engineering tool.
1. Delete the file password set to the firmware update prohibition file.
[Project] [Security] [File Password Setting]
2. Delete the firmware update prohibition file from the "$MELPRJ$" folder in the data memory of the CPU module.
[Online] [User Data] [Delete] For details on the operation method, refer to the following. GX Works3 Operating Manual
C Controller module
By applying the C Controller module dedicated function (CCPU_UnLockFWUpdate), the prohibition on the firmware update function can be removed. For details on the C Controller module dedicated function, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module Programming Manual
MES interface module
The prohibition of the firmware update can be removed on the "Manage MES Interface Module" window of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool. For details on the "Manage MES Interface Module" window, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R MES Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
High speed data logger module
The prohibition of the firmware update can be removed on the "Manage" window of High Speed Data Logger Module Configuration Tool. For details on the "Manage" window, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual (Application)
212 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

OPC UA server module
The prohibition of the firmware update can be removed on the "OPC UA Server Module Manage" window of OPC UA Server Module Configuration Tool. For details on the "OPC UA Server Module Manage" window, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R OPC UA Server Module User's Manual (Application)
Result of the firmware update
The result of the firmware update can be checked by the following method.
Special relay, special register (CPU module)
Check if the firmware update is normally finished or failed. If the firmware update failed, an error code will be stored in SD922. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application), MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Application)) � SM922 (Firmware update completion with/without an error) � SD904, SD905 (Latest firmware update information (Network)) � SD912 to SD920 (Latest firmware update information (CPU))*1 � SD921, SD922 (Latest firmware update result)
*1 For the RnENCPU, information on the CPU part is displayed.
Buffer memory (intelligent function module)
Check if the firmware update is normally finished or failed. ( Manuals for each intelligent function module used) � Firmware update completion with/without an error � Latest firmware update result
Event history function
Refer to event codes to check if the firmware update succeeded or failed. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application), MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Application), Manuals for each intelligent function module used)
A
213 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

History of the firmware update
The history of the firmware update can be checked by the following method.
Special register (CPU module)
Time when the firmware update was executed, versions before and after the update, and the result of the previous update can be checked. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application), MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Application)) � SD906, SD907 (Previous firmware update information (Network)) � SD923 to SD931 (Previous firmware update information (CPU))*1 � SD932, SD933 (Previous firmware update result)
*1 For the RnENCPU, information on the CPU part is displayed.
Buffer memory (intelligent function module)
Time when the firmware update was executed, versions before and after the update, and the result of the previous update can be checked. ( Manuals for each intelligent function module used) � Previous firmware update information � Previous firmware update result
Precautions
For the precautions, refer to the User's Manual (Application) for the module used.
Precautions for firmware update files
� Check the target model and obtain the firmware update file that matches with the target model from your local Mitsubishi representative. The firmware update is not executed if the firmware update file does not match with the target model.
� Do not modify the firmware update file (file name and data) obtained from your local Mitsubishi representative. � When multiple firmware update files are obtained for one module, do not modify the combination of file versions. Execute
the firmware update using all the update files at the same time.
Precautions of when the firmware update is being executed
� Do not power off or reset the CPU module during execution of the firmware update. If the firmware update is suspended, it automatically restarts by powering off and on or resetting the CPU module.
� Do not remove the SD memory card from the CPU module during execution of the firmware update. If removed before the update is completed, the update may fail.
� Do not execute the online module change during execution of the firmware update.
Precautions on the backup data writing
The free space in the program memory may be insufficient when data backed up is written to the CPU module. In this case, perform any of the following operations and write the data again. � Reduce the setting value of "Allocate Memory for Online Program Change". � Reduce the number of steps in programs.
214 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Troubleshooting
CPU module
If the firmware update failed, check the error codes that are stored in SD922 and SD933. After powering off and on or resetting the CPU module, take appropriate actions.

When using a C Controller module, read "PROGRAM RUN" as "BUS RUN" in the column of "LED status" in the following table.

Error Error name code

Error definition and cause

LED status

READY

PROGRAM ERROR RUN

Action

0100H Flash ROM error � Failed to access the flash ROM of Off

Off

Flashing

� Execute the firmware update

the CPU module.

function again.

0200H Model mismatched � The firmware update file that does On

Off

Flashing

� Check the target CPU module and

not match with the target CPU

execute the firmware update

module was used.

function again.

0201H File invalid

� The invalid firmware update file was used.

� Write the firmware update file to the SD memory card again.
� Do not change the file name of the firmware update file.

0202H Combination error

� An incompatible version of the firmware update file has been used.

� When updating a firmware version, use a firmware update file that is supported by the firmware version to be updated.

0203H Firmware update prohibited state

� The firmware update was prohibited by the setting for firmware update prohibition.

� Confirm that the firmware update is not prohibited and can be executed.

0300H Firmware data

� A firmware data error was

Flashing

Off

Flashing

� Execute the firmware update

error

detected during execution of the firmware update function.

function again.
A

If the firmware update fails even after the items above are checked and the actions are taken, the possible cause is a

hardware failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

� C Controller module

The ERROR LED flashes, and a value corresponding to the error is displayed on the dot matrix LED.

Dot matrix LED

Error name

Error definition and cause

Action

E101 E102

Firmware update function execution error

The firmware update failed.
The power was turned off or the C Controller module was reset while executing the firmware update.

Perform the firmware update function again.
Turn the power off and on or reset the C Controller module to start the firmware update function again.

If the firmware update fails even after the items above are checked and the actions are taken, the possible cause is a hardware failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

215 APPX
Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Intelligent function module
If the firmware update failed, an error code is stored in "Latest firmware update result" and "Previous firmware update result". Check the error code and take appropriate actions after powering off and on or resetting the CPU module. To check error codes, before powering off and on or resetting the CPU module, set "Mode Settings" of the intelligent function module to "Online" in the engineering tool.
[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] (the module used) [Basic Setting] [Various Operations Settings] [Mode Settings]

When executing the firmware update again, check that measures to reduce noise of the system have adequately been taken.

Error code 0100H 0200H
0201H

Error name

Error definition and cause

LED status

RUN

ERR

Flash ROM error � Accessing the flash ROM of the

Off

intelligent function module failed.

Flashing

Model mismatched � The firmware update file not for the On target intelligent function module was used.

Flashing

File invalid

� The invalid firmware update file was used.

0203H

Firmware update prohibited state

0300H

Firmware data error

� The firmware update was prohibited by the setting for firmware update prohibition.
� A firmware data error was detected during execution of the firmware update function.

Flashing

Action
� Execute the firmware update function again.
� Check the target intelligent function module, and execute the firmware update function again.
� Write the firmware update file to the SD memory card again.
� Do not change the file name of the firmware update file.
� Confirm that the firmware update is not prohibited and can be executed.
� Execute the firmware update function again. If the firmware update failed again, the firmware update file may be broken. Obtain the file again.

If the firmware update fails even after the items above are checked and the actions are taken, the possible cause is a hardware failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

216 APPX Appendix 2 Firmware Update Function

Appendix 3 Pair Version

Pair version is version information to determine modules used as a pair. In each of the following combinations, use the modules of the same version. � SIL2 Process CPU and SIL2 function module � Safety CPU and safety function module
Checking methods
This section describes how to check the pair version of modules.

Checking on the module
The pair version is printed on the rating plate of the module. The rating plate is located on the side of the module. ( Page 184 Checking on the module)

Checking with the special register or buffer memory

The pair version can be checked with the special register or buffer memory.

Module

Area

SIL2 Process CPU Safety CPU SIL2 function module, safety function module

Special register: SD206 Special register: SD206 Buffer memory: Un\G60

Checking with the engineering tool
The pair version can be checked on the [Module Information List] tab opened from the "Module Diagnostics" window.
[Diagnostics] [Module Diagnostics] [Module Information List]
A

217 APPX
Appendix 3 Pair Version

Appendix 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom

This section describes troubleshooting of power supply modules and base units.
When the POWER LED of the power supply module turns off, or the ERR contact turns off (opens)

Check the following:

Check item

Action

The power supply module is not mounted on the base unit properly.

Remove the power supply module from the base unit, and mount it back on the base unit. Then, restore power to the system.

Is the READY LED of the CPU module on? Is the power supply voltage appropriate?

If the READY LED is not on, an error has occurred in the power supply module. Replace the power supply module.
Supply power voltage within the specified range. ( Page 120 Performance Specifications of Power Supply Module)

Has the internal current consumption within the entire system exceeded the rated output current of the power supply module?

If the consumption has exceeded the rated output current, review the system configuration so that the internal current consumption does not exceed the rated output current. ( Page 88 Consideration for internal current consumption)

Does the POWER LED turn on when power is restored to the system after all modules, except the power supply module, have been removed?

If the POWER LED does not turn on, an error has occurred in a module other than the power supply module. Repeatedly supply power to the system, returning the modules back to the system one by one. The last module mounted immediately before the POWER LED turned off has been failed. Replace the module.

If the POWER LED of the power supply module does not turn on even after the items above are checked and the actions are taken, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the power supply module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

When the specific extension base unit cannot be recognized

Check the following:

Check item

Action

The extension base unit that cannot be recognized is the Q series extension base unit.
The POWER LED of the power supply module of the extension base unit that cannot be recognized is turned off.

Refer to the troubleshooting for the case where the specific Q series extension base unit cannot be recognized. ( Page 219 When the specific Q series extension base unit cannot be recognized)
Refer to the troubleshooting for the power supply module. ( Page 218 When the POWER LED of the power supply module turns off, or the ERR contact turns off (opens))

The extension cable is not correctly connected.

Correctly connect the extension cable.

The specific extension base unit cannot be recognized even after the above items were checked.

Take actions in the following order. � Replace the extension cable. � Replace the extension base unit. � Replace the base unit on the upper level of the extension base unit.

If the specific extension base unit cannot be recognized even after the items above are checked and the actions are taken, the possible cause is a hardware failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

218 APPX Appendix 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom

When the specific Q series extension base unit cannot be recognized

Check the following:

Check item

Action

The POWER LED of the power supply module on the Q series extension base unit that cannot be recognized is off.

Refer to the troubleshooting for the power supply modules. ( User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) for the Q series CPU module used)

The connector pin is not correctly inserted in the extension level setting connector.

Correctly insert the connector pin in the extension level setting connector.

The extension cable is not correctly connected.

Correctly connect the extension cable.

The specific Q series extension base unit cannot be recognized even after the above items were checked.

Take actions in the following order. � Replace the extension cable. � Replace the Q series extension base unit. � Replace the base unit on the upper level of the Q series extension base
unit.

If the specific Q series extension base unit cannot be recognized even after the items above are checked and the actions are taken, the possible cause is a hardware failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

When an error occurs in a redundant extension base unit

When a CONNECT LED turns off
Check the following:
Check item The extension cable is not connected properly.
There are problems on the extension cable.

Action

Check the connection status of the extension cable using the system monitor. If a tracking cable is properly connected, connect it again.

� Check that the overall cable distance of the extension cables is within the

range of the specifications. � Replace the extension cable because it may be faulty or there may be a

break in it.

If the CONNECT LED does not turn on even after the items above are checked and the actions are taken, the possible cause is a failure of the extension base unit. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

When a tracking communication error occurs at start-up of the system

Check the following:

Check item

Action

Before the both systems start up, either system was powered off and on.
Before the system that was powered on first starts up, another system was powered on.
It took much time to start up the standby system. (For example, it took longer time to perform the automatic restoration or boot operation than usual, or the SD memory card diagnostics was performed.)

Restart the system where the CPU module in which a stop error occurs is mounted.*1

*1 If an error occurs in the standby system, using the automatic standby system recovery function can recover the standby system without manual operations. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

When a system bus error occurs at start-up of the system

Check the following:

Check item

Action

The firmware version of the CPU module used does not support the use of the redundant extension base unit.

Update the firmware version of the CPU module to the version that supports the use of the redundant extension base unit. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU
Module User's Manual (Application))

219 APPX
Appendix 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom

Appendix 5 Differences Between MELSEC iQ-R
Series and MELSEC-Q Series
For the differences between MELSEC iQ-R series and MELSEC-Q series, refer to the following. MELSEC-Q Series to MELSEC iQ-R Series Migration Guide (L08510ENG)
220 APPX Appendix 5 Differences Between MELSEC iQ-R Series and MELSEC-Q Series

Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

This section describes how to use MELSEC-Q series modules. � For the MELSEC-Q series modules which can be used, refer to the following. Page 75 MELSEC-Q series � For precautions when using each module, refer to the following. Page 229 Precautions � When using module dedicated instructions, create programs by referring to the manual for each module. � When using the C Controller module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Startup)
Window change between GX Works2 and GX Works3
Windows in GX Works2 for the MELSEC-Q series changes the following windows in GX Works3.

Parameter items

This section describes the window change of parameters. For parameter setting method on GX Works3, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

I/O assignment setting
� "Points", "Start XY", and "PLC Operation Mode at H/W Error" in "I/O Assignment" of GX Works2 change the following window in GX Works3.

GX Works2

GX Works3

[Project window] [Parameter] [PLC Parameter] [I/O Assignment]

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [System Parameter] [I/O Assignment Setting]

221 APPX
Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

� "Error Time Output Mode" and "I/O Response Time" of GX Works2 have changed to the following windows in GX Works3.

GX Works2

GX Works3

[Project window] [Parameter] [PLC Parameter] [I/O Assignment]

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Module model name [Module Parameter]

Switch setting and intelligent function module parameter
"Switch Setting" and the intelligent function module parameter of GX Works2 have changed to the following windows in GX Works3.

GX Works2

GX Works3

[Project window] [Intelligent Function Module] Module model name

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Module model name [Module Parameter]

222 APPX Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Interrupt pointer setting
"Interrupt Pointer Setting" of GX Works2 changes the following window in GX Works3.

GX Works2

GX Works3

[Project window] [Parameter] [PLC Parameter] [PLC System] [Interrupt Pointer Setting]

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Module model name [Module Parameter]

A
The interrupt pointer setting method differs as below between GX Works2 and GX Works3. � The SI No. setting of the interrupt module is not required on GX Works3. � "Interrupt Pointer" of the interrupt module must be the serial number on GX Works3. (Set I51 on No.2 and I52 on No.3 when
No.1 is set I50.)

223 APPX
Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Network parameter
"Network Parameter" of GX Works2 changes to the following window in GX Works3.

GX Works2

GX Works3

[Project window] [Parameter] [Network Parameter] Network used

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Module model name [Module Parameter]

Intelligent function module tool

"Intelligent Function Module Tool" of GX Works2 changes the following window in GX Works3.

GX Works2

GX Works3

[Tool] [Intelligent Function Module Tool] Each module tool

[Tool] [Module Tool List] [Q Series] Each module tool

224 APPX Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Setting procedure
This section describes the setting procedure for the MELSEC-Q series module in GX Works3.
1. Create the module configuration in accordance with the
actual configuration by dragging and dropping each MELSEC-Q series module from the "Element Selection" window of "Module Configuration" in GX Works3. Then, select [Edit] [Parameter] [Fix].*1*2
2. Set the module parameters of each module.
[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Module model name [Module Parameter]
*1 When the CPU module used can be connected to GX Works3, the actual system configuration can be read out by selecting [Online] [Read Module Configuration from PLC] in the menu. For the modules which cannot be read out, create the module configuration by dragging and dropping each module from "Element Selection" window.
*2 When "Points", "Start XY", or "CPU Module Operation Setting at Error Detection" are changed, set the parameters in "System Parameter". (Page 221 Parameter items)
A
225 APPX
Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Product classification in "Module Configuration"

The models are classified into the following.

Model

Product classification in "Module Configuration"

Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B, Q55BL*1, Q65BL*1, Q68BL*1, Q55BLS*2, Q65BLS*2, Q68BLS*2, Q55BLS-D*2, Q65BLS-D*2, Q68BLS-D*2
QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B

Extension Base Connection line*3

Q61P, Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, Q64PN, Q61P-D Power Supply

QX10, QX10-TS, QX28, QX40, QX40-TS, QX40-S1, QX41, QX41S1, QX41-S2, QX42, QX42-S1, QX70, QX71, QX72, QX80, QX80TS, QX81, QX81-S2, QX82, QX82-S1, QX40H, QX70H, QX80H, QX90H, QX50, QX11L*4, QX21L*4

Input

QY10, QY10-TS, QY18A, QY22, QY40P, QY40P-TS, QY41P,
QY42P, QY50, QY68A, QY70, QY71, QY80, QY80-TS, QY81P, QY82P, QY41H, QY11AL*5, QY13L*5, QY23L*5, QY51PL*5

Output

QH42P, QX48Y57, QX41Y41P

I/O

QI60

Interrupt Input

Q61LD, Q62AD-DGH, Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI, Q64AD-GH, Q64ADH, Q66AD-DG, Q68AD-G, Q68CT

Analog Input

Q62DA, Q62DAN, Q64DA, Q64DAN, Q68DAV, Q68DAVN, Q68DAI, Q68DAIN, Q62DA-FG, Q66DA-G, Q64DAH Q64AD2DA Q64RD, Q64RD-G, Q68RD3-G, Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH, Q68TD-GH01, Q68TD-G-H02 Q64TCTTN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTBWN Q62HLC QD70P4, QD70P8, QD70D4, QD70D8, QD73A1, QD64D2, QD65PD2, QD72P3C3, QD63P6, QD60P8-G

Analog Output
Analog I/O Temperature Input
Temperature Control Module Loop Control Pulse I/O/Positioning

QE81WH, QE84WH, QE81WH4W, QE83WH4W, QE82LG QD51, QD51-R24, QJ71MES96, QJ71MES96N, QJ71WS96

Energy Measuring Module Information Module

QJ51AW12AL, QJ61CL12, QJ71AS92, QJ71FL71, QJ71FL71-T, QJ71FL71-B2, QJ71FL71-B5, QJ71FL71-F01, QJ71FL71-T-F01, QJ71FL71-B2-F01, QJ71FL71-B5-F01, QJ71MB91, QJ71MT91, QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE, QJ71BR11, QJ71NT11B QJ51AW12D2*3
QG60

Network module
Partner product Blank cover

*1 Q series large type extension base unit *2 Q series large type extension base unit (AnS series size) *3 A model is not displayed on "Element Selection" window of "Module Configuration". *4 Large type input module *5 Large type output module

Remarks

Analog-digital converter modules and current transformer input modules are classified into this category. Digital-analog converter modules are classified into into this category.
Positioning modules, high-speed counter modules, and pulse input modules are classified into into this category. MES interface modules and Web server modules are classified into into this category. CC-Link/LT master modules and MELSECNET/H network modules are classified into this category.

226 APPX Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Refresh processing time
The refresh processing time [s] is a constituent of the scan time of the CPU module. For details on the scan time, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) The refresh processing time [s], which is taken for refresh, is given by: � Refresh processing time [s] = Refresh read time (time for transferring refresh data to the CPU module) + Refresh write
time (time for transferring refresh data to the intelligent function module) The refresh read time and refresh write time vary depending on the settings of "Target".

When "Target" is a refresh data register (RD)

The following table shows the refresh read time and refresh write time with a MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module used.

Module

Model

RQ extension base unit

Q extension base unit

Read time Write time Read time Write time

Analog-digital converter module

Q64AD

32.93s

47.69s

Q68ADV, Q68ADI

35.97s

54.97s

Channel isolated high resolution analog-digital converter module

Q64AD-GH

45.80s

77.91s

channel isolated high resolution analog-digital converter module (with signal conditioning function)

Q62AD-DGH

41.24s

66.99s

Channel isolated analog-digital converter module Q68AD-G

40.76s

64.64s

Channel isolated analog-digital converter module Q66AD-DG (with signal conditioning function)

38.48s

59.18s

High speed analog-digital converter module

Q64ADH

58.32s

39.08s

103.09s

65.02s

Digital-analog converter module

Q62DA, Q62DAN

26.09s

22.89s

31.31s

29.94s

Q64DA, Q64DAN

26.09s

23.75s

31.31s

26.76s

Q68DAV, Q68DAVN, Q68DAI, Q68DAIN

26.09s

25.47s

31.31s

30.40s

Channel isolated digital-analog converter module Q62DA-FG

35.92s

22.89s

54.25s

24.94s

Q66DA-G

27.94s

24.61s

35.14s

28.58s

High speed digital-analog converter module

Q64DAH

29.79s

23.75s

38.97s

26.76s

Analog input/output module

Q64AD2DA

239.35s

43.35s

538.41s

75.22s

Load cell input module

Q61LD

59.10s

109.76s

Current transformer input module

Q68CT

153.34s

58.12s

335.44s

100.66s

RTD input module

Q64RD

33.64s

48.79s

Channel isolated RTD input module

Q64RD-G

34.02s

49.70s

Q68RD3-G

40.91s

19.71s

Thermocouple input module

Q64TD

39.39s

63.16s

Channel isolated thermocouple/micro voltage input module

Q64TDV-GH

30.60s

41.51s

Channel isolated thermocouple input module

Q68TD-G-H01, Q68TD-G-H02 33.26s

47.88s

Temperature control module

Q64TCTTN, Q64TCRTN

323.58s

50.91s

743.12s

98.20s

Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTBWN 323.58s

52.63s

743.12s

101.84s

Loop control module

Q62HLC

49.02s

32.26s

83.22s

48.26s

Multichannel high-speed counter module

QD63P6

61.13s

111.62s

4Mpps capable high-speed counter module

QD64D2

37.62s

55.92s

Channel isolated pulse input module

QD60P8-G

108.96s

225.56s

Multi function counter/timer module

QD65PD2

159.83s

346.78s

Positioning module

QD70P4, QD70D4

54.24s

94.52s

QD70P8, QD70D8

87.28s

168.84s

QD73A1

28.75s

37.68s

Positioning module with built-in counter function QD72P3C3

35.87s

53.53s

AS-i master module

QJ71AS92

164.82s

174.32s

359.33s

369.23s

227 APPX
Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Module AnyWireASLINK master module Energy measuring module
Insulation monitoring module

Model
QJ51AW12AL QE81WH QE84WH QE81WH4W QE83WH4W QE82LG

RQ extension base unit

Read time Write time

28.75s

23.51s

83.93s

326.44s

91.48s

286.36s

139.66s

Q extension base unit

Read time Write time

37.68s

31.72s

166.22s

729.56s

183.70s

635.98s

302.68s

When "Target" is a specified device
Calculate the refresh read time and refresh write time according to the number of items and the number of their transfer data (word) that are set to be refreshed. For the calculation method, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

228 APPX Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Precautions

This section describes precautions for using the following modules. For details, refer to the manual for the module used.

Base unit
In "Module Name" on the "System Monitor" window, the model of each extension base unit is not displayed but "Extension Base" is displayed.
Q series large type extension base unit and Q series large type extension base unit (AnS series size)
Select the module which can be used to each extension base unit on "Module Configuration". When the Q series large type blank cover is used, select the module with the Q series large type blank cover.

Power supply module
In "Module Name" on the "System Monitor" window, the model of each power supply module is not displayed but "Power" is displayed.

I/O modules

High-speed input modules
� When a high-speed input module is used as a high-speed input module, select the following model in "Module Configuration" in accordance with on or off of a noise filter. (The module operates with the default setting (input response time: 0.2ms) when on or off of the noise filter does not correspond to on or off of the model on "Module Configuration".)

Model

Model displayed on GX Works3

When the noise filter is turned on

When the noise filter is turned off

QX40H

QX40H(NoiseF_ON)

QX40H(NoiseF_OFF)

QX70H

QX70H(NoiseF_ON)

QX70H(NoiseF_OFF)

QX80H

QX80H(NoiseF_ON)

QX80H(NoiseF_OFF)

QX90H

QX90H(NoiseF_ON)

QX90H(NoiseF_OFF)

� When a high-speed input module is used as an interrupt module, select "QI60" in "Module Configuration". (The module operates with the default setting (input response time: 0.2ms) when the noise filter is used at off.)
� When high-speed input modules are used as interrupt modules, set the number of modules to be used in "I/O Assignment Setting" in the [I/O Assignment] tab on the "System Parameter" window.
Interrupt modules
� When multiple interrupt modules are used, set the number of modules to be used in "I/O Assignment Setting" in the [I/O Assignment] tab on the "System Parameter" window.
Large type AC input module, large type contact output module, large type triac output module, and large type transistor output module
� Place the module that can be mounted on the extension base unit on the "Module Configuration" window.

Analog-digital converter module
Logging data A/B side storage complete pointer detection, an interrupt factor of the Q64ADH, cannot be used as an interrupt pointer.

High-speed counter modules and pulse input modules
Check the latest error code with the system monitor because error codes for the QD63P6 and QD60P8-G cannot be checked in the module diagnostics. When multiple errors occur, refer to the buffer memory and check the error.

229 APPX
Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Positioning module
� Set parameters in a program because positioning data cannot be written to the module. The positioning data parameter is discarded when the GX Works2 project is read out.
� Check the latest error code with the system monitor because error codes for the QD70P4, QD70P8, QD70D4, and QD70D8 cannot be checked in the module diagnostics. When multiple errors occur, refer to the buffer memory (error codes for each axis) and check the error.

Loop control module
Check the latest error code with the system monitor because error codes for the Q62HLC cannot be checked in the module diagnostics. When multiple errors occur, refer to the buffer memory and check the error.

FL-net(OPCN-2) interface module
� Select "Online" in "Operation Mode Setting" of "Switch Setting". � Set parameters in a program because the auto refresh used in GX Works2 cannot be set in GX Works3. � In GX Works2, the size of region 1 of cyclic data is set in units of bits, while in GX Works3, it is set in units of words.

MODBUS interface module and MODBUS/TCP interface module
� When "Start MODBUS device number" of "MODBUS device assignment parameter" is set, check the setting range in the manual in advance.
� For "Basic parameter starting method" and "Device assignment parameter starting method" of "Switch setting" in "Basic setting", only "Start by user setting parameter" can be selected. Write a program to set the automatic communication parameters as well as module parameters set only "Switch setting" when the default assignment parameter is used as the staring method.
� GX Works3 does not support the intelligent function module parameter "Setting for GX Works2 Connection" of GX Works2. � Accessing via MODBUS using GX Works3 is not allowed. � The Z(P).MBRW and Z(P).MBREQ instructions cannot be used. Instead of these instructions, use the automatic
communication function. � Set parameters in a program because the auto refresh used in GX Works2 cannot be set in GX Works3.

AnyWireASLINK master module and AnyWire DB A20 master module

� Set a slave module by using the address writer because GX Works3 does not support "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" of GX Works2.
� The auto-generation of a global label (CSV file output from the device assignment window) cannot be use. � When the AnyWire DB A20 master module is used, select the following model displayed on "Module Configuration". The
model is also displayed on the diagnostic window.

Model

Model displayed on GX Works3

QJ51AW12D2

MELSEC_Partner

MES interface module and Web server module
There are restrictions on the supported MELSEC iQ-R series CPU modules. For the modules, refer to the following. MES Interface Module User's Manual Web Server Module User's Manual

230 APPX Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Intelligent communication module

� The SW1VD-AD51HP software package can be used as well as the MELSEC-Q series.

� When the PCRD instruction of the BASIC program is used, there are restrictions on the following processing codes. The

codes other than the following can be used as well as when using the MELSEC-Q series CPU module.

Processing code

Restriction

513 (&H201) 515 (&H203) 516 (&H204) 533 (&H215)

Not available The device range of a MELSEC-Q series CPU module only can be used.
The buffer memory of a MELSEC iQ-R series module cannot be read out.

� When the PCWT instruction of the BASIC program is used, there are restrictions on the following processing codes. The codes other than the following can be used as well as when using the MELSEC-Q series CPU module.

Processing code

Restriction

515 (&H203)

The device range of a MELSEC-Q series CPU module only can be used.

516 (&H204)

533 (&H215)

Data cannot be written to the buffer memory of a MELSEC iQ-R series module.

231 APPX
Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

MELSECNET/H network module
Network configuration
The module can be used in PLC to PLC network, using the following network configurations. � Single network system � Multiple network system

When a redundant system is configured with the MELSEC-Q series Redundant CPU (QnPRHCPU) on the PLC to PLC network, the MELSECNET/H network module which is controlled by the RnCPU or Safety CPU can be used as a normal station only. In addition, the QJ71NT11B cannot be used in a redundant system.

Control system
QnPRHCPU

Tracking cable
Control station

Standby system
QnPRHCPU

Normal station

MELSECNET/H

QCPU

Normal station

RQ extension base unit

RnCPU

MELSEC iQ-R series main base unit

Function difference
� The module cannot be used in the simple dual-structured system.

� Set parameters for the MELSECNET/H network module mounted on the RQ extension base unit because the

MELSECNET/H network module does not have default parameter settings under no parameter setting. � The transient transmission cannot be performed at CPU module error. Therefore, the description of the error of the
corresponding station cannot be checked from other stations. Check the error description by connecting an engineering

tool to the CPU module where the error has occurred.

� The interlink data transfer function cannot be used. Use a link refresh and a program instead. The following figures show

the example of the interlink transmission where data are transferred from network No.2 to network No.1.

(1) Link refresh

CPU module

Network No.1

Network No.2 (2) Data transfer using a program

(1)

(2) B100

B200

(1)

(2) W100

W200

(1)

232 APPX Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Engineering tool
� The version of an engineering tool that supports the MELSECNET/H network module is restricted. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))
� When the module occupying two slots (QJ71LP21S-25) is mounted, it is displayed on an engineering tool as occupying one slot. Therefore, when setting the module on "Module Configuration", mount the blank cover module (QG60) on the left side of the QJ71LP21S-25 mounted slot to secure an empty space of one slot (16 points). Then, set the empty space of one slot (16 points) in "I/O Assignment Setting" in the [I/O Assignment] tab on the "System Parameter" window.
(1) QJ71LP21S-25 (module occupying two slots) (2) QG60 (blank cover module)

(2) (1)

� Data communications from the engineering tool (GX Works3) to other stations (stations where the engineering tool is not connected) cannot be performed via MELSECNET/H.

� On the system monitor and MELSECNET diagnostics of the engineering tool (GX Works3), the mode of the MELSECNET/

H network module is always displayed as "Online".

� None of T, C, and ST can be specified for the device set in the link refresh settings. Specify another device. � There are precautions for MELSECNET diagnostics of the engineering tool (GX Works3) via following devices.

Device

Precaution

CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board CC-Link IE Field Network interface board

Use the SW1DNC-MNETG-B with version 1.22Y or later and the ROM with version 2T or

later.

Use the SW1DNC-CCIEF-B with version 1.10L or later.

GOT

MELSECNET diagnostics cannot be used If the engineering tool (GX Works3) is connected to the programmable controller using the FA transparent function of GOT (in a CC-Link IE Controller Network or a CC-Link IE Field Network connection).

GX works2 and GX Developer
� From GX Works2 connected to a MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module, access to a MELSEC-Q series or MELSEC-L series CPU module is possible via the MELSECNET/H network module mounted on the RQ extension base unit. For the access via a MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module, use GX Works2 with the version of 1.519R or later.
� For data access from GX Works2 to other stations via a MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module, a remote password, if it is set, cannot be canceled from GX Works2. Cancel the password using the engineering tool that supports a MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module.
� From GX Developer, access to other stations via a MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module is not possible.

233 APPX
Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Program
� Although the dedicated instructions of MELSECNET/H can be used for programming, for some dedicated instructions, use

the string specification ("") when setting the start devices of the target station. : Available

Instruction name

Availability

Remarks

JP.READ, GP.READ

JP.SREAD, GP.SREAD

JP.WRITE, GP.WRITE

JP.SWRITE, GP.SWRITE

JP.SEND, GP.SEND

JP.RECV, GP.RECV

G.RECVS, Z.RECVS

J(P).ZNRD

J(P).ZNWR

J(P).REQ, G(P).REQ

Z(P).RRUN

Z(P).RSTOP

Z(P).RTMRD

Z(P).RTMWR

Only the string specification can be used for (s2). Only the string specification can be used for (s2) and (d3). Only the string specification can be used for (d1). Only the string specification can be used for (d1) and (d3).
Only the string specification can be used for (s2). Only the string specification can be used for (d1).

� No.254 (valid module during other station access) cannot be used to specify the network number of the dedicated instructions. Specify the network number within the range of 1 to 239.
� From the personal computer connected to the MELSECNET/H interface board, access to a programmable controller using md functions is possible.

Modules which can be mounted with the remote head module
Restrictions and precautions of when the MELSEC-Q series modules are used with the remote head module are same as those of when the modules are used as the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. For the restrictions and precautions, refer to the manual of each module.

234 APPX Appendix 6 How to Use MELSEC-Q Series Modules

Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives
Compliance with the EMC Directive, which is one of the EU directives, has been mandatory for products sold within EU member states since 1996 as well as compliance with the Low Voltage Directive since 1997. For products compliant to the EMC and Low Voltage Directives, their manufacturers are required to declare compliance and affix the CE marking. The sales representative in EU member states is: Company: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. Address: Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1, 40882 Ratingen, Germany
Measures to comply with the EMC Directive
The EMC Directive sets requirements for emission (conducted and radiated electromagnetic interference emitted by a product) and immunity (the ability of a product not to be influenced by externally generated electromagnetic interference). This section describes the precautions for machinery constructed with the MELSEC iQ-R series modules to comply with the EMC Directive. These precautions are based on the requirements of the EMC Directive and the harmonized standards. However, they do not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions complies with the EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance and declare conformity to the EMC Directive.
A
235 APPX
Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

EMC Directive related standards

Emission requirements
Standard: EN61131-2:2007

Test item CISPR16-2-3 Radiated emission*2
CISPR16-2-1, CISPR16-1-2 Conducted emission*2

Test description
The electromagnetic wave emitted by the product to the external space is measured.
The noise level which the product emits to the power line is measured.

Value specified in standard � 30 to 230MHz, QP: 40dBV/m (measured at 10m distance)*1 � 230 to 1000MHz, QP: 47dBV/m (measured at 10m distance)
� 0.15 to 0.5MHz, QP: 79dB, Mean: 66dB*1 � 0.5 to 30MHz, QP: 73dB, Mean: 60dB

*1 QP: Quasi-Peak value, Mean: Average value *2 Programmable controller is an open-type device and must be placed in a conductive control panel or similar type of enclosure. The tests
were conducted with the programmable controller installed in a control panel, applying the maximum rated input voltage of the power supply module.

Immunity requirements
Standard: EN61131-2:2007

Test item

Test description

Value specified in standard

EN61000-4-2 Electrostatic discharge immunity*1

An electrostatic discharge is applied to the enclosure of the equipment.

� 8kV: Air discharge � 4kV: Contact discharge

EN61000-4-3
Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity*1

An electric field is radiated to the product.

80% AM modulation @1kHz � 80 to 1000MHz: 10V/m � 1.4 to 2.0GHz: 3V/m � 2.0 to 2.7GHz: 1V/m

EN61000-4-4 Fast transient burst immunity*1

Burst noise is applied to power lines and signal lines.

� AC/DC power, I/O power, and AC I/O (unshielded) lines: 2kV � DC I/O, analog, and communication lines: 1kV

EN61000-4-5 Surge immunity*1

Lightning surge is applied to power lines and signal lines.

� AC power, AC I/O power, and AC I/O (unshielded) lines: 2kV CM, 1kV DM
� DC power and DC I/O power lines: 0.5kV CM, 0.5kV DM � DC I/O, AC I/O (shielded), analog*2, and communication lines: 1kV CM

EN61000-4-6 Conducted RF immunity*1

High-frequency noise is applied to power lines and signal lines.

0.15 to 80MHz, 80% AM modulation @1kHz, 10Vrms

EN61000-4-8
Power-frequency magnetic field immunity*1

The product is immersed in the magnetic field of an induction coil.

50/60Hz, 30A/m

EN61000-4-11
Voltage dips and interruptions immunity*1

Power voltage is momentarily interrupted.

� 0%, 0.5 periods, starting at zerocrossing � 0%, 250/300 periods (50/60Hz) � 40%, 10/12 periods (50/60Hz) � 70%, 25/30 periods (50/60Hz)

*1 Programmable controller is an open-type device and must be placed in a conductive control panel or similar type of enclosure. The tests were conducted with the programmable controller installed in a control panel.
*2 The accuracy of an analog-digital converter module may temporarily vary within 10%.

236 APPX Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Installation in a control panel

Programmable controller is an open-type device intended to be placed in a conductive control panel or similar type of enclosure. Remote modules on each network must be also installed inside the control panel. Waterproof type remote modules can be installed outside the control panel. This ensures safety as well as effective shielding of electromagnetic noise emitted from the programmable controller.

Control panel
� Use a conductive control panel. � Mask off an area used for grounding when securing the top or bottom plate to the control panel using bolts. � To ensure electrical contact between inner plates and the control panel, mask off the bolt installation areas of each inner
plate so that conductivity can be ensured in the largest area. � Ground the control panel with a thick ground cable so that low impedance can be ensured even at high frequencies. � Keep the diameter of the holes on the control panel to 10cm or less. If the diameter is larger than 10cm, electromagnetic
wave may leak. In addition, because electromagnetic wave leaks through a clearance between the control panel and its door, reduce the clearance as much as possible. Use of EMI gaskets (sealing the clearance) can suppress undesired radiated emissions. The tests were conducted by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation using a control panel having damping characteristics of 37dB (maximum) and 30dB (average) (measured at 3m distance, 30 to 300MHz).

Power cable and ground cable
� Provide a ground point to the control panel near the power supply module. Ground the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module to the ground point with the shortest and thickest ground cable possible (30cm or shorter, 2).
� Twist the ground cable extended from the ground point with the power cable so that larger amount of noise generated from the power cable is absorbed to the ground. Note that if a noise filter is attached to the power cable, twisting may not be required.

DIN rails

Aluminum DIN rails may have insulation films. If an electrical contact cannot be secured between a DIN rail and a

programmable controller, take measures to obtain conductivity. The following methods can be used to obtain conductivity.

� Screw the programmable controller to the control panel directly, without using a DIN rail.

� Use iron DIN rails, such as TH35-7.5Fe and TH35-15Fe.

Extension cables
� Wire cables with extension cables placed in ducts. If not, dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact.
� Do not clamp the extension cables with the jacket stripped. � Use the shortest extension cable according to the distance between the base units connected.

237 APPX
Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Noise filter (power supply line filter)

A noise filter is effective for reducing conducted noise in the 10MHz or less frequency band. (Use of a noise filter can

suppress noise.)

The following are the installation precautions.

� Do not bundle the cables on the input side and output side of the noise filter. If bundled, the noise on the output side is

induced into the filtered cable on the input side.
Input side (power supply side)

� Problematic example Noise is induced when the input and output cables are bundled.

Filter
Input side (power supply side)

Induction
Output side (device side)

� Modification example Install the input and output cables separately.

Filter

Output side (device side)

� Ground the ground terminal of the noise filter to the ground point of the control panel with the shortest cable possible (approximately 10cm).
Isolation transformer
An Isolation transformer is effective for reducing conducted noise (especially, lightning surge). Lightning surge may cause malfunction of the programmable controller. As measures against lightning surge, connect an isolation transformer as shown below. Use of an isolation transformer can reduce a lightning effect.

100 to 240VAC

Main power supply

Programmable Isolation controller power transformer supply

Relay terminal block

T1 I/O power supply

Motor power supply

Programmable controller
I/O equipment
Motor equipment

238 APPX Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Cables extended out of the control panel

Use a shielded cable for a cable extended out of the control panel such as an I/O signal line (including a common line) and cable for communications. If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded properly, the noise immunity will not meet the requirement.

Grounding a shielded cable
� Ground the shield of a shielded cable as close to the module as possible so that the grounded cable will not be affected by

electromagnetic induction from ungrounded cables.

� Ground the exposed shield to a large area on the control panel. A clamp can be used as shown below. In this case, mask

off the inner wall surface of the control panel, which comes in contact with the clamp.

(1) Paint mask

(1)

(2) Clamp

(2)

Do not use the tip of a PVC wire soldered onto a shield of the shielded cable for grounding. Doing so will raise the high-frequency impedance, resulting in loss of the shielding effect.
Shielded cable

PVC wire Solderless terminal

Grounding cables with a cable clamp

Use shielded cables for external wiring and ground the shields of the shielded cables to the control panel with an AD75CK

cable clamp (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric). Ground the shields within 20 to 30cm from the module.

AD75CK

20 to 30cm

For details on the AD75CK, refer to the following. AD75CK-type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual

239 APPX
Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Ferrite core
A ferrite core is effective for reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz frequency band. It is recommended to install a ferrite core if a shield cable extended out of the control panel does not provide sufficient shielding effects. Install a ferrite core to the cable in the position just before the cable is extended out of the control panel. If the installation position is not appropriate, the ferrite core will not produce any effect. Install a ferrite core to each power cable as shown below. � (Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: ESD-SR-250 manufactured by TOKIN Corporation, ZCAT3035-
1330 manufactured by TDK Corporation)
Ex.

Connectors for external devices
When a module that requires a connector for external devices is used, take the following noise reduction measures. � When shielded cables are connected The following figure shows an example of wiring against noise when a connector (A6CON1) is used.
(1)

A6CON1

(2)

(3)
(1) The length between the connector and the shielded cables should be the shortest possible. (2) Ground the FG wire of 2 or more as short as possible. Ground it to the control panel on the module side. (3) Shielded cable
� When shielded cables are processed
(1), (3)

(2)
(5) (4) (1) Strip the jacket of each shield of the cables. (2) Solder the shield of any shielded cable to the FG wire. (3) Bundle the shields with conductive tape. (4) To protect the wires, cover the connector pins with heat shrinkable insulating tubes. Exposed wires may cause malfunction of the module due to static electricity. (5) Cover the conductive part with insulating tape.
240 APPX Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

� When a duct is used (problematic example and modification example)

Relay

Drive unit

Relay

� Problematic example The drive units are placed near the noise source. The connection cables between the programmable controller and drive units are too long.

Noise generating device (e.g. power system)

Programmable controller

Relay

Relay Relay

� Modification example The programmable controller and drive units are placed closely. The connected cables between them are placed separately from the power line and the shortest. (In this example, the cables are connected without using the duct.)

Noise generating device (e.g. power system)

Programmable controller

Drive unit

A
Shaded part: Wiring duct
External power supply
Use a reinforced or double insulated CE-marked external power supply, and ground the FG terminal. Ground the FG terminals. � External power supply used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: PS5R-SF24 manufactured by IDEC Corporation

241 APPX
Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Each module

Power supply module
� Ground the LG and FG terminals after short-circuiting them. � Keep the power cable length for the external power supply to 30m or less.

CPU module
When inserted into a compatible module, the SD memory card (NZ1MEM-GBSD) manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
already conforms to IEC 61131-2.

I/O modules
� Install a DC power supply and an I/O module inside the same control panel. � Keep each DC power cable length to 30m or less. � Take a surge protective measure, such as installing a surge suppressor, if the relay switches five times or more per minute.

Channel isolated analog-digital converter modules, channel isolated digital-analog converter modules, channel isolated thermocouple input modules, channel isolated RTD input modules, and channel isolated analog-digital converter module (with signal conditioning function)

Making a relevant module comply with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives requires the wiring as shown below:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) Relevant module

(2) Connector for

external devices

(5)

(3) Inside a control panel

(4) Relay terminal block

(5) AD75CK

(6) Strip off the jacket.

(4) (6)

20 to 30cm
� The AD75CK cable clamp (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric) allows up to four cables to be grounded together if the outside diameter is approximately 7mm.
� For the wiring between the connector for external devices and the relay terminal block, use a shielded cable and ground it to the control panel. In addition, the wire length should be 3m or less.
HART-enabled analog-digital converter module
� Install a DC power supply and a HART-enabled analog-digital converter module inside the same control panel. � Keep each DC power cable length to 30m or less.
High-speed counter module, channel isolated pulse input module
� Install a DC power supply and a high-speed counter module inside the same control panel. � Keep each DC power cable length to 30m or less. � Keep the length of cables connected to external devices to 30m or less.
242 APPX Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Flexible high-speed I/O control modules
� Install a ferrite core to the DC power cables connected to the flexible high-speed I/O control module and the DC power cables connected to the controller. The ferrite core, ESD-SR-250, manufactured by TOKIN Corporation is recommended.
� Install a DC power supply and a flexible high-speed I/O control module inside the same control panel. � Use a shielded cable as the DC power cable when it is extended out of the control panel. � Keep the length of the cables between the output section and the external devices to 2m or less for open collector output or
10m or less for differential output. � Keep the length of the cables between the input section and the external devices to 30m or less.

Channel isolated analog-digital converter module (SIL2 mode)
� Do not ground the shielded cable between the RY40PT5B of the module set and the terminal module. � Use a same external power supply for the R60DA8-G and the RY40PT5B of the module set. � For the external power supply of relays, attach a ferrite core with the damping characteristics equivalent to that of the ESD-
SR-250 (manufactured by TOKIN Corporation). Wrap the cable around the ferrite core by one or more. � Install a DC power supply and a channel isolated analog-digital converter module (SIL2 mode) inside the same control
panel. � Keep each DC power cable length to 30m or less.

Channel isolated digital-analog converter module (SIL2 mode)

� Do not ground the shielded cable between the RY40PT5B-AS of the module set and the terminal module.

� Use a same external power supply for the R60DA8-G and the RY40PT5B-AS of the module set.

� For the external power supply of the R60DA8-G set to SIL2 mode, attach a ferrite core with the damping characteristics

equivalent to that of the ESD-SR-250 (manufactured by TOKIN Corporation). Wrap the cable around the ferrite core by two

or more.

� For the external power supply of relays, attach a ferrite core with the damping characteristics equivalent to that of the ESD-

SR-250 (manufactured by TOKIN Corporation). Wrap the cable around the ferrite core by one or more.

� Install a DC power supply and a channel isolated digital-analog converter module (SIL2 mode) inside the same control

panel.

� Keep each DC power cable length to 30m or less.

Positioning modules
� Install a DC power supply and a positioning module inside the same control panel.
� Keep the length of a cable between the RD75 and a drive unit as follows.
� RD75P: 2m or less � RD75D: 10m or less
� Keep the length of cables connected to external devices to 30m or less except the pulse output.
� Keep each DC power cable length to 30m or less.

Simple Motion modules
� Install a DC power supply and a Simple Motion module inside the same control panel. � Keep the length of cables connected to external devices to 30m or less (10m or less for open collector output type). � In wiring inside the panel, the power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable such as
an expansion cable or a network cable must not be mixed. In the duct, leave 10cm (3.94inch) or more between the power line and the communication cable, and separate using a separator (made of metal), etc. It is required in the same control panel as well. � Mixing the power line and communication cable may cause increase of noise or malfunction due to noise influence.

243 APPX
Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

CPU module, Ethernet interface module with built-in CC-Link IE (when using the Ethernet function), EtherNet/IP network interface module

� Use a shielded twisted pair cable for connection to the 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-T connector. Strip a part of

the jacket of the shielded twisted pair cable as shown below and ground the exposed shield to the largest area.

(1)

(1) Shield

(2) Clamp

(2)

CC-Link IE TSN master/local module, CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules, Ethernet interface modules with built-in CC-Link IE (when using the CC-Link IE function), CCLink IE Field Network-compatible Simple Motion modules, and remote head module

� Use an Ethernet cable recommended by CC-Link Partner Association.

� Ethernet cable is a shielded cable. Strip a part of the jacket as shown below and ground the exposed shield to the largest

area.

(1)

(1) Shield

(2) Clamp

(2)

CC-Link modules

� Ground the shield of a cable connected to the CC-Link module or any of the CC-Link stations which is the farthest from the

input power inside the control panel within 30cm from the module or station.

� Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable Strip a part of the jacket of the cable as shown below and

ground the exposed shield to the largest area.
(1)

(1) Shield (2) Clamp

(2)
� Use the specified Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable. � Use the FG terminals of the CC-Link module and CC-Link stations as shown below to connect to the FG line inside the
control panel.

Terminating resistor

DA (Blue) DB (White) DG (Yellow)

(Blue) (White) (Yellow)

DA DB DG

(Blue) (White) (Yellow)

DA DB DG

SLD FG

Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable

SLD FG

Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable

SLD FG

Terminating resistor

� Use a CE-marked power supply to which the module power supply or external power supply is connected. Ground the FG

terminals.

� Keep each power cable connected to the external power supply terminal or module power supply terminal to 30m or less.

� Connect a noise filter to the external power supply. Use a noise filter with the damping characteristic, MA1206

(manufactured by TDK-Lambda Corporation) or equivalent. Note that a noise filter is not required if the module is used in

Zone A defined in EN 61131-2.

Manufacturer

Contact

TDK-Lambda Corporation

www.tdk-lambda.com

� Keep the length of signal cables connected to the analog input terminals of the AJ65BT-64RD3, AJ65BT-64RD4, and AJ65BT-68TD to 30m or less. Wire cables connected to the external power supply and module power supply terminal in the control panel where the module is installed.

244 APPX Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

� For the cable connected to the power supply terminal or the AJ65SBT-RPS, AJ65SBT-RPG, or AJ65BT-68TD, install a ferrite core with the damping characteristics, ZCAT3035-1330 (manufactured by TDK Corporation) or equivalent. Wrap the cable around the ferrite core by one as shown below.

Manufacturer

Contact

TDK Corporation

www.global.tdk.com

� To supply the module power supply terminal of the AJ65BTB2-16R/16DR, or AJ65SBTB2N-8A/8R/8S/16A/16R/16S with
power using the AC/DC power supply, follow as shown below.
� Install the AC/DC power supply in the control panel where the module is installed. � Use a reinforced or double insulated CE-marked AC/DC power supply, and ground the FG terminal. (AC/DC power supply used for the tests conducted by
Mitsubishi: DLP-120-24-1 (manufactured by TDK-Lambda Corporation)) � For the cable connected to the AC input terminal and DC output terminals of the AC/DC power supply, attach a ferrite core. Wrap the cable around the ferrite
core by one as shown below. (Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: ESD-SR-250 manufactured by TOKIN Corporation)

245 APPX
Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

GPIB interface module
Attach ferrite cores to the connector bases on the both ends of GPIB cable. Use the ferrite core equivalent to ZCAT3035-1330

manufactured by TDK Corporation. Use the ferrite core with the cable threaded through it.

Manufacturer

Contact

TDK Corporation

www.global.tdk.com

AnyWireASLINK master module
� For the grounding of the RJ51AW12AL and routing of the power supply cable, provide a ground point to the control panel near the power supply module. Then, ground the LG terminals of the transmission cable terminal block to the ground point with the thickest and shortest ground cable possible (2 or less, a length of 30cm or shorter).
� For the cable connected to the transmission cable terminal block, install a ferrite core with the damping characteristics, the ZCAT3035-1330 (manufactured by TDK Corporation) or equivalent, within 20cm from the transmission cable terminal block of this product. Wrap the cable around the ferrite core by one as shown below.

Manufacturer

Contact

TDK Corporation

www.global.tdk.com

� Use a CE-marked power supply to which the module power supply or external power supply is connected. Ground the FG

terminals.

� Keep each power cable connected to the external power supply terminal or module power supply terminal to 30m or less. � Use the RJ51AW12AL in the zone B.*1
*1 Zone defines categories according to industrial environment, specified in the EMC and Low Voltage Directives, EN61131-2. � Zone C: Factory main power supplies (isolated from public power supplies by dedicated transformers) � Zone B: Dedicated power distribution, secondary surge protection (Rated voltage: 300V or less) � Zone A: Local power distribution, protected from dedicated power distribution by AC/DC converters and insulation transformers (Rated voltage: 120V or less)

CANopen module

� Ground shields of CAN bus cables at the both ends of the network. When grounding the shields, check for the potential

difference between the grounding points to secure the safety. Take a measure to prevent a damage if the potential

difference is detected.

GND

(1) Terminating resistor

CAN-

(1)

SLD

(1)

CAN+

� CAN bus cable is a shielded cable. Strip a part of the jacket of the cable as shown below and ground the exposed shield to

the area of 35mm or more.

(1)

(1) Shield

(2) Clamp

(2)

246 APPX Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Laser displacement sensor control module
� Connect a noise filter to the external power supply. Use a noise filter with the damping characteristic, RSEN-2006

(manufactured by TDK-Lambda Corporation) or equivalent.

Manufacturer

Contact

TDK-Lambda Corporation

www.tdk-lambda.com

� Use a DC power cable of 30m or shorter when connecting it to the external power supply terminal. When an external power supply and a programmable controller are installed in the same control panel, twist the DC power cable at the shortest distance and connect the external power supply cable to the module as short as possible. For the DC power cable, install a ferrite core with the damping characteristics equivalent to that of the E04SR200935A (manufactured by SEIWA ELECTRIC MFG. CO., LTD.). Wrap the cable around the ferrite core by one as shown below at this time.

� When the DC power cable is extended for 5m or more or connected from outside the control panel of the programmable

controller, use a shielded cable. Depending on the usage environment, strip a part of the jacket of the cable as shown

below and ground the exposed shield to the largest area within a range of 30cm from the control module.

(1)

(1) Shield

(2) Clamp

(2)

� An external power supply terminal is available for the cable within 2.0. Use the thickest cable as possible for grounding.

� Ground the shields of the sensor head cables to the control panel with an AD75CK cable clamp (manufactured by

Mitsubishi Electric). Ground the shields within 20 to 30cm from the module. Ground shield materials with braided wires for

grounding and cables to a cable clamp. (Shield material used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: Shielded tube (zipper

type) SHNJ type manufactured by Zippertubing (Japan),Ltd.)

(1)

(1) Connect the cable to the control module.

(2) Braided wires for grounding

(3) Connect the cable to outside control panel.

(2) (3)

AD75CK

20 to 30cm

247 APPX
Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

� A ferrite core for the sensor head cable is effective for reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz frequency band. It is recommended to install a ferrite core and shielded tube (zipper type) if a shield cable does not provide sufficient shielding effects. Install a ferrite core to the connection point where the cable of the sensor head. After installing the ferrite core, cover it with a shielded tube (zipper type). (Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi: E04SR200935A manufactured by SEIWA ELECTRIC MFG. CO., LTD.)
(1) Ferrite core (1)
248 APPX Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Measures to comply with the Low Voltage Directive

The Low Voltage Directive requires electrical equipment that is designed or adapted for use between 50 to 1000VAC or 75 to 1500VDC to satisfy the safety requirements. This section describes the precautions for use of the MELSEC iQ-R series modules to comply with the Low Voltage Directive. These precautions are based on the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive and the harmonized standards. However, they do not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions complies with the Low Voltage Directive. The manufacturer of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance and declare conformity to the Low Voltage Directive.

Standard applied to MELSEC iQ-R series modules
� EN61131-2 "Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use" The MELSEC iQ-R series modules that operate at 50VAC/75VDC or higher rated input voltage have also been developed in accordance with EN61131-2. However, the modules which operate at less than 50VAC/75VDC rated input voltage are not targeted for the Low Voltage Directive compliance.

MELSEC iQ-R series products to comply with the Low Voltage Directive

Power supply modules
Power supply modules for the AC power supply which operate at 100VAC or 200VAC rated input voltage have hazardous voltage (peak voltage higher than or equal to 42.4V) internally. Therefore, insulation between the primary and secondary circuits is reinforced for CE-marked power supply modules.

I/O modules

I/O modules which operate at 100VAC or 200VAC rated input voltage have hazardous voltage (peak voltage higher than or

equal to 42.4V) internally. Therefore, insulation between the primary and secondary circuits is reinforced for CE-marked I/O

modules. I/O modules which operate at 24VDC or less rated input voltage are not targeted for the Low Voltage Directive compliance.

Base units, CPU modules, remote head modules, SD memory cards, extended SRAM cassettes, battery-less option cassettes, and intelligent function modules
These products are not targeted for the Low Voltage Directive compliance because the circuits in the products operate at the
24VDC or less rated voltage.

Power supply
Power supply modules are designed to meet the overvoltage category . Confirm that the power supply to a programmable controller meets the overvoltage category .

Control panel
Protection against electric shock
Handle the control panel as follows to protect a person who does not have adequate knowledge of electrical installation from an electric shock. � Lock the control panel so that only a person who is trained and has acquired enough knowledge of electrical installation can
open the panel. � Design the control panel so that the power supply is automatically shut off when the panel is opened. � Use a control panel with a protection degree of IP20 or higher.
Protection from dust and water
The control panel needs to be dustproof and waterproof. Insufficient dustproof and waterproof lower the dielectric withstand of the control panel, possibly causing dielectric breakdown. For protection against dust and water splashes, install the programmable controllers inside a control panel with a protection degree of IP54 or equivalent.

249 APPX
Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

External wiring

24VDC external power supply
For 24VDC I/O modules or intelligent function modules requiring an external power supply, connect an external power supply of which insulation between the 24VDC circuit section and the hazardous voltage circuit section is reinforced.

External devices
For external devices connected to a programmable controller, use the one of which insulation between the interface circuit section to the programmable controller and the hazardous voltage circuit section is reinforced (if the device internally has a hazardous voltage circuit section).

Reinforced insulation
Reinforced insulation means insulation having the following withstand voltage.

Rated voltage of hazardous voltage 150VAC or less 300VAC or less

Surge withstand voltage (1.2/50s) 2500V 4000V

(Overvoltage category , source: IEC 664)

250 APPX Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Appendix 8 Machinery Directive
Compliance with the Machinery Directive, which is one of the EU directives, has been mandatory for safety products sold within EU member states since 1995. Based on the certification by a third-party certification organization, TUV Rheinland, we declare that the safety programmable controller complies with the Machinery Directive and affix the CE marking on it. The sales representative in EU member states is: Company: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. Address: Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1, 40882 Ratingen, Germany
Measures to comply with the Machinery Directive
The Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) requires that machinery satisfy the three pillars of safety: mechanical safety, electrical safety, and worker safety. The safety programmable controller complies with the Machinery Directive. Before using this product, please read this manual, the relevant manuals, and the safety standards carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The descriptions are based on the requirements of the Machinery Directive and the harmonized standards. However, they do not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions complies with the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance and declare conformity to the Machinery Directive.
A
251 APPX
Appendix 8 Machinery Directive

Machinery Directive related standards

Immunity requirements
Standard: EN61326-3-1:2008

Test item

Test description

Value specified in standard

EN61000-4-2 Electrostatic discharge immunity*1

An electrostatic discharge is applied to � 8kV: Air discharge

the enclosure of the equipment.

� 6kV: Contact discharge

EN61000-4-3
Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity*1

An electric field is radiated to the product.

EN61000-4-4 Fast transient burst immunity*1

Burst noise is applied to power lines and signal lines.

80% AM modulation @1kHz � 80 to 1000MHz: 20V/m � 1.4 to 2.0GHz: 10V/m � 2.0 to 2.7GHz: 3Vm
� AC power: 3kV � DC power: 3kV � I/O: 2kV, Functional earth: 2kV

EN61000-4-5 Surge immunity*1

Lightning surge is applied to power lines and signal lines.

� AC power: 2kV CM, 4kV CM � DC power: 1kV CM, 2kV CM � I/O: 2kV CM

EN61000-4-6 Conducted RF immunity*1
EN61000-4-8 Power-frequency magnetic field immunity*1

High-frequency noise is applied to power lines and signal lines.
The product is immersed in the magnetic field of an induction coil.

0.15 to 80MHz, 80% AM modulation @1kHz, 10Vrms
50/60Hz, 30A/m

EN61000-4-11 Voltage dips and interruptions immunity*1

Power voltage is momentarily interrupted.

EN61000-4-29 Voltage dips and interruptions immunity*1

Power voltage is momentarily interrupted.

� 0%, 1 period � 0%, 250/300 periods (50/60Hz) � 40%, 10/12 periods (50/60Hz) � 70%, 25/30 periods (50/60Hz)
� 40% UT 10ms � 0% UT 20ms

EN61000-4-16 Immunity to conducted, common mode disturbances in the frequency range 0Hz to 150kHz*1

Low-frequency noise is applied to power lines and signal lines.

� AC power 1.5k to15kHz: 1 to 10V, 20dB/decade 15k to 150kHz: 10V � DC power 1.5k to15kHz: 1 to 10V, 20dB/decade 15k to 150kHz: 10V DC, 16 2/3Hz, 50Hz and 60Hz: 10V (continuous mode), 100V (short term mode (1s duration) 150Hz and 180Hz: 10V (continuous mode) � I/O 1.5k to15kHz: 1 to 10V, 20dB/decade 15k to 150kHz: 10V DC, 16 2/3Hz, 50/60Hz: 10V continuous, 100V for a short time (1s) 150Hz and 180Hz: 10V (continuous mode)

*1 Safety programmable controller is an open-type device intended to be placed in a conductive control panel or similar type of enclosure. The tests were conducted with the safety programmable controller installed in a control panel.

252 APPX Appendix 8 Machinery Directive

Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements
When a programmable controller is powered on or off, the control module may not output signals correctly for a moment due to differences in the delay and startup times between the power supply for the programmable controller and the external power supply (especially, DC power) for the control module. Signals also may not be output correctly when the external power supply or the programmable controller fails. In terms of fail-safe and to prevent any incorrect output signals from leading to the entire system failure, configure safety circuits (such as emergency stop circuits, protection circuits, and interlock circuits) external to the programmable controller for the parts where the incorrect output may cause damage to the machines or accidents. This section shows system design circuit examples, considering the points described above. When the C Controller module is used, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R C Controller Module User's Manual (Application)
System design circuit examples

When the ERR contact of the power supply module is not used

AC power Power supply

AC and DC power Power supply

Transformer Fuse

A signal is input when the DC power connection is established.

Transformer
Fuse

CPU module

CPU module SM52

SM52 Ym

DC power

SM403

(-) (+)

SM403 Yn

Start/Stop circuit*2

Yn
XM TM

Fuse Set a TM value.*1

Start switch
MC

Program
RA1
MC
Stop switch
Input module

TM
MC1 N0 M10
N0 M10

Start switch
MC

Program
RA1
MC
Stop

Output module
Ym L

Low battery alarm (Lamp or buzzer)
This relay turns on after

switch RA2

Input module RA2 XM

Use of a voltage relay is recommended.

the CPU module runs and

RA1

SM403 turns off.

Output module MC

Output module

Power supplied to the output

devices is shut off when the

stop switch is pressed.*3

RA1

Low battery alarm (Lamp or buzzer)
This relay turns on after the CPU module runs and SM403 turns off.

MC2
MC1
MC1
MC2

Output module

Interlock circuits*4

MC2
MC1

MC MC
Power supplied to the output devices is shut off when the stop switch is pressed.*3

MC1
MC2

253 APPX
Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements

*1 Set a time required for DC power supply to be established. *2 The programmable controller starts when RA1 (run monitor relay) turns on. *3 The stop switch means an emergency stop switch or a limit switch. *4 Configure external interlock circuits for conflicting operations such as forward/reverse rotations and the parts where the incorrect output
may cause damage to the machines or accidents.
The power-on procedure is described below.
For AC power
1. Power on the programmable controller. 2. Run the CPU module. 3. Turn on the start switch. 4. The output devices will be activated by the program when the relay, MC, turns on.
For AC and DC power
1. Power on the programmable controller. 2. Run the CPU module. 3. The relay, RA2, turns on when AC power is converted to DC power. 4. The timer, TM, turns on when the DC power connection is fully established.
(The TM value shall be the time required from when RA2 turns on to when the DC power connection is fully established. Set this value to 0.5 seconds.)
5. Turn on the start switch. 6. The output devices will be activated by the program when the relay, MC, turns on.
(If a voltage relay is used for RA2, the timer, TM, is not required.)
254 APPX Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements

When the ERR contact of the power supply module is used
AC and DC power Power supply

Transformer Transformer

Fuse

CPU module

A signal is input when the DC power connection is established.

SM52 Ym
SM403 Yn
XM TM

Start switch
MC

TM
MC1 N0 M10
N0 M10
Program
RA1 RA3 MC
Stop switch

DC power (-) (+)
Fuse Set a TM value.*1
Start/Stop circuit*2

RA2

Input module RA2 XM

Use of a voltage relay is recommended.

Output module

Low battery alarm (Lamp or buzzer)

Ym L

This relay turns on after the CPU

module runs and SM403 turns off.

RA1

Power

ERR

supply

RA3

module

This relay turns off when the ERR contact turns off (a stop error occurs).

Output module

MC MC

MC2
MC1
MC1
MC2

Power supplied to the output devices is shut off when the stop switch is pressed.*3
Interlock circuits*4

*1 Set a time required for DC power supply to be established. *2 The programmable controller starts when RA1 (run monitor relay) turns on. *3 The output devices are turned off at a stop caused by a stop switch (an emergency stop switch or a limit switch) or ERR contact OFF. *4 Configure external interlock circuits for conflicting operations such as forward/reverse rotations and the parts where the incorrect output
may cause damage to the machines or accidents.

255 APPX
Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements

The power-on procedure is described below.
For AC and DC power
1. Power on the programmable controller. 2. Run the CPU module. 3. The relay, RA2, turns on when AC power is converted to DC power. 4. The timer, TM, turns on when the DC power connection is fully established.
(The TM value shall be the time required from when RA2 turns on to when the DC power connection is fully established. Set this value to 0.5 seconds.)
5. Turn on the start switch. 6. The output devices will be activated by the program when the relay, MC, turns on.
(If a voltage relay is used for RA2, the timer, TM, is not required.)
256 APPX Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements

Fail-safe measures for programmable controller failure
A CPU module and a remote head module can detect hardware failures of themselves and their memory by the selfdiagnostic function. However, failures which occur in a part, such as an I/O control part, may not be detected. In this case, depending on the failure, all input or output points may turn on or off, or normal operation and safety of the control-target device may not be ensured. Even though Mitsubishi programmable controllers are manufactured under strict quality control, they may fail due to some reasons. Provide fail-safe circuits external to the programmable controller so that no machine is damaged and no accident occurs. A system example and its fail-safe circuit example are shown below.

Power supply module CPU module X00 to X0F X10 to X1F X20 to X2F ... X30 to X3F Y40 to Y4F ... Power supply module Y50 to Y5F Y60 to Y6F Y70 to Y7F Y80 to Y8F Empty

*1
*1 Mount an output module for fail-safe purpose in the last slot of the system. In the example above, Y80 to Y8F are assigned to the output module.

Internal program

Y80

On delay timer T1 1s

SM412 Y80

Off delay timer T2 1s

Y81

MC
Load

Load

Y80

Y8F

24V 0.5s 0.5s

0V 24VDC

CPU module

Output module*2

*2 Since Y80 turns on and off at 0.5 second intervals, use a contactless output module. (In the example above, a transistor output module is used.)

257 APPX
Appendix 9 General Safety Requirements

Appendix 10 Calculating Heating Value of
Programmable Controller
The ambient temperature inside the control panel where a programmable controller is installed must be 55 or less (for the extended temperature range base unit, 60 or less). It is necessary to know the average power consumption (heating value) of the equipment and devices installed inside the control panel when designing a heat release structure of the panel. Calculate a rise in ambient temperature inside the control panel according to the following calculation formula. The calculation formula for a rise in ambient temperature inside the control panel is as follows.
T = W (�C) UA
W: Average power consumption of the entire programmable controller system ( Page 258 Calculation formula for the average power consumption) A: Surface area inside the control panel () U: 6 when the ambient temperature inside the control panel is uniformed using a fan or 4 when the air inside the control panel is not circulated
If the temperature inside the control panel is expected to exceed the specified range, it is recommended to install a heat exchanger to the panel to lower the temperature. If a general-purpose fan is used, dust will be sucked into the control panel with the external air. This may affect the performance of the programmable controller.
Calculation formula for the average power consumption
The power power consumption of the programmable controller are roughly classified into six blocks: WPW, W5V, W24V, WOUT, WIN, WS The total of the power consumption calculated for each block is the power consumption of the entire programmable controller system. W = WPW + W5V + W24V + WOUT + WIN + WS(W) Calculate a heating value and a rise in ambient temperature inside the control panel according to the calculated power consumption (W). For the calculation formula for each block, refer to the following. � WPW ( Page 259 Power consumption of a power supply module) � W5V ( Page 259 Total of the internal current consumption 5VDC of each module) � W24V ( Page 259 Total of the 24VDC average power consumption of the output module) � WOUT ( Page 259 Average power consumption when the voltage drop of the output module occurs) � WIN ( Page 259 Average power consumption at the input section of the input module) � WS ( Page 259 Power consumption of the external power supply used for each module)
The total current consumption of each module can be checked by the engineering tool.
258 APPX Appendix 10 Calculating Heating Value of Programmable Controller

Power consumption of a power supply module
For a power supply module with the power conversion efficiency of approximately 70%, the remaining 30% is dissipated as heat, that is, 3/7 of the output power will be the power consumption.*1 Therefore, the power consumption of a power supply module, or WPW, is given by the following formula:
3 WPW = 7 � { (I5v � 5) + (I24v � 24) } (W)
I5V: Internal current consumption 5VDC of each module I24V: Average current consumption (current consumption for the number of simultaneous on points) of 24VDC power supply for the output module internal consumption This does not apply to a case where a power supply module that does not have the 24VDC output is used and 24VDC is supplied from the outside.
*1 The value 3/7 varies according to the power conversion efficiency. For example, when the efficiency is approximately 75%, the value is 1/4. Check the efficiency of the power supply module used and determine the value. ( Page 120 Performance Specifications of Power Supply Module)

Total of the internal current consumption 5VDC of each module

The power consumption of the 5VDC output in the power supply module is that of each module including the base unit and CPU module.* 1

The total of the internal current consumption 5VDC of each module, or W5V, is given by the following formula: W5V = I5V 5(W)
*1 For the power consumption of the Motion CPU, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Motion Controller User's Manual
For the power consumption of the NCCPU, refer to the following. C80 Series Connection and Setup Manual
For the power consumption of the robot CPU, refer to the following. Standard Specifications Manual for the controller used

Total of the 24VDC average power consumption of the output module

The average power consumption (power consumption for the number of simultaneous on points) of the 24VDC power supply for the output module internal consumption is equal to the total power consumption of each output module. The total average power consumption 24VDC of output modules, or W24V, is given by the following formula: W24V = I24V 24 Simultaneous on ratio (W)

Average power consumption when the voltage drop of the output module occurs
The average power consumption (power consumption for the number of simultaneous on points) due to a voltage drop at the output sections of output modules, or WOUT, is given by the following formula: WOUT = IOUT Vdrop Number of output points Simultaneous on ratio (W) IOUT: Output current (current in actual use) (A) Vdrop: Voltage drop of each output module (V)

Average power consumption at the input section of the input module
The average power consumption (power consumption for the number of simultaneous on points) at the input sections of input modules, or WIN, is given by the following formula: WIN = IIN E Number of input points Simultaneous on ratio (W) IIN: Input current (effective value for AC) (A) E: Input voltage (voltage in actual use) (V)

Power consumption of the external power supply used for each module
The power consumption of the external power supply section of each intelligent function module, or WS, is given by the following formula: WS = I24V 24(W)

259 APPX
Appendix 10 Calculating Heating Value of Programmable Controller

Calculation examples for the average power consumption

System configuration

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5) (6)

(7)

5VDC/24VDC current consumption of each module

No. Module or unit

(1)

Power supply module

(2)

CPU module

(3)

Input module

(4)

Output module

(5)

Network module

(6)

Intelligent function module

(7)

Base unit

5VDC 0.69A 0.04A 0.052A 0.6A 0.272A 0.22A

24VDC 0.01A 0.192A

Power consumption of each block
Power consumption of power supply module
WPW = 3/7 (0.69 + 0.04 + 0.04 + 0.052 + 0.6 + 0.272 + 0.22) 5 = 4.10(W)
Total power consumption for 5VDC logic circuits of all module
W5V = (0.69 + 0.04 + 0.04 + 0.052 + 0.6 + 0.272 + 0.22) 5 = 9.57(W)
Total of the 24VDC average power consumption of the output module
W24V = 0.01 24 1 = 0.24(W)
Average power consumption when the voltage drop of the output module occurs
WOUT = 0.1 0.2 16 1 = 0.32(W)
Average power consumption at the input section of the input module
WIN = 0.004 24 32 1 = 3.07(W)
Power consumption of the external power supply used for each module
WS = 0.192 24 = 4.61(W)
Power consumption of the overall system
W = 4.10 + 9.57 + 0.24 + 0.32 + 3.07 + 4.61 = 21.91(W)

260 APPX Appendix 10 Calculating Heating Value of Programmable Controller

Appendix 11 Precautions for Battery Transportation

When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations.
Regulated models

The batteries for the CPU module are classified as shown below.

Model

Supply status

Q7BATN

Lithium battery

Q7BAT

Lithium battery

Q6BAT

Lithium battery

FX3U-32BL

Lithium battery

Classification for transportation Dangerous goods Dangerous goods Dangerous goods Non-dangerous goods

Transport guidelines

Products are packed in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment. When repacking any of the unpacked products for transportation, make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG (International Maritime Dangerous Goods) Code, and other local transportation regulations. For details, please consult the shipping carrier used.

261 APPX
Appendix 11 Precautions for Battery Transportation

Appendix 12 Handling of Batteries and Devices with
Built-In Batteries in EU Member States
This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.
Disposal precautions
In EU member states, there is a separate collection system for waste batteries. Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection/recycling center. The following symbol mark is printed on the batteries and packaging of devices with built-in batteries. The symbol mark indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes.

This symbol mark is for EU member states only. The symbol mark is specified in the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) Article 20 "Information for end-users" and Annex .
Exportation precautions
The new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states. � To print the symbol mark on batteries, devices, or their packaging � To explain the symbol mark in the manuals of the products
Labeling
To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no symbol mark, to EU member states, print the symbol mark shown in the following on the batteries, devices, or their packaging. Page 262 Disposal precautions
Explaining the symbol in the manuals
To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member states, provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol mark. If manuals are not provided, separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol mark to each manual of the devices.
The requirements apply to batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC).

262

APPX Appendix 12 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-In Batteries in EU Member States

Appendix 13 Type Approval Certificates for Ship
Classifications

MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controllers have acquired Type Approval Certificates from classification societies. Therefore, these programmable controllers can be used for machinery or devices for marine and offshore applications. For information on the models that have been approved by the classification societies, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Classification societies that issue the Type Approval Certificates
MELSEC iQ-R series have acquired the Type Approval Certificates from the following classification societies. � American Bureau of Shipping (Abbreviation: ABS) � Bureau Veritas (Abbreviation: BV) � DNV GL (Abbreviation: DNV GL) � Lloyd's Register of Shipping (Abbreviation: LR) � Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (Abbreviation: NK) � Registro Italiano Navale (Abbreviation: RINA)

Precautions

The precautions for using the MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controller as the approved system are as follows:

� The programmable controller must be installed in a control panel.

� Use a shielded cable for a cable coming out of the control panel.

� Make sure to attach a noise filter to the power cable.

� Make sure to attach ferrite cores to all cables that are extended out of control panels, including power cables.

For details, refer to the following. Precautions to acquire the Type Approval Certificate for each ship classification in ABS, BV, DNV GL, LR, NK, RINA (FA-

A-0188)

263 APPX
Appendix 13 Type Approval Certificates for Ship Classifications

Appendix 14 External Dimensions
Power supply module
� R61P, R62P, R63P, R63RP, R64P, R64RP

106

110

54.6

182

19.5

(Unit: mm)

264 APPX Appendix 14 External Dimensions

Base unit
Main base unit
� R33B
8.9
(1) (2)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

32.5
(1) 4 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
� R35B
8.9
(2)

15.5 (1)

167 � 0.3 (169) 189

101

80 � 0.3

32.5
(1) 4 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
� R38B
8.9
(2)

15.5 (1)

222.5 � 0.3 (224.5) 245

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

32.5
(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)

15.5

190 � 0.3 (170) 328

116 � 0.3 (138)

265 APPX
Appendix 14 External Dimensions

� R312B
8.9
(1) (2)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5

190 � 0.3

(170) 32.5

(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
Extended temperature range main base unit
� R310B-HT
8.9

(1) (2)

227 � 0.3 (249)
439

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5
32.5
(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)

190 � 0.3 (170)

227 � 0.3 (249)
439

266 APPX Appendix 14 External Dimensions

Redundant power supply main base unit
� R310RB
8.9
(1) (2)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5

190 � 0.3

227 � 0.3

(170)

(249)

32.5

439

(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
Extended temperature range redundant power supply main base unit
� R38RB-HT
8.9

(1) (2)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5
32.5
(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)

190 � 0.3 (170)

227 � 0.3 (249)
439

267 APPX
Appendix 14 External Dimensions

Extension base unit
� R65B
8.9
(1) (2)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

32.5
(1) 4 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
� R68B
8.9
(2)

15.5 (1)

222.5 � 0.3 (224.5) 245

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

32.5
(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
� R612B
8.9
(2)

15.5 (1)

190 � 0.3 (170)
328

116 � 0.3 (138)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5 32.5 (1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
268 APPX Appendix 14 External Dimensions

190 � 0.3 (170)

227 � 0.3 (249) 439

Extended temperature range extension base unit
� R610B-HT
8.9
(1) (2)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5

190 � 0.3

(170) 32.5

(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
Redundant power supply extension base unit
� R610RB
8.9

(1) (2)

227 � 0.3 (249)
439

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5

190 � 0.3

227 � 0.3

(170)

(249)

32.5

439

(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
Extended temperature range redundant power supply extension base unit
� R68RB-HT
8.9

(1) (2)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5
32.5
(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)

190 � 0.3 (170)

227 � 0.3 (249)
439
269 APPX
Appendix 14 External Dimensions

Redundant extension base unit
� R68WRB
8.9
(1) (2)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5

190 � 0.3

(170)

32.5

439

(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
Extended temperature range redundant extension base unit
� R66WRB-HT
8.9

(1) (2)

227 � 0.3 (249)

80 � 0.3

101

98 7

15.5
32.5
(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)

190 � 0.3 (170)

227 � 0.3 (249)
439

270 APPX Appendix 14 External Dimensions

RQ extension base unit

� RQ65B

7.5

(2)

(1)

80 � 0.3

15.5

44.1

(1) 4 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
� RQ68B

7.5

(2)

(1)

222.5 � 0.3 245

80 � 0.3

15.5

190 � 0.3

116 � 0.3

44.1

328

(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)
� RQ612B

7.5

(2)

(1)

80 � 0.3

15.5
44.1
(1) 5 installation screws (M414) (2) Rear surface of module (Unit: mm)

190 � 0.3

227 � 0.3 439

271 APPX
Appendix 14 External Dimensions

MEMO
272 APPX Appendix 14 External Dimensions

INDEX
A Applicable software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
B Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Battery replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
C Calculating the heating value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Connector pin for extension level setting . . . . . . 150 Consideration for internal current consumption. . . 88 Control CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 CPU number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
D Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 DIN rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
E EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Extended temperature range base unit . . . . . . . . 33 Extension base unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,125 External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
F Ferrite core. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Firmware update function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
G General safety requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
I I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 I/O numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Intelligent function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
L Lateral dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Lists of configuration devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
M Main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Module configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Module status setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Modules having restrictions on the number of mountable modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Multiple CPU system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

N
NCCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Noise filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

P
Periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Process CPU (process mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Process CPU (redundant mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Production information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Programmable controller CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Redundant extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . 33,42

Redundant function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Redundant power supply base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Redundant power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Redundant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Redundant system with redundant extension base

unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,42

Remote head module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

RnENCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

RnENCPU (CPU part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

RnENCPU (network part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Robot CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 RQ extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

S
Safety communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Safety control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Safety CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Safety device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Safety function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Safety program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Safety programmable controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 SIL2 function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 SIL2 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 SIL2 Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Single CPU system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Slot numbers on a base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Standard communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Standard control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Standard CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Standard device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Standard program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Standard programmable controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Standby system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 System A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 System B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 System configuration specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 78 System parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

273

T Tracking cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Troubleshooting by symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
W Wiring a connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Wiring to a screw terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Wiring to a spring clamp terminal block . . . . . . . 162 Wiring to the power supply module . . . . . . . . . . 157
274

REVISIONS

*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Revision date *Manual number

Revision

June 2014

SH(NA)-081262ENG-A

First edition

November 2014

SH(NA)-081262ENG-B

Added or modified parts TERMS, Section 1.1, 1.2, Appendix 1, 3, 4

January 2015

SH(NA)-081262ENG-C

Added models R62P, R64P Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, TERMS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 3.1, 3.3, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5, 5.7, 5.8, Chapter 6, Appendix 3, 4, 5, 6, 9

May 2015

SH(NA)-081262ENG-D

Added or modified parts TERMS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 5.8, 6.2, Appendix 1, 3

June 2015

SH(NA)-081262ENG-E

Added or modified parts Section 1.2

August 2015

SH(NA)-081262ENG-F

Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, TERMS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 4.5, 5.8, Appendix 5, WARRANTY

January 2016

SH(NA)-081262ENG-G

Added models R310B-HT, R610B-HT Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, TERMS, Section 1.3, 1.5, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1, 5.4, 5.7, 5.8, 6.2, Appendix 3, 5, 8, 11

May 2016

SH(NA)-081262ENG-H

Added models R64RP, R310RB, R610RB, R38RB-HT, R68RB-HT Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, TERMS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3, 5.4, 5.7, 6.2, Appendix 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11

September 2016

SH(NA)-081262ENG-I

Added or modified parts Section 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 4.4

October 2016

SH(NA)-081262ENG-J

Added model R63RP Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 3.1, 4.2, 5.7, 6.2, Appendix 1, 3, 6, 12

February 2017

SH(NA)-081262ENG-K

Added model RC100B Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.2, 1.4, 3.2, 4.3, 5.6, Appendix 4, 6

May 2017

SH(NA)-081262ENG-L

Added or modified parts Section 1.2, Appendix 1

July 2017

SH(NA)-081262ENG-M

Added or modified parts Section 1.2, 4.1, Appendix 6

October 2017

SH(NA)-081262ENG-N

Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, INTRODUCTION, TERMS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 4.5, 5.2, 6.2, Appendix 1, 2, 5, 9, 10, WARRANTY

December 2017

SH(NA)-081262ENG-O

Added or modified parts Section 1.2, Appendix 1

April 2018

SH(NA)-081262ENG-P

Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, TERMS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 5.7, 5.8, Appendix 1, 6, 12, TRADEMARKS

July 2018

SH(NA)-081262ENG-Q

Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 5.8, Appendix 1, 2, 6

October 2018

SH(NA)-081262ENG-R

Added models R33B Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 4.3, Appendix 6, 10, 13

May 2019

SH(NA)-081262ENG-S

Added or modified parts TERMS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 4.5, 5.2, 6.2, Appendix 2, 6, 10

275

Revision date *Manual number

Revision

June 2019

SH(NA)-081262ENG-T

Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.2, Appendix 6

August 2019

SH(NA)-081262ENG-U

Added or modified parts TERMS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.2, 1.3, Appendix 5, 13

October 2019

SH(NA)-081262ENG-V

Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.2, Appendix 2, 7, 14

December 2019

SH(NA)-081262ENG-W

Added or modified parts Section 1.2

February 2020

SH(NA)-081262ENG-X

Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.3

May 2020

SH(NA)-081262ENG-Y

Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 4.5, Appendix 2, 7

July 2020

SH(NA)-081262ENG-Z

Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, Appendix 2

October 2020

SH(NA)-081262ENG-AA

Added model R68WRB Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, TERMS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.3, 5.5, Appendix 2, 4, 14

January 2021

SH(NA)-081262ENG-AB

Added models R66WRB-HT, RD81RC96-CA, RJ71GB91 Added or modified parts Section 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 3.2, 4.3, 5.4, Appendix 2, 7, 14

Japanese manual number: SH-081222-AC

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

2014 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

276

WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module. [Gratis Warranty Term] The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs. [Gratis Warranty Range] (1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which
follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product. (2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases. 1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused
by the user's hardware or software design. 2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions
or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided. 4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced. 5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. 6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued. Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to: (1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi. (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products. (3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and
compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products. (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
277

For SIL2 Process CPUs
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Limited Warranty and Product Support.
a. Mitsubishi Electric Company ("MELCO") warrants that for a period of eighteen (18) months after date of delivery from the point of manufacture or one year from date of Customer's purchase, whichever is less, Mitsubishi programmable logic controllers (the "Products") will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
b. At MELCO's option, for those Products MELCO determines are not as warranted, MELCO shall either repair or replace them or issue a credit or return the purchase price paid for them.
c. For this warranty to apply: (1) Customer shall give MELCO (i) notice of a warranty claim to MELCO and the authorized dealer or distributor from whom the Products were purchased, (ii) the notice shall describe in reasonable details the warranty problem, (iii) the notice shall be provided promptly and in no event later than thirty (30) days after the Customer knows or has reason to believe that Products are not as warranted, and (iv) in any event, the notice must given within the warranty period; (2) Customer shall cooperate with MELCO and MELCO's representatives in MELCO's investigation of the warranty claim, including preserving evidence of the claim and its causes, meaningfully responding to MELCO's questions and investigation of the problem, grant MELCO access to witnesses, personnel, documents, physical evidence and records concerning the warranty problem, and allow MELCO to examine and test the Products in question offsite or at the premises where they are installed or used; and (3) If MELCO requests, Customer shall remove Products it claims are defective and ship them to MELCO or MELCO's authorized representative for examination and, if found defective, for repair or replacement. The costs of removal, shipment to and from MELCO's designated examination point, and reinstallation of repaired or replaced Products shall be at Customer's expense. (4) If Customer requests and MELCO agrees to effect repairs onsite at any domestic or overseas location, the Customer will pay for the costs of sending repair personnel and shipping parts. MELCO is not responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves repairs or replacing of the Products.
d. Repairs of Products located outside of Japan are accepted by MELCO's local authorized service facility centers ("FA Centers"). Terms and conditions on which each FA Center offers repair services for Products that are out of warranty or not covered by MELCO's limited warranty may vary.
e. Subject to availability of spare parts, MELCO will offer Product repair services for (7) years after each Product model or line is discontinued, at MELCO's or its FA Centers' rates and charges and standard terms in effect at the time of repair. MELCO usually produces and retains sufficient spare parts for repairs of its Products for a period of seven (7) years after production is discontinued.
f. MELCO generally announces discontinuation of Products through MELCO's Technical Bulletins. Products discontinued and repair parts for them may not be available after their production is discontinued.
2. Limits of Warranties.
a. MELCO does not warrant or guarantee the design, specify, manufacture, construction or installation of the materials, construction criteria, functionality, use, properties or other characteristics of the equipment, systems, or production lines into which the Products may be incorporated, including any safety, fail-safe and shut down systems using the Products.
b. MELCO is not responsible for determining the suitability of the Products for their intended purpose and use, including determining if the Products provide appropriate safety margins and redundancies for the applications, equipment or systems into which they are incorporated.
c. Customer acknowledges that qualified and experienced personnel are required to determine the suitability, application, design, construction and proper installation and integration of the Products. MELCO does not supply such personnel.
d. MELCO is not responsible for designing and conducting tests to determine that the Product functions appropriately and meets application standards and requirements as installed or incorporated into the end-user's equipment, production lines or systems.
e. MELCO does not warrant any Product: (1) repaired or altered by persons other than MELCO or its authorized engineers or FA Centers; (2) subjected to negligence, carelessness, accident, misuse, or damage; (3) improperly stored, handled, installed or maintained; (4) integrated or used in connection with improperly designed, incompatible or defective hardware or software; (5) that fails because consumable parts such as batteries, backlights, or fuses were not tested, serviced or replaced; (6) operated or used with equipment, production lines or systems that do not meet applicable and commensurate legal, safety and industry-accepted standards; (7) operated or used in abnormal applications; (8) installed, operated or used in contravention of instructions, precautions or warnings contained in MELCO's user, instruction and/or safety manuals, technical bulletins and guidelines for the Products; (9) used with obsolete technologies or technologies not fully tested and widely accepted and in use at the time of the Product's manufacture; (10) subjected to excessive heat or moisture, abnormal voltages, shock, excessive vibration, physical damage or other improper environment; or (11) damaged or malfunctioning due to Acts of God, fires, acts of vandals, criminals or terrorists, communication or power failures, or any other cause or failure that results from circumstances beyond MELCO's control.
f. All Product information and specifications contained on MELCO's website and in catalogs, manuals, or technical information materials provided by MELCO are subject to change without prior notice.
278

g. The Product information and statements contained on MELCO's website and in catalogs, manuals, technical bulletins or other materials provided by MELCO are provided as a guide for Customer's use. They do not constitute warranties and are not incorporated in the contract of sale for the Products.
h. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Customer and MELCO with respect to warranties, remedies and damages and supersede any other understandings, whether written or oral, between the parties. Customer expressly acknowledges that any representations or statements made by MELCO or others concerning the Products outside these terms are not part of the basis of the bargain between the parties and are not factored into the pricing of the Products.
i. THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THESE TERMS ARE THE EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES THAT APPLY TO THE PRODUCTS.
j. MELCO DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
3. Limits on Damages.
a. MELCO'S MAXIMUM CUMULATIVE LIABILITY BASED ON ANY CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT TORT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORIES OF RECOVERY REGARDING THE SALE, REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, DELIVERY, PERFORMANCE, CONDITION, SUITABILITY, COMPLIANCE, OR OTHER ASPECTS OF THE PRODUCTS OR THEIR SALE, INSTALLATION OR USE SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE PRICE PAID FOR PRODUCTS NOT AS WARRANTED.
b. Although MELCO has obtained the certification for Product's compliance to the international safety standards IEC61508 and IEC61511 from TUV Rheinland, this fact does not guarantee that Product will be free from any malfunction or failure. The user of this Product shall comply with any and all applicable safety standard, regulation or law and take appropriate safety measures for the system in which the Product is installed or used and shall take the second or third safety measures other than the Product. MELCO is not liable for damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard, regulation or law.
c. MELCO prohibits the use of Products with or in any application involving power plants, trains, railway systems, airplanes, airline operations, other transportation systems, amusement equipments, hospitals, medical care, dialysis and life support facilities or equipment, incineration and fuel devices, handling of nuclear or hazardous materials or chemicals, mining and drilling, and other applications where the level of risk to human life, health or property are elevated.
d. MELCO SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, SALES, OR REVENUE, FOR INCREASED LABOR OR OVERHEAD COSTS, FOR DOWNTIME OR LOSS OF PRODUCTION, FOR COST OVERRUNS, OR FOR ENVIRONMENTAL OR POLLUTION DAMAGES OR CLEAN-UP COSTS, WHETHER THE LOSS IS BASED ON CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT OR WARRANTY, VIOLATION OF STATUTE, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE.
e. In the event that any damages which are asserted against MELCO arising out of or relating to the Products or defects in them, consist of personal injury, wrongful death and/or physical property damages as well as damages of a pecuniary nature, the disclaimers and limitations contained in these terms shall apply to all three types of damages to the fullest extent permitted by law. If, however, the personal injury, wrongful death and/or physical property damages cannot be disclaimed or limited by law or public policy to the extent provided by these terms, then in any such event the disclaimer of and limitations on pecuniary or economic consequential and incidental damages shall nevertheless be enforceable to the fullest extent allowed by law.
f. In no event shall any cause of action arising out of breach of warranty or otherwise concerning the Products be brought by Customer more than one year after the cause of action accrues.
g. Each of the limitations on remedies and damages set forth in these terms is separate and independently enforceable, notwithstanding the unenforceability or failure of essential purpose of any warranty, undertaking, damage limitation, other provision of these terms or other terms comprising the contract of sale between Customer and MELCO.
4. Delivery/Force Majeure.
a. Any delivery date for the Products acknowledged by MELCO is an estimated and not a promised date. MELCO will make all reasonable efforts to meet the delivery schedule set forth in Customer's order or the purchase contract but shall not be liable for failure to do so.
b. Products stored at the request of Customer or because Customer refuses or delays shipment shall be at the risk and expense of Customer.
c. MELCO shall not be liable for any damage to or loss of the Products or any delay in or failure to deliver, service, repair or replace the Products arising from shortage of raw materials, failure of suppliers to make timely delivery, labor difficulties of any kind, earthquake, fire, windstorm, flood, theft, criminal or terrorist acts, war, embargoes, governmental acts or rulings, loss or damage or delays in carriage, acts of God, vandals or any other circumstances reasonably beyond MELCO's control.
5. Choice of Law/Jurisdiction.
These terms and any agreement or contract between Customer and MELCO shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York without regard to conflicts of laws. To the extent any action or dispute is not arbitrated, the parties consent to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of the federal and state courts located in the Southern District of the State of New York. Any judgment there obtained may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction.
6. Arbitration.
Any controversy or claim arising out of, or relating to or in connection with the Products, their sale or use or these terms, shall be settled by arbitration conducted in accordance with the Center for Public Resources (CPR) Rules for Non-Administered Arbitration of International Disputes, by a sole arbitrator chosen from the CPR's panels of distinguished neutrals. Judgment upon the award rendered by the Arbitrator shall be final and binding and may be entered by any court having jurisdiction thereof. The place of the arbitration shall be New York City, New York. The language of the arbitration shall be English. The neutral organization designated to perform the functions specified in Rule 6 and Rules 7.7(b), 7.8 and 7.9 shall be the CPR.
279

For Safety CPUs
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Limited Warranty and Product Support.
a. Mitsubishi Electric Company ("MELCO") warrants that for a period of eighteen (18) months after date of delivery from the point of manufacture or one year from date of Customer's purchase, whichever is less, Mitsubishi MELSEC Safety programmable logic controllers (the "Products") will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
b. At MELCO's option, for those Products MELCO determines are not as warranted, MELCO shall either repair or replace them or issue a credit or return the purchase price paid for them.
c. For this warranty to apply: (1) Customer shall give MELCO (i) notice of a warranty claim to MELCO and the authorized dealer or distributor from whom the Products were purchased, (ii) the notice shall describe in reasonable details the warranty problem, (iii) the notice shall be provided promptly and in no event later than thirty (30) days after the Customer knows or has reason to believe that Products are not as warranted, and (iv) in any event, the notice must given within the warranty period; (2) Customer shall cooperate with MELCO and MELCO's representatives in MELCO's investigation of the warranty claim, including preserving evidence of the claim and its causes, meaningfully responding to MELCO's questions and investigation of the problem, grant MELCO access to witnesses, personnel, documents, physical evidence and records concerning the warranty problem, and allow MELCO to examine and test the Products in question offsite or at the premises where they are installed or used; and (3) If MELCO requests, Customer shall remove Products it claims are defective and ship them to MELCO or MELCO's authorized representative for examination and, if found defective, for repair or replacement. The costs of removal, shipment to and from MELCO's designated examination point, and reinstallation of repaired or replaced Products shall be at Customer's expense. (4) If Customer requests and MELCO agrees to effect repairs onsite at any domestic or overseas location, the Customer will pay for the costs of sending repair personnel and shipping parts. MELCO is not responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves repairs or replacing of the Products.
d. Repairs of Products located outside of Japan are accepted by MELCO's local authorized service facility centers ("FA Centers"). Terms and conditions on which each FA Center offers repair services for Products that are out of warranty or not covered by MELCO's limited warranty may vary.
e. Subject to availability of spare parts, MELCO will offer Product repair services for (7) years after each Product model or line is discontinued, at MELCO's or its FA Centers' rates and charges and standard terms in effect at the time of repair. MELCO usually produces and retains sufficient spare parts for repairs of its Products for a period of seven (7) years after production is discontinued.
f. MELCO generally announces discontinuation of Products through MELCO's Technical Bulletins. Products discontinued and repair parts for them may not be available after their production is discontinued.
2. Limits of Warranties.
a. MELCO does not warrant or guarantee the design, specify, manufacture, construction or installation of the materials, construction criteria, functionality, use, properties or other characteristics of the equipment, systems, or production lines into which the Products may be incorporated, including any safety, fail-safe and shut down systems using the Products.
b. MELCO is not responsible for determining the suitability of the Products for their intended purpose and use, including determining if the Products provide appropriate safety margins and redundancies for the applications, equipment or systems into which they are incorporated.
c. Customer acknowledges that qualified and experienced personnel are required to determine the suitability, application, design, construction and proper installation and integration of the Products. MELCO does not supply such personnel.
d. MELCO is not responsible for designing and conducting tests to determine that the Product functions appropriately and meets application standards and requirements as installed or incorporated into the end-user's equipment, production lines or systems.
e. MELCO does not warrant any Product: (1) repaired or altered by persons other than MELCO or its authorized engineers or FA Centers; (2) subjected to negligence, carelessness, accident, misuse, or damage; (3) improperly stored, handled, installed or maintained; (4) integrated or used in connection with improperly designed, incompatible or defective hardware or software; (5) that fails because consumable parts such as batteries, backlights, or fuses were not tested, serviced or replaced; (6) operated or used with equipment, production lines or systems that do not meet applicable and commensurate legal, safety and industry-accepted standards; (7) operated or used in abnormal applications; (8) installed, operated or used in contravention of instructions, precautions or warnings contained in MELCO's user, instruction and/or safety manuals, technical bulletins and guidelines for the Products; (9) used with obsolete technologies or technologies not fully tested and widely accepted and in use at the time of the Product's manufacture; (10) subjected to excessive heat or moisture, abnormal voltages, shock, excessive vibration, physical damage or other improper environment; or (11) damaged or malfunctioning due to Acts of God, fires, acts of vandals, criminals or terrorists, communication or power failures, or any other cause or failure that results from circumstances beyond MELCO's control.
f. All Product information and specifications contained on MELCO's website and in catalogs, manuals, or technical information materials provided by MELCO are subject to change without prior notice.
280

g. The Product information and statements contained on MELCO's website and in catalogs, manuals, technical bulletins or other materials provided by MELCO are provided as a guide for Customer's use. They do not constitute warranties and are not incorporated in the contract of sale for the Products.
h. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Customer and MELCO with respect to warranties, remedies and damages and supersede any other understandings, whether written or oral, between the parties. Customer expressly acknowledges that any representations or statements made by MELCO or others concerning the Products outside these terms are not part of the basis of the bargain between the parties and are not factored into the pricing of the Products.
i. THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THESE TERMS ARE THE EXCLUSIVE AND ONLY WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES THAT APPLY TO THE PRODUCTS.
j. MELCO DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
3. Limits on Damages.
a. MELCO'S MAXIMUM CUMULATIVE LIABILITY BASED ON ANY CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT TORT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORIES OF RECOVERY REGARDING THE SALE, REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, DELIVERY, PERFORMANCE, CONDITION, SUITABILITY, COMPLIANCE, OR OTHER ASPECTS OF THE PRODUCTS OR THEIR SALE, INSTALLATION OR USE SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE PRICE PAID FOR PRODUCTS NOT AS WARRANTED.
b. Although MELCO has obtained the certification for Product's compliance to the international safety standards IEC61508 and ISO13849-1 from TUV Rheinland, this fact does not guarantee that Product will be free from any malfunction or failure. The user of this Product shall comply with any and all applicable safety standard, regulation or law and take appropriate safety measures for the system in which the Product is installed or used and shall take the second or third safety measures other than the Product. MELCO is not liable for damages that could have been prevented by compliance with any applicable safety standard, regulation or law.
c. MELCO prohibits the use of Products with or in any application involving power plants, trains, railway systems, airplanes, airline operations, other transportation systems, amusement equipments, hospitals, medical care, dialysis and life support facilities or equipment, incineration and fuel devices, handling of nuclear or hazardous materials or chemicals, mining and drilling, and other applications where the level of risk to human life, health or property are elevated.
d. MELCO SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, SALES, OR REVENUE, FOR INCREASED LABOR OR OVERHEAD COSTS, FOR DOWNTIME OR LOSS OF PRODUCTION, FOR COST OVERRUNS, OR FOR ENVIRONMENTAL OR POLLUTION DAMAGES OR CLEAN-UP COSTS, WHETHER THE LOSS IS BASED ON CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT OR WARRANTY, VIOLATION OF STATUTE, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE.
e. In the event that any damages which are asserted against MELCO arising out of or relating to the Products or defects in them, consist of personal injury, wrongful death and/or physical property damages as well as damages of a pecuniary nature, the disclaimers and limitations contained in these terms shall apply to all three types of damages to the fullest extent permitted by law. If, however, the personal injury, wrongful death and/or physical property damages cannot be disclaimed or limited by law or public policy to the extent provided by these terms, then in any such event the disclaimer of and limitations on pecuniary or economic consequential and incidental damages shall nevertheless be enforceable to the fullest extent allowed by law.
f. In no event shall any cause of action arising out of breach of warranty or otherwise concerning the Products be brought by Customer more than one year after the cause of action accrues.
g. Each of the limitations on remedies and damages set forth in these terms is separate and independently enforceable, notwithstanding the unenforceability or failure of essential purpose of any warranty, undertaking, damage limitation, other provision of these terms or other terms comprising the contract of sale between Customer and MELCO.
4. Delivery/Force Majeure.
a. Any delivery date for the Products acknowledged by MELCO is an estimated and not a promised date. MELCO will make all reasonable efforts to meet the delivery schedule set forth in Customer's order or the purchase contract but shall not be liable for failure to do so.
b. Products stored at the request of Customer or because Customer refuses or delays shipment shall be at the risk and expense of Customer.
c. MELCO shall not be liable for any damage to or loss of the Products or any delay in or failure to deliver, service, repair or replace the Products arising from shortage of raw materials, failure of suppliers to make timely delivery, labor difficulties of any kind, earthquake, fire, windstorm, flood, theft, criminal or terrorist acts, war, embargoes, governmental acts or rulings, loss or damage or delays in carriage, acts of God, vandals or any other circumstances reasonably beyond MELCO's control.
5. Choice of Law/Jurisdiction.
These terms and any agreement or contract between Customer and MELCO shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York without regard to conflicts of laws. To the extent any action or dispute is not arbitrated, the parties consent to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of the federal and state courts located in the Southern District of the State of New York. Any judgment there obtained may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction.
6. Arbitration.
Any controversy or claim arising out of, or relating to or in connection with the Products, their sale or use or these terms, shall be settled by arbitration conducted in accordance with the Center for Public Resources (CPR) Rules for Non-Administered Arbitration of International Disputes, by a sole arbitrator chosen from the CPR's panels of distinguished neutrals. Judgment upon the award rendered by the Arbitrator shall be final and binding and may be entered by any court having jurisdiction thereof. The place of the arbitration shall be New York City, New York. The language of the arbitration shall be English. The neutral organization designated to perform the functions specified in Rule 6 and Rules 7.7(b), 7.8 and 7.9 shall be the CPR.
281

TRADEMARKS
CiA and CANopen are registered Community Trademarks of CAN in Automation e.V. DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA, Inc. PROFIBUS is a trademark of PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V. QR Code is either a registered trademark or a trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in the United States, Japan, and/or other countries. The SD and SDHC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.

282

SH(NA)-081262ENG-AB

SH(NA)-081262ENG-AB(2101)MEE

MODEL:

R-MK-E

MODEL CODE: 13JX01

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.